Home

Reference Manual 70 & 700 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive

1. PI Lower Limit PI Upper Limit PI Ref Hi igurati 131 pl 160 PI Configuration PI Prop Gain D Reference Cea C130 Se PI Ret Linear Hi L Ga y 126 gt 5 9 135 Ramp gt PI Cmd Po gt Kp e LT Scale iI Filter PI Status Limit PI Configuration 134 y y 9 PI Status Invert Xx PI Status GED 0 Ki Limi PI Fdbk Hi PI Ref Lo pl 0L FF Pl Integral Time 129 Hold LE PI Config Enable PI Configuration 7 E Feedback 124 5 R Anti Windup Z 1 Select amp PI Fdbk ai TA Hi Lo x Ref om PI Configuration Cont y 2 134 Scale V f I Fdbk PI Configuration C i Preload Value gt Al 3 urrent or Sart Votage Speed Cmd pH Enable Preload PI Output PI Fdbk Lo Speed Cmd m p Exclusive Limit 138 PI Configuration PI Configuration PI Status PI Configuration Je 1 Linear 5 L E 1 bi Speed Ref Y ii A Speed Ramp LH Speed Cmd Geom ee s m rd Jes t Enable Exclusi Clamp Torque Ref B Mult gt 0 f L Torque Ref B Sel Scale 800 y E gt Torque Cmd Torque Tor 1 gt que 4800 Trim Ref A Sel Scale pa Bs Clamp D Torque Ref A Div rem E3 PowerFlex 700 Firmware 3
2. AANA pe LI AAN FAAR nm Y UNNI Dimensions are in millimeters and inches PowerFlex 700 Dimensions 1 13 PowerFlex 700 Table 1 B PowerFlex 700 Frames Dimensions AC Input DC Input 208 240 400V 480V 650V Frame ND HP HD HP ND kW HD kW ND HP HD HP 0 0 5 0 33 037 10 25 105 0 33 1 0 75 10 75 0 55 l 0 75 HD HP ND HP HD HP 0 25 0 5 0 33 055 1 0 75 075 2 1 5 1 5 7 5 5 5 10 7 5 2 5 5 10 7 5 3 2 11 7 5 15 10 5 7 5 15 10 11 20 15 15 25 20 185 30 25 22 40 30 i 185 15 25 20 20 15 30 22 40 30 4 25 20 45 37 60 50 37 60 50 30 p F EE 5 40 130 55 14 175 w 4 175 60 50 14 F 100 175 100 175 6 60 50 75 55 125 100 75 60 90 75 150 125 110 9 55 125 100 75 150 125 90 Figure 1 7 PowerFlex 700 Frames 0 3 0 Frame Shown lt A 15 0 0 59 gt D gt 5 8 0 23 dia see below C ro rmm pe B b s Au Oo Ed e 0 1 y
3. Selecting An External Resistor 4 7 240V AC Drives Continued Watt Catalog Watt Catalog Ohms Watts Seconds Number Ohms Watts Seconds Number 23 10200 310000 T23R10K2 14 900 20700 T14R900W 23 7490 328000 T23R7K49 14 600 19400 T14R600W 23 6310 179000 T23R6K31 14 300 15400 T14R300W 23 2100 23100 T23R2Ki CHAM ERE 2208 23 1500 20200 T23RIK5 na 23 900 21300 T23R900W sr re SES 23 600 20800 T23R600W E BR TO 5 23 300 15800 T23R300W T ECC EERT TOS Dg 20 34600 1148000 T20R34K6 11 2561 121123 22294 20 28400 1066000 T20R28K4 10 4 72300 4620000 T10FAR72K3 20 20600 1602000 T20R20K6 10 44 43900 1367000 T10F4R43K9 20 15200 924000 T20R15K2 10 4 35600 1230000 T10FAR35K6 20 10700 582000 T20R10K7 10 4 26000 2002000 TIOFAR26K0 20 8920 267000 T20R8K92 10 4 18900 1991000 T10F4R18K9 20 7081 169227 220 7 10 4 15500 1742000 T10F4R15K5 20 5940 260000 T20R5K94 10 4 11000 359000 T10F4R11KO 20 4650 221432 225 7 10 4 8890 801000 T10F4R8K89 20 4572 222215 220 7A 10 4 6040 489000 T10F4R6K4 20 3063 138493 225 7A 10 4 5360 329000 TIOFAR5K36 20 1860 55084 222 7 104 2970 95100 T10F4R2K07 20 1500 28000 T20RIKS 10 4 1500 25400 T10FARIKS 20 1372 87086 222 7A 104 900 24500 T10F4R900W 20 900 18500 T20R900W 10 4 600 22900 TIOFARGOOW 20 600 17300 T20R600W 104 300 17300 T10F4R300W 20 300 13700 T20R300W 73 19264 656981 220 10 15 11400
4. Selecting An External Resistor 4 15 600V AC Drives Continued Watt Catalog Watt Catalog Ohms Watts Seconds Number Ohms Watts Seconds Number 32 18000 1017000 T32R18K0 23 7490 328000 T23R7K49 32 17100 931000 T32R17Ki 23 6310 179000 T23R6K31 32 12700 410000 T32R12K7 23 2100 23100 T23RXKi 32 8420 246000 T32R8K42 23 1500 20200 T23RIK5 32 4500 105000 T32R4K5 23 900 21300 T23R900W 32 4000 83300 T32R4K0 23 600 20800 T23R600W 32 2700 25200 T32ROK7 23 300 15800 T23R300W 32 2100 20200 TS2R2K1 20 34600 1148000 T20R34K6 32 1500 28100 T32R1K5 20 28400 1066000 T20R28K4 32 900 19100 T32R900W 20 20600 1602000 T20R20K6 32 600 17500 T32R600W 20 15200 924000 T20R15K2 32 300 13800 T32R300W 20 10700 582000 T20R10K7 28 30492 2138364 550 12 20 8920 267000 T20R8K92 28 20646 1033801 555 12 20 5940 260000 T20R5K04 28 20321 1100930 550 12A 20 1500 28000 T20RIK5 28 13615 359925 555 12A 20 900 18500 T20R900W 28 8258 237463 552 12 20 600 17300 T20R600W 28 6096 299521 552 12A 20 300 13700 T20R300W 27 27400 2075000 T27R27K4 19 47709 5953309 550 14 27 21600 1346000 T27R21K6 19 31965 2913365 555 14 27 15000 931000 T27R15K0 19 31798 3029900 550 14A 27 11500 391000 T27R11K5 19 21305 1514674 555 14 27 8420 358000 T27R8K42 19 12170 410613 552 14 27 3300 73900 T27R3K3 19 9540 410613 552 14A 2r 2100 2 300 TAREA 15 60579 7591398 550 15 27 1500 29100 TRIKS 15 40587 1313
5. ES J PowerFlex 70 Dimensions 1 11 Figure 1 5 PowerFlex 70 Cutout Dimensions Frame Dimensions in millimeters and inches Frame Dimensions in millimeters and inches A Le 156 0 xl C L 219 0 gt l 6 14 Mr 8 62 202 0 707 654 1010 7 95 g 69 sl 63 L 3 98 gt 0 27 0 25 f I p I i 0 0 81 Sum P Y 12x 3 5 4x 3 0R Lsi 20 14 0 12R 0 20 58 8 2 31 B m 2052 ll D 8 08 190 0 95 0 7 48 69 3 74 j 0 27 2 k SZ ep I 45 0 18 A i 350 0 2193 62 13 78 8 63 333 0 11 109 7 4 32 LY Qe t n L 6 9 Sil WAS cdm z F i poro f Lod vnm a 14x 23 5 4x BOR E 45 20 14 0 12R 0 18 58 8 2 31 g perser 1 12 PowerFlex 70 Dimensions Figure 1 6 Flange Mounting M4x8x25 410 24 x 75 CNN gt AA AAAI QR VU WM AA mam ITA
6. Decel Time Seconds If any portion of the line connecting AL and PL lies to the right of the Power Curve then the capability of the internal resistor is insufficient for the proposed application e Increase deceleration time tz t until the line connecting AL and PL lies entirely to the left of the Power Curve or e Goto Section 4 and select an external resistor from the tables 3 4 Evaluating the Internal Resistor PowerFlex 70 Power Curves Figure 3 2 PowerFlex 70 240 Volt Frames A and B 3000 2800 240V Frames A amp B 2600 2400 2200 2000 1800 Peak Power 3 8 8 1200 1000 800 600 400 200 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Decel Time Seconds Figure 3 3 PowerFlex 70 240 Volt Frame C 3000 2800 240V Frame C 2600 2400 2200 2000 1800 kD o 6 o e Peak Power 1200 1000 800 600 400 200 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Decel Time Seconds Evaluating the Internal Resistor Figure 3 4 PowerFlex 70 240 Volt Frame D
7. Three Phase AC Input o Input Contactor M R L1 S L2 T L3 a T AD Power Off Power On M pou Power Source DB Resistor Thermostat Selecting An External Resistor 4 3 Record the Values Calculated in Section 2 P Pa Calculate Maximum Dynamic Brake Resistance Value When using an internal Dynamic Brake Resistor the value is fixed However when choosing an external resistor the maximum allowable Dynamic Brake resistance value R4pj must be calculated Vy Rap 1 P Maximum allowable value for the dynamic brake resistor ohms I o a l Va DC bus voltage used for calculating maximum power 395V DC 790V DC 987V DC or 1135V DC Pp Peak breaking power calculated in Section 2 Step 3 watts Calculate Maximum Dynamic Brake Resistance y Rabi Record Maximum Dynamic Brake Resistance Rit The choice of the Dynamic Brake resistance value should be less than the value calculated in this step If the value is greater the drive can trip on DC bus overvoltage Calculate required joule rating joules watt seconds Pp 3 x t4 t5 watt seconds Ph 7 Ll watt second losses EB x tg al x 1 motor efficiency x drive efficiency Drive Efficiency 0 975 Total watt seconds watt seconds watt second losses 4 4 Selecting An External Resistor Select Resistor
8. Start Up B Dig Outputs Enter choice for Digital Out 3 Sel Digital Out Sel ENUM choice that ses Level Yes 6 33 Start Up B Dig Outputs Enter value for Dig Out 3 Level Start Up B Dig Outputs Enter choice for Digital Out 2 Sel Digital Out Sel ENUM No choice that ses Level Digital Out Sel ENUM E Yes choice that 6 29 y ses Level Start Up B Dig Outputs I Enter value for Yes Dig Out 1 Level 6 31 Start Up B Dig Outputs Enter value for No Dig Out 2 Level 6 49 Start Up C Analog Outputs Make a selection Go to pr Anlgl Out 1 Done Anlg Out 2 Done Analog 1 Analog 2 6 50 6 54 Start Up Start Up C Analog Outputs C Analog Outputs Enter choice for Enter choice for Analog Out 1 Sel Analog Out 2 Sel Output Freq Output Amps 651 655 Start Up Start Up C Analog Outputs C Analog Outputs Enter choice for Enter choice for Signal Type Signal Type lt Voltage gt lt Voltage gt Current Current 652 y 656 Start Up Start Up C Analog Outputs C Analog Outputs Enter value for Enter value for Analog Out 1 Hi Analog Out 2 Hi 10 000 Volt 10 000 Volt X XXXX lt y yyyy X XXXX lt y yyyy 6 53 6 57 Start Up Start Up C Analog Outputs C Analog Outputs Enter value for Enter value for Analog Out 1 Lo Analog Out 2 Lo 0 0 Volt 0 0 Volt X XXXX lt y yyyy X XXXX lt y yyyy 4
9. 0 1 2 8 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 Decel Time Seconds 8 19 20 Peak Power Peak Power 3000 2800 2600 2400 2200 2000 1800 1600 1200 1000 800 600 400 200 3000 2800 2600 2400 2200 2000 1800 1600 1400 1200 1000 800 600 400 200 Evaluating the Internal Resistor Figure 3 12 PowerFlex 700 240 Volt Frame 2 3 9 240V Frame 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Decel Time Seconds Figure 3 13 PowerFlex 700 480 Volt Frame 0 400V Frame 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Decel Time Seconds 3 10 Evaluating the Internal Resistor Peak Power Peak Power Figure 3 14 PowerFlex 700 480 Volt Frame 1 3000 2800 480V Frame 1 2600 2400 2200 2000 1800 1600 1400 1200 1000 800 600 400 200 0 1 2 8 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Decel Time Seconds Figure 3 15 PowerFlex 700 480 Volt Frame 2 3000 2800 480V Frame 2 2600 2400 2200 2000 180
10. Specification 200 208V 240V 380 400 480V 600V 690V PowerFlex 70 Drive Drive Drive Drive Drive Drive Drive AC Input Overvoltage Trip 247VAC 285VAC 475VAC 570VAC 690VAC AC Input Undervoltage Trip 120VAC 138VAC 233VAC 280VAC 345VAC Bus Overvoltage Trip 405VDC 405VDC 810VDC 810VDC 1013VDC Bus Undervoltage Output Shutoff 204VDC 204VDC 407VDC 407VDC 508VDC Bus Undervoltage Fault Level 160VDC 160VDC 300VDC 300VDC 375VDC Nominal Bus Voltage 281VDC 324VDC 540VDC 648VDC 810VDC PowerFlex 700 AC Input Overvoltage Trip See PowerFlex 70 above AC Input Undervoltage Trip Bus Overvoltage Trip Bus Undervoltage Shutoff amp Fault 153VDC 153VDC 305VDC 305VDC 381VDC Nominal Bus Voltage All Drives Heat Sink Thermistor See PowerFlex 70 above Monitored by microprocessor overtemp trip Drive Overcurrent Trip Software Overcurrent Trip Hardware Overcurrent Trip 200 of rated current typical 220 300 of rated current dependent on drive rating Line transients up to 6000 volts peak per IEEE C62 41 1991 Control Logic Noise Immunity Showering arc transients up to 1500V peak Power Ride Thru 15 milliseconds at full load Logic Control Ride Thru 0 5 seconds minimum 2 seconds typical Ground Fault Trip Phase to ground on drive output Short Circuit Trip Phase to phase on drive output 1 2 PowerFlex 70 700 Specifications
11. reference Slip Comp Slip Adder XS gt Open Linear Ram Loop Spd Ref amp Sen 1 Process PI Pl Ref gt Process PI T Controller 1 PIFbk gt PI Disabled Speed Control Spd Cmd When the PI is enabled the speed reference is disconnected and PI Output has exclusive control of the commanded speed passing through the linear ramp and s curve PI Ref Process PI PI Fbk Controller Slip Comp Slip Adder XS Open Linear Ram Loop Spd Ref EM 8 Sune gt PI Enabled Speed Control Process PI Loop 2 141 Configuration To operate the drive in PI Regulator Mode for the Standard Control option change the mode by selecting Process PI through the Speed Mode parameter Three parameters are used to configure control and indicate the status of the logic associated with the Process PI controller PI Configuration PI Control and PI Status Together these three parameters define the operation of the PI logic 1 PI Configuration is a set of bits that select various modes of operation The value of this parameter can only be changed while the drive is stopped e Exclusive Mode see page 2 139 e Invert Error This feature changes the sign of the error creating a decrease in output for increasing error and an increase in output for decreas
12. AND To Control Logic 2 0ms Drive Logic Rslt Logic Ca Evaluation Stop Owner 288 gt Stop p gt Owner Logic 1 Start Owner Y 289 gt AND sid Transition Logic Detection Gr 2 Wire Jog Owner Stop Start Mask Control 290 gt AND ae Transition Logic Detection 278 Local Dir Owner Jog Mask Mask Evaluation 291 gt Single Dir AND gt Owner gt Owner Eval Logic 279 M Reference Owner Direction Mask ml 292 gt Single Ref gt AND gt Owner p gt Owner Eval Logic m E Accel Owner Reference Mask A 293 gt Accel AND p Owner Logic E Decel Owner Accel Mask 294 gt Decel AND gt Owner Logic 282 Fault Clr Owner Decel Mask Fault 295 gt Clear AND A owner Logic MOP Owner Fault Clr Mask 296 gt MOP AND p gt Owner ED Logic MOP Mask Single Local AND gt Owner Owner Eval Logic 285 297 gt Local Mask Local Owner Drive Sequencer State LL Swebeig 19018 9A00Z Xe 3JeMod Z N id Vi c suieJBeiq xoolg Power Device Characteristics NTC Pwr EE Data Duty Cycle
13. gt gt j reset Spee arameter 10 0 1 0 den IES Skip Clamp Preset Speed 3 Parameter 103 0 1111 Y Direction etc Preset Speed 4 Parameter 104 gt 1010 i Y 1 Preset Speed 5 Parameter 105 9 91 01 Min Max Speed i Preset Speed 6 Parameter 106 7 9111 0 Preset Speed 7 Parameter 107 gt 1 1 1 Y pde DPI Port Ref 1 6 See Parameter 209 DPI Command Y 1 Manual Speed Ref Options Aci Des Remp HIM Requesting Auto Manual qe Man S end TB Man Ref Sel Parameter 096 gt Digital Inpui 1 f Post Ramp Jog Speed Parameter 100 Jog Command Bm o I to follower drive for Speed Adders Speed Mode Frequency Reference PI Output 2 Process Pi Slip Compensation 1 Slip Comp None gt 0 Open Loop Output Frequency Scaling Scaling applies only to references from analog inputs and reference sources selected in Speed Ref x Sel parameters 90 93 Each analog input has its own set of scale parameters e Analog In x Hi sets the maximum level on input to be seen i e 10 Volts e Analog In x Lo sets the minimum level on input to be seen i e 0 Volts Each Speed Ref x Sel parameter has an additional set of scale parameters e Speed Ref x Hi selects the reference value for the maximum input specified in Analog In x Hi e Speed Ref x Lo selects the reference value for the minimum input speci
14. gt 58 4 2 30 gt 22 2 0 87 Dia 477 1 88 4 Places n I 1635 1552 la 6 11 6 44 1293 a 8 09 1013 8 90 Y 36 1 1 42 x gt 56 1 2 21 gt lt 75 2 2 96 gt lt 942 3 71 gt bx 1497 6 89 EA lt 69 3 2 73 gt dE 222 087 Da t 99630 2 Places Y n vel 164 1 5 6 46 1347 6 30 103 2 4 06 37 5 1 48 gt 64 0 2 52 lt 93 0 3 66 gt 121 0 4 76 gt PowerFlex 70 Dimensions 1 9 Figure 1 3 PowerFlex 70 IP66 NEMA Type 4X 12 Bottom View Dimensions Frame Dimensions in millimeters and inches B 28 1 1 HO mace 3 amp 2 Bas 9 3 Se 55 2 2 17 gt lt 77 3 3 04 gt 996 3 92 115 9 4 56 gt el EP y DE EY CN 31 0 1 22 49 1 1 93 75 5 2 97 lt 102 0 4 02 120 1 4 73 gt 1 10 PowerFlex 70 Dimensions Figure 1 4 PowerFlex 70 Flange Mount Bottom View Dimensions Frame Dimensions in millimeters and inches A lt 103 2 4 06 gt 51 3 2 02
15. 2 4 Example Calculation 0 0 0 cece eee eee ee 2 9 Evaluating the Internal Resistor This section steps you through the process to determine whether or not the available PowerFlex internal resistors are adequate for your application Evaluating the Capability of the Internal Dynamic Brake Resistor 000 3 1 PowerFlex 70 Power Curves 3 4 PowerFlex 700 Power Curves 0 00 000 cece ese 3 8 Selecting An External Resistor This section steps you through the process of selecting an external resistor when the internal resistors prove to be insufficient for your application How to Select an External Dynamic Brake Resistor 4 1 ii Table of Contents Section 1 Understanding How Dynamic Braking Works How Dynamic Braking Works When an induction motor s rotor is turning slower than the synchronous speed set by the drive s output power the motor is transforming electrical energy obtained from the drive into mechanical energy available at the drive shaft of the motor This process is referred to as motoring When the rotor is turning faster than the synchronous speed set by the drive s output power the motor is transforming mechanical energy available at the drive shaft of the motor into electrical energy that can be transferred back to the drive This process is referred to as regeneration Most AC PWM drives convert AC power from the fixed frequency utility grid into DC powe
16. Speed Control When the PI is enabled the output of the PI Controller is added to the ramped speed reference Slip Adder Spd Ref PI Ref PI Fok Process PI Controller PI Enabled Exclusive Control Linear Ramp amp S Curve Speed Control Spd Cmd Process Control takes the output of PI regulator as the speed command No master speed reference exists and the PI Output directly controls the drive output In the pumping application example below the reference or setpoint is the required pressure in the system The input from the transducer is the PI feedback and changes as the pressure changes The drive output frequency is then increased or decreased as needed to maintain system pressure 2 140 Process Pl Loop regardless of flow changes With the drive turning the pump at the required speed the pressure is maintained in the system ESTI Pump Motor Pressure Transducer P Feedback Loy Desired Pressure PI Reference Sel ainan DS aii However when additional valves in the system are opened and the pressure in the system drops the PI error will alter its output frequency to bring the process back into control When the PI is disabled the commanded speed is the ramped speed
17. 5 5 0 22 Frames 0 1 8 0 7 0 0 28 Frames 2 3 0 31 3 Places Dimensions are in millimeters and inches E Weight kg lbs 5 Drive amp lA B C D E Drive Packaging 0 110 0 4 33 336 0 13 23 200 0 7 87 80 0 3 15 320 0 12 60 5 22 11 5 8 16 18 1 135 0 5 31 1336 0 13 23 200 0 7 87 105 0 4 13 1320 0 12 60 7 03 15 5 9 98 22 2 222 0 8 74 342 5 13 48 200 0 7 87 192 0 7 56 320 0 12 60 12 52 27 6 15 20 33 5 3 222 0 8 74 517 5 20 37 200 0 7 87 192 0 7 56 500 0 19 69 18 55 40 9 22 68 50 Refer to Table 1 B for frame information 2 Weights include HIM and Standard 1 0 1 14 PowerFlex 700 Dimensions Figure 1 8 PowerFlex 700 Frame 4 15 0 0 59 gt 7 0 0 28 dia lt O gt THE m ee og E DODO Rc LJ i D Powerkiex D 13 a o o B E o LR ES E nl 3 7 0 0 28 gt lt 0 31 Lifting Holes 3 Places 4 Places Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Approx Weight kg Ibs 220 0 6 66 758 8 29 87 201 7 7 98 192 0 7 56 T 29 06 24 49 54 0 1 Refer to Table 1 B for frame information 2 Weights include HIM and Standard I O 4 Drive amp Packaging 29 03 64 0 PowerFlex 700 Dimensions 1 15 Figure 1 9 PowerFlex 700 Fra
18. Man Ref Preload Cass swebeig 49018 3A004 Xe 31eMog amp z e1nB14 9 c suieiBeiq 190 8 From Reference 3H2 7 E 9 Max e Reverse Dis Direction Mode Bipolar I 0 1 Internal X Limit Autotune Drive Status 1 Command Dir 209 2 1 Unipol Fwd 1 Unipol Rev Drive Logic Rslt Jog Unipolar Max Speed D X 1 4 Drive Status 2 Skip Bands Skip Frequency 1 Skip Frequency 2 Skip Frequency 3 Skip Freq Band Stopping 1 0 Rev Speed Limit Rev Spd Limit Non Zero Minimum Speed X Drive Statu Active Rev Spd Limit Zero Rev Speed Limit Speed Control Reference Drive Logic Rslt Jog m 02 Un Jog Ref l I I min Spd Limit i s2 210 4 lt 210 1 HH oH Stopping or Not Active Accel Time 1 Accel Time 2 Limit i Speed Units From PI Speed Trim Ramped Speed l l 0 1 Hr I __ I lt 22 Not Stopping and Active I I D gt Ramp Drive Ramp Rslt Decel Time 1 142 Decel Time 2 7H5 9 4 2 0 ms Hz RPM lt gt Commanded Speed RPM to In
19. Table 2 Q PF700 240 Volt AC Input Protection Devices Motor Dual Circuit Circuit Drive o HP PWM Input Element Time Non Time Breaker Protector 140M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Catalog Rating Freq Temp Ratings Output Amps Delay Fuse Delay Fuse 3 4 Range 56 Number iE ND HD kHz C Amps kVA Cont 1 Min 3 Sec Min Max Min Max 2 Max 8 Max 8 Available Catalog Numbers 140 7 240 Volt AC Input 20BB2P2 0 0 5 0 33 4 50 iv jov jee ea ee BE 6 3 10 15 3 M C2E B25 M D8E B25 20BB4P2 0 1 0 75 4 50 3 3 14 42 48 6 4 5 8 5 15 15 7 M C2E B63 M D8E B63 20BB6P8 1 2 15 4 50 5 9 24 6 8 9 12 10 15 10 25 25 15 M C2E C10 M D8E C10 M F8E C10 20BB9P6 1 3 2 4 50 8 3 34 9 6 106 14 4 12 20 12 35 35 15 M C2E C10 M D8E C10 M F8E C10 20BB015 1 5 3 4 50 iv 86 pee pes 9 20 30 20 60 60 30 M C2E C16 M D8E C16 M F8E C16 20BB022 1 7 5 5 4 50 199 18 3 22 242 33 25 50 25 80 80 30 M C2E C25 M D8E C25 M F8E C25 CMN 2500 20BB028 2 10 75 4 50 25 7 10 7 28 33 44 35 60 35 100 100 50 M F8E C32 CMN 4000 20BB042 3 15 10 4 50 38 5 16 0 42 462 63 50 90 50 150 150 50 M F8E C45 CMN 6300 20BB052 3 20 15 4 50 47 7 19 8 52 63 80 60 100 60 200 200 100 CMN 6300 20BB070 4 25 20 4 50 642 26 7 70 78 105 90 150 90 275 275 100 CMN 9000 20BB080 4 30 25 4 50 73 2 30 5 80 105 140 100 180 100 300 30
20. 4 Enter 6 25 StartUp B Dig Outputs Enter choice for Digital Out 1 Sel ENUM choic that uses Level Digital Digital Out 1 Out 2 6 27 StartUp B Dig Outputs Enter choice for Digital Out 2 Sel ENUM choice that uses Level Yes Yes 626 v Y StartUp StartUp B Dig Outputs B Dig Outputs Enter value for Enter value for Dig Out 1 Level Dig Out 2 Level Enter 6 29 StartUp C Anlg Outpts Enter choice for Analog Out 1 Sel Enter 6 30 StartUp C Anlg Outpts Enter value for Analog Out 1 Hi Enter 6 31 StartUp C Anlg Outpts Enter value for Analog Out 1 Lo Enter Go to 6 1 D 2 190 Start Up Done Exit allow Start Jog Figure 2 40 PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Option Startup For first time powerup Select lt English gt Francais Espanol Deustch Italiano HIM Main Menu Abort Diagnostics ke allow Start Jog Parameter A Start Up Continue y Device Select disallow Start Jog Memory Storage Start Up E Preferences Esc allow Start Jog Start Up Restart disallow Start Jog Drive 0 0 l active PowerFlex 700 N Start Up Yes o Startup consists 0 2 i of several steps Go to Abort to configure a powerbiex 100 Resume state drive for basic Start U
21. 1 Motor NP FLA is the base value for motor protection 2 Motor OL Factor is used to adjust for the service factor of the motor Within the drive motor nameplate FLA is multiplied by motor overload factor to select the rated current for the motor thermal overload This can be used to raise or lower the level of current that will cause the motor thermal overload to trip without the need to adjust the motor FLA For example if motor nameplate FLA is 10 Amps and motor overload factor is 1 2 then motor thermal overload will use 12 Amps as 100 3 Continuous Rating Motor Overload 2 119 Changing Overload Factor 140 120 2 amp 100 oO tc 2 80 s OL 1 20 t 60 OL 1 00 o m 40 OL 0 80 20 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 of Base Speed Motor OL Hertz is used to further protect motors with limited speed ranges Since some motors may not have sufficient cooling ability at lower speeds the Overload feature can be programmed to increase protection in the lower speed areas This parameter defines the frequency where derating the motor overload capacity should begin As shown here the motor overload capacity is reduced when operating below the motor overload Hz For all settings of overload Hz other than zero the overload capacity is reduced to 70 when output frequency is zero During DC injection the motor current may exceed 70 of FLA but this will cause the Motor Thermal Overload to trip sooner than
22. If common bus configuration denotes whether drive is disconnected from DC bus or not Controls precharge sequence on reconnection to bus Input Function Detailed Descriptions e Stop Clear Faults An open input will cause the drive to stop and become not ready A closed input will allow the drive to run If Start is configured then Stop Clear Faults must also be configured Otherwise a digital input configuration alarm will occur Stop Clear Faults is optional in all other circumstances An open to closed transition is interpreted as a Clear Faults request The drive will clear any existing faults The terminal block bit must be set in the Fault Mask and Logic Mask parameters in order for the terminal block to clear faults using this input function Digital Inputs 2 65 If the Clear Faults input function is configured at the same time as Stop Clear Faults then it will not be possible to reset faults with the Stop Clear Faults input Run Forward Run Reverse An open to closed transition on one input or both inputs while drive is stopped will cause the drive to run unless the Stop Clear Faults input function is configured and open The table below describes the basic action taken by the drive in response to particular states of these input functions Run Forward Run Reverse Action Open Open Drive stops terminal block relinquishes direction ownership
23. Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls Publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office or online at http www ab com manuals gi describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will the Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation the Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of the Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibit
24. 138 PI Fdback Meter 1 Bw P Gain Scale Enable l Limit 134 Y os Selector Gao fos PI Status PI Upper Limit 132 ii PI Configuration PI BW Filter PI Prop Gain PP In Limit Feedback SqRt PI Lower Limit O PI Feedback Hi PI Configuration PI Status do Preload Mode PI Enabled PI Feedback Lo Cea Soe n 60 ki in i I S 1111 ol 0 0 0 TEM I I Gain l i E T 1 Cat DE i ol PI Preload megs PI Control Zero Clamp To PI Output 4D3 PI Configuration Excl Mode PI Configuration Torque Trim 124 08 To Torque Trim un gt 6A2 oll To PI Speed Trim gt 4G2 2 swebeig 190 89 3007 Xe 319Mog L 7 NGA 0t c suieiBeiq 190 8 Block Diagrams 2 41 Figure 2 8 PowerFlex 700VC Block Diagams 8 Save MOP Ref At Stop Drive Logic Rslt 1 Stop I I ol 1 7 I 1 0 TES Drive Logic Rslt Mop Inc 271 7 l 0 oji Add Rate l 1 mm i MOP Rate D Drive Logic Rslt Save MOP Ref At Powr Down 0 Not Saved I Ramp MOP Control 2 0 ms To MOP Output Mop Dec 271 15 Subtract Rate Power Up Preload NVS Saved gt gt 382 3D4 D MOP Frequency Scale Speed Units TB1 24 TB1 26 Logic Common TB1 25 24 V
25. A Maximum Voltage Base Voltage Nameplate Run Boost Base Frequency Maximum Nameplate Frequency Fan See Fan Curve above Faults Faults 2 93 Faults are events or conditions occurring within and or outside of the drive Theses events or conditions are by default considered to be of such significant magnitude that drive operation should or must be discontinued Faults are annunciated to the user via the HIM communications and or contact outputs The condition that caused the fault determines the user response Once a fault occurs the fault condition is latched requiring the user or application to perform a fault reset action to clear the latched condition If the condition that caused fault still exists when the fault is reset the drive will fault again and the fault will be latched again When a Fault Occurs 1 The drive is set as faulted causing the drive output to be immediately disabled and a coast to stop sequence to occur 2 The fault code is entered into the first buffer of the fault queue see Fault Queue below for rules 3 Additional data on the status of the drive at the time that the fault occurred is recorded Note that there is only a single copy of this information which is always related to the most recent fault queue entry Fault 1 Code parameter 243 When another fault occurs this data is overwritten with the new fault data The following data conditions are captured and latch
26. Jog Reverse Jog in reverse direction Speed Select 3 Select which Speed reference the drive uses Speed Select 2 Speed Select 1 Auto Manual Allows terminal block to assume complete control of Speed Reference Accel 2 Select acceleration rate 1 or 2 Decel 2 Select deceleration rate 1 or 2 Accel 2 amp Decel 2 Select acceleration rate 1 and deceleration rate 1 or acceleration rate 2 and deceleration rate 2 MOP Increment Increment MOP Motor Operated Pot Function Speed ref MOP Decrement Decrement MOP Motor Operated Pot Function Speed ref Stop Mode B Select Stop Mode A open or B closed Bus Regulation Mode B Select which bus regulation mode to use PI Enable Enable Process PI loop PI Hold Hold integrator for Process PI loop at current value PI Reset Clamp integrator for Process PI loop to 0 Auxiliary Fault Open to cause auxiliary fault external string Local Control Allows terminal block to assume complete control of drive logic Clear Faults Clear faults and return drive to ready status Enable Open input causes drive to coast to stop disallows start Exclusive Link Exclusive Link digital input is routed through to digital output no other use Power Loss Level PowerFlex 700 only Selects between using fixed value for power loss level and getting the level from a parameter Precharge Enable PowerFlex 700 only
27. e Jog Forward Jog Reverse An open to closed transition on one input or both inputs while drive is stopped will cause the drive to jog unless the Stop Clear Faults input function is configured and open The table below describes the actions taken by the drive in response to various states of these input functions Jog Forward Jog Reverse Action Open Open Drive will stop if already jogging but can be started by other means Terminal block relinquishes direction ownership Open Closed Drive jogs in reverse direction Terminal block takes direction ownership Closed Open Drive jogs in forward direction Terminal block takes direction ownership Closed Closed Drive continues to jog in current direction but terminal block maintains direction ownership If one of these input functions is configured and the other one isn t the above description still applies but the unconfigured input function should be considered permanently open 2 68 Digital Inputs The drive will not jog while drive is running or while Stop Clear Faults input is open Start has precedence the drive is jogging the drive will switch from jog mode to run mode The drive will not stop but may change speed and or change direction ATTENTION If a normal drive start command is received while The terminal block bit must be set in the Jog Mask Direction Mask and Logic Mask parameters in order for the terminal block to ca
28. 3 5 240V Frame D 1800 Peak Power 1200 1800 1200 Peak Power 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Decel Time Seconds Figure 3 5 PowerFlex 70 480 Volt Frames A and B 480V Frames A amp B 1 2 3 4567 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 Decel Ti me Seconds 4 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 3 6 Evaluating the Internal Resistor Figure 3 6 PowerFlex 70 480 Volt Frame C 2800 480V Frame C 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Decel Time Seconds Figure 3 7 PowerFlex 70 480 Volt Frame D 2800 480V Frame D 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Decel Time Seconds Evaluating the Internal Resistor 3 7 Figure 3 8 PowerFlex 70 600 Volt F
29. Category Environment Electrical Control Specification Altitude 1000 m 3300 ft max without derating Maximum Surrounding Air Temperature without Derating PowerFlex 70 IP20 NEMA Type 1 Flange Mount IP66 NEMA Type 4X 12 PowerFlex 700 IP20 NEMA Type 1 0 to 50 degrees C 32 to 122 degrees F 0 to 50 degrees C 32 to 122 degrees F 0 to 40 degrees C 32 to 104 degrees F 0 to 50 degrees C 32 to 122 degrees F Storage Temperature all const 40 to 70 degrees C 40 to 158 degrees F Atmosphere Important Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere Relative Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Shock 15G peak for 11ms duration 1 0 ms Vibration 0 152 mm 0 006 in displacement 1G peak Voltage Tolerance See Voltage Tolerance on page 2 212 Frequency Tolerance 47 63 Hz Input Phases Three phase input provides full rating for all drives Single phase operation provides 50 of rated current Displacement Power Factor All Drives 0 98 across entire speed range Efficiency 97 5 at rated amps nominal line volts Maximum Short Circuit Rating 200 000 Amps symmetrical Actual Short Circuit Rating Method Determined by AI
30. Intenal Bus Reg Mode A Both DB 1st External Bus Reg Mode A Both DB 1st Note If Stop Mode A COAST then skip 2 10 Note Default should be NONE Note If Stop Mode A COAST then skip 2 12 If in Quick Basic mode then exit Motor Data Ramp B Start Up 2 193 Figure 2 40 PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Option Startup 3 3 0 3 22 Flux Vector Start Up Motor Tests Start Up Start Up 3 21 3 Motor Tests 3 Motor Tests Start Up This section Select source of C Inertia Test optimizes motor p Start Stop V Hz Control 3 25 performance and lt Digital Inputs gt does not require tests for proper Local HIM Port1 If Digital Inputs Set an Inertia Test Start Up direction Remote HIM Port2 361 2 to START STOP resp 4 C Inertia Test If Local HIM Set Sensris Vector 361 2 to Not Used amp V Hz does not require 90 to 18 an Inertia Test V Start Up 3 Motor Tests Go to 31 An Complete these FOC Direction steps in order 3 18 Test lt A Directn Test gt C Inertia Test B Auto Tune Inertia Tes Start Up C nertiatst Id C Inertia Test B Auto Tune Connect load to motor for Inertia Test Enter 3 14 3 2 Start Up Start Inhibit B AutoTune
31. PowerFlex 700 Dimensions 1 19 Frame Rating Dimensions in millimeters and inches 5 75 HP lt 104 0 4 09 34 9 1 37 Dia lx NE 2Pl 2 0 87 Dia 480V A A ape 55kW LI 4000 Lo HW E Normal Ome NI me ch xx ND 6 627 247 Dia pe laces Duty hed x N d E Drive 2419 A NU P A Ne E 9 52 35 o 1 Iu i J ES 1 o 9 04 I 2205 i o Lo 8 66 3 SS SS Ee See 184 0 24 4595 SSS 628 E E ic 960 jm E 878 SSS SS S55 i P b 28 0 1 10 45 0 1 7 lt gt lt 85 0 835 lt 150 0 5 91 gt 215 0 846 255 0 10 04 100 HP 349 137 Dia 627 2 47 Dia 480V 426 1 58 lt gt 22 087 De Pees oS Normal 31 9 1 26 lt gt d 7 Removable Junction Box Duty Z Drive E O wy L 4 S EL o i HIN AN J j 241 9 i ot NC 1 CM o 14 o 8 80 1885 o 742 E B legger 28 1535 9 6 04 ss 960 28 378 ME SS E E 3c roy z 28 0 1 10 gt 44 0 1 73 lt gt 66 4
32. Start Up 2 197 Flux Vector Start Up Start Stop l O 2 6 34 Start Up C Anlg Inputs Enter choice for Input Signal Analog Input 1 Analog Input 2 6 35 P 1 Anlg 2 6 42 Start Up Start Up C Anlg Inputs Enter choice for Enter choice for Signal type Signal type lt Voltage gt lt Voltage gt Current Current Torque Ref Torque cd Anlg 1 nig 636 6 43 Start Up Start Up C Anlg Inputs C Anlg Inputs The next two The next two Steps scale a steps scale a high torque with high torque with a high analog a high analog value value 6 37 6 44 Start Up Start Up C Anlg Inputs C Anlg Inputs Enter value for Enter value for Analog In 1 Hi Analog In 2 Hi 10 0 V 10 0 V XXXXX lt V YYYY X XXXX lt y yyyy 6 38 64 Start Up Start Up C Anlg Inputs C Anlg Inputs Enter value for Enter value for Torque Ref A Hi Torque Ref A Hi 0 0 96 XX yy X X lt y y 639 y 64 Start Up Start Up C Anlg Inputs C Anlg Inputs The next two The next two steps scale a steps scale a low torque with low torque with alow analog a low analog value value 6 40 6 47 Start Up Start Up C Anlg Inputs C Anlg Inputs Enter value for Enter value for Analog In 1 Lo Analog In 2 Lo 10 0V 10 0V XXXXX lt V YYYY XXXXX lt V YYYY 641 y 6 48 Start Up Start Up C Anlg Inputs C Anlg Inputs Enter value for Enter value for Torque Ref A Hi Torque Ref A Hi 0 0 XX yy X X lt y y
33. e Anlg Out Absolut set so that absolute value is disabled for output 1 Analog Outt Hi D diuo euo eres NE rd Analog Output Torque Current vs Output Voltage Analog Output Voltage Marker Lines 200 0 200 Output Torque Current 2 24 Analog Outputs Filtering Software filtering will be performed on the analog outputs for certain signal sources as specified in Table 2 A Filter A is one possible such filter and it is described later in this section Any software filtering is in addition to any hardware filtering and sampling delays Table 2 A Software Filters Quantity Filter Output Frequency No extra filtering Commanded Frequency No extra filtering Output Current Filter A Output Torque Current Filter A Output Flux Current Filter A Output Power Filter A Output Voltage No extra filtering DC Bus Voltage Filter A PI Reference No extra filtering PI Feedback No extra filtering PI Error No extra filtering PI Output No extra filtering Analog output software filters are specified in terms of the time it will take the output of the filter to move from 0 to various higher levels given an instantaneous step in the filter input from 0 to 100 The numbers describing filters in this document should be considered approximate the actual values will depend on implementation Filter A is a single pole digital filter with a 162ms time constant Given a 0
34. Auto Rstrt Tries Auto Restart Tries will be issued if bit 5 of Fault Config 1 1 Autotune Autotune 2 31 Description of parameters determined by the autotune tests Flux Current Test Flux Current Ref is set by the flux current test Flux current is the reactive portion of the motor current portion of the current that is out of phase with the motor voltage and is used to magnetize the motor The flux current test is used to identify the value of motor flux current required to produce rated motor torque at rated current When the flux test is performed the motor will rotate The drive accelerates the motor to approximately two thirds of base speed and then coasts for several seconds IR Voltage Drop Test IR Voltage Drop is set by the IR voltage drop test IR Voltage Drop is used by the IR Compensation procedure to provide additional voltage at all frequencies to offset the voltage drop developed across the stator resistance An accurate calculation of the IR Voltage Drop will ensure higher starting torque and better performance at low speed operation The motor should not rotate during this test Leakage Inductance Test Ixo Voltage Drop is set by the leakage inductance test This test measures the inductance characteristics of the motor A measurement of the motor inductance is required to determine references for the regulators that control torque The motor should not rotate during this test Inertia Tes
35. DC Bus Voltage Drive OL Mode 150 PWM Frequency Output Current Current Limit Value 1 SI Bus Reg Mod C18 5 L us Reg Mode debas AN Bus Reg Mode B 111 Inverter Over Load IT iit 234 6 Heat sink and Junction degree Calculator Y see torque block OG Y Q G2 Heatsink Temp E Active Cur Limit 234 6 or Active PWM Freq Fault x Code 243 Alarm x Code IntDBRes OvrHeat GEER Alarm x Code Inv OL Level 1 Inv OL Level 2 Fault x Code EEE DB Resistance Drive Overload Heatsink OvrTemp Motor OL Factor 48 Inverter Overload IT Mtr Over Load I T Motor Current A 150 _ right of curve 102 Motor NP FLA 42 gt 60 Hot time sec Mois 180 Cold Current A 1 0 2 0 1 025 Typ amet a RM 50 gt I Motor i Speed Hz Motor OL Hertz Ca o Fault x Code Motor OL Count Motor Overload c1 swebeig 49018 DA00Z X9 419MOY ZEZ enBi4 swesbeiq 190 8 St c 2 46 Bus Regulation Bus Regulation Bus Reg Gain Bus Reg Mode A B Some applications such as the hide tanning shown here create an intermittent regeneration condition When the hides are being lifted on the left motoring current exists However when the hides reach the top and fall onto a paddle the motor regenerates power bac
36. Go to 6 1 Outpu D Anlg s 2 198 Start Up Figure 2 40 PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Option Startup 8 7 0 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 5 7 6 7 8 Start Up 7 Appl Features This allows programming of additional drive features Start Up 7 Appl Features Make a Selection lt Flying Start gt Auto Restart Done Process PI y Start Up 7 Appl Features Enter choice for PI Reference 1 Analog In 1 Y Start Up 7 Appl Features Enter choice for PI Feedback 1 Analog In 1 y Start Up T Appl Features Enter value for PI Setpoint 50 0 XX X lt yy y Y Start Up T Appl Features Enter value for PI Upper Limit 60 0 Hz XX X lt yy y v Start Up 8 Appl Features Enter value for PI Lower Limit 60 0 Hz XX X lt yy y v Start Up 8 Appl Features Enter value for PI Integral Time 2 0 Secs XX y y y Start 7 2 Flux Vector Start Up Application Functions Start Up 8 Appl Features Select other PI options in parameter 124 Auto Flying Restai 7 4 Start Up Start Up 7 Appl Features 7 Appl Features Enable Flying Set Auto Restart Start Tries to Zero to lt Yes gt disable the No function T 7 3 Es 7 5 Start Up Start Up 7 Appl Features 7 Appl Features Enter value for Enter value for Flying StartGain Auto Rstrt Tries 4000 0 XXX lt
37. Open Closed Drive runs in reverse direction terminal block takes direction ownership Closed Open Drive runs in forward direction terminal block takes direction ownership Closed Closed Drive continues to run in current direction but terminal block maintains direction ownership If one of these input functions is configured and the other one isn t the above description still applies but the unconfigured input function should be considered permanently open The terminal block bit must be set in the Start Mask Direction Mask and Logic Mask parameters in order for the terminal block to start or change the direction of the drive using these inputs Important Direction control is an Exclusive Ownership function see Owners This means that only one control device terminal block DPI device HIM etc at a time is allowed to control direction at a time The terminal block must become direction owner before it can be used to control direction If another device is currently the direction owner as indicated by Direction Owner it will not be possible to start the drive or change direction by using the terminal block digital inputs programmed for both Run and Direction control i e Run Fwd If one or both of these input functions is configured it will not be possible to start or jog the drive from any other control device This is true irrespective of the state of the Start Mask Direction Mask and
38. Positive and Negative Limits The PI has parameters to define the positive and negative limits of the output PI Positive Limit and PI Negative Limit The limits are used in two places on the integrator and on the sum of the Kp Ki terms Providing an external source doesn t turn on Hold the integrator is allowed to integrate all the way to Positive or Negative limit If the integrator reaches the limit the value is clamped and the InLimit bit is set in the PI Status parameter to indicate this condition The limits are entered in the range of 100 00 PI Positive Limit must always be greater than PI Negative Limit If the application is Process Control typically these limits would be set to the maximum allowable frequency setting This allows the PI regulator to control over the entire required speed range If the application is Process Trim large trim corrections may not be desirable and the limits would be programmed for smaller values PI PosLmt PI NegLmt PI Kp PI Status Y vyv dads PAL Output Scaling The output value produced by the PI is displayed as 100 00 Internally this is represented by 132767 which corresponds to xmaximum frequency Output Scaling for Torque Trim The output value from the Process PI loop when in torque trim mode is displayed as 100 which corresponds to 100 of rated
39. Select a resistor bank from the following tables or from your resistor supplier that has all of the following a resistance value that is less than the value calculated Rgp in ohms a resistance value that is greater than the minimum resistance listed in Table A A a power value that is greater than the value calculated in Step 4 Pay in watts a watt second value greater than the value calculated the resistance value of the resistor bank is less than the minimum ATTENTION The internal dynamic brake IGBT will be damaged if resistance value of the drive Use Table A A to verify that the resistance value of the selected resistor bank is greater than the minimum resistance of the drive If no resistor appears in the following tables that is greater than the minimum allowable resistance and is less than the calculated maximum resistance Adjust the deceleration time of the application to fit an available resistor package or Use the calculated data to purchase resistors locally or Consult the factory for other possible resistor packages Table 4 A Resistor Selection 240V AC Drives Selecting An External Resistor 4 5 Watt Catalog Watt Catalog Ohms Watts Seconds Number Oh
40. Time Application Example Baking Line The diagram below shows a typical application for the Slip Compensation feature The PLC controls the frequency reference for all four of the drives Drive 1 and Drive 3 control the speed of the belt conveyor Slip compensation will be used to maintain the RPM independent of load changes caused by the cutter or dough feed By maintaining the required RPM the baking time remains constant and therefore the end product is consistent With the Slip Compensation feature the process will only require a new speed reference when the product is changed The user will not have to tune the drive due to a different load characteristic Speed Control Mode Regulation amp Vector Speed Feedback 2 169 A pl Cookie Line SITIO ANS V A PowerFlex Drive 1 ey f ey AL PowerFlex Drive 4 PowerFlex Drive 2 PowerFlex Drive 3 Process PI See Process PI Loop on page 2 137 Encoder There is 1 encoder input on the I O board of the PowerFlex 700VC The encoder input must be line driver type quadrature dual channel or pulse single channel The encoder input accepts 8 or 12V DC encoder signals There is a 12V DC supply on the drive that can be used to supply power for the encoders An encoder offers the best performance for both speed and torque regulat
41. Trigger Open Open 600 am 600 2 2 2 550 2 550 a a a 8 500 500 450 et 450 Vi TE 400 400 350 400 450 350 400 450 AC Input Volts AC Input Volts Table 2 2 PF700 Bus Levels Class 200 240V AC 400 480V AC 600 690V AC Vslew 1 2V DC 2 4V DC 3 0V DC Vrecover Vmem 30V Vmem 60V Vmem 75V Vclose Vmem 60V Vmem 120V Vmem 150V Virigger1 2 Vmem 60V Vmem 120V Vmem 150V Vtrigger1 3 Vmem 90V Vmem 180V Vmem 225V Vopen Vmem 90V Vmem 180V Vmem 225V Vopen4 153V DC 305V DC 382V DC Vmin 153V DC 305V DC 382V DC Voff 5 200V DC Note 1 Vtrigger is adjustable these are the standard values Line Loss Mode Coast Line Loss Mode Decel 700 700 Recover Recover 650 H Close 650 Close Trigger Trigger GOD Open O00 H Open 2 550 550 2 2 2 500 2 500 a a S 450 S 450 400 400 350 350 300 300 350 400 450 350 400 450 AC Input Volts AC Input Volts Line Loss Mode Continue 700 Recover 650 H Close Trigger 600 H open 550 2 2 500 a 450 400 350 300 E M M MM M 350 400 AC Input Volts 450 2 132 Power Loss Restart after Power Restoration If a power loss causes the drive to coast and power recovers the drive will return to powering the motor if it is in a run permit state The drive is ina run permit state if 3 wire mode it is not faulted and if all Enable and No
42. 40 7 1 60 22 2 0 87 Dia 4 Places TSE En PU RE J 3 f lt 59 6 2 35 gt ee fl QS SN EE lt 72 4 2 85 gt lt 96 1 3 78 gt I 101 9 4 01 I 144 4 5 69 gt 22 2 0 87 Dia 60 3 2 37 amp 5 Places 497 1 96 i INES MAS lt 70 9 2 79 gt ha 92 4 3 64 gt 402 7 4 04 gt e 130 5 5 14 gt 14046 5 54 C 12 3 5 09 gt I 154 2 97 gt 22 2 0 87 Dia 64 7 2 55 d Peres Bo 53 1 2 09 lt 73 0 2 87 lt 92 2 3 63 gt lt 111 2 4 38 gt m 164 1 6 46 lt 837 3 30 gt lt 73 0 2 87 gt 28 5 1 12 Dia 2 Places 22 2 0 87 Dia 2 Places i 827 65 I 423 1 67 51 9 2 04 lt 78 3 3 08 XE I 107 3 4 22 gt lt 135 5 5 33
43. CO A Command lt DC Hold Time gt 2 202 Stop Modes 4 Ramp To Stop is selected by setting Stop Mode x The drive will ramp the frequency to zero based on the deceleration time programmed into Decel Time 1 2 The normal mode of machine operation can utilize Decel Time 1 If the Machine Stop mode requires a faster deceleration than desired for normal mode the Machine Stop can activate Decel Time 2 with a faster rate selected When in Ramp to Stop the drive acknowledges the Stop command by decreasing or ramping the output voltage and frequency to zero in a programmed period Decel Time maintaining control of the motor until the drive output reaches zero The output transistors are then shut off The load motor should follow the decel ramp Other factors such as bus regulation and current limit can alter the decel time and modify the ramp function Ramp mode can also include a timed hold brake Once the drive has reached zero output hertz on a Ramp to Stop and both parameters DC Hold Time and DC Hold Level are not zero the drive applies DC to the motor producing current at the DC Hold Level for the DC Hold Time Output Voltage Output Current Motor Speed Output Current A Output Voltage DC Hold Ed gt Time stop zero 77 DC Hold Time gt Command Command Speed Motor speed during and after the application of DC depends upon t
44. In this mode DC current is applied to the motor at a level equal to the lesser of the current limit setting drive rated current and drive DC current rating The flux up time period is based on the level of flux up current and the rotor time constant of the motor The flux up current is not user adjustable Figure 2 22 Flux Up Current versus Flux Up Time Flux Up Current Maximum DC Current E 5 2 Rated Flux ae gi 2 3 _ Rated Motor FI S Current gt PIG RT mU x PN pA aa T 1 1 ii Motor Flux lt T1 gt bag T2 gt lt T3 gt T4 gt Flux Up Time Flux Up Time Once rated flux is reached in the motor normal operation begins and the desired acceleration profile is achieved 2 98 Flying Start Flying Start Rated Flux Reached Ir Voltage SVC Greater of IR Voltage or Voltage Boost V Hz ur P d 4 d P Flux Up Stator Voltage Voltage Rotor Speed Motor Flux Pe Motor Flux Sasa SUE E v Stator Freq lt Flux Up gt lt Normal gt Operation Time The Flying Start feature is used to start into a rotating motor as quick as possible and resume normal operation with a minimal impact on load or speed When a drive is started in its normal mode it initially applies a frequency of 0 Hz and ramps to the desired frequency If the drive is started in this mode with the motor already spinning larg
45. M D8E C10 M F8E C10 20BD011 0 7 5 5 4 50 9 5 79 11 12 1 16 5 15 20 15 40 40 15 M C2E C16 M D8E C16 M F8E C16 20BD014 1 10 7 5 4 50 125 10 4 14 5158 122 175 30 17 5 50 50 20 M C2E C16 M D8E C16 M F8E C16 20BD022 1 15 10 4 50 19 9 16 6 22 24 2 33 25 50 25 80 80 30 M C2E C25 M D8E C25 M F8E C25 CMN 2500 20BD027 2 20 15 4 50 248 20 6 27 33 44 35 60 35 100 100 50 M F8E C32 CMN 4000 20BD034 2 25 20 4 50 312 25 9 34 405 54 40 70 40 125 125 50 M F8E C45 CMN 4000 20BD040 3 30 25 4 50 36 7 30 5 40 51 68 50 90 50 150 150 50 M F8E C45 CMN 4000 20BD052 3 40 30 4 50 47 7 39 7 52 60 80 60 110 60 200 200 70 CMN 6300 20BD065 3 50 40 4 50 59 6 49 6 65 78 104 80 125 80 250 250 100 CMN 9000 20BD077 4 60 4 50 72 3 60 1 77 85 116 100 170 100 300 300 100 CMN 9000 50 4 50 59 6 49 6 65 98 130 80 125 80 250 250 100 CMN 9000 20BD096 5 75 4 50 90 1 74 9 96 106 144 125 200 125 350 350 125 B B B 160 4 50 72 3 60 1 77 116 154 100 170 100 300 300 100 CMN 9000 20BD125 5 100 4 50 117 97 6 125 138 163 150 250 150 500 375 150 75 4 50 90 1 74 9 96 144 168 125 200 125 350 350 125 20BD156 6 125 4 50 147 122 156 172 234 200 350 200 600 450 250 1100 4 50 131 109 125 188 250 175 250 175 500 375 250 B B B 20BD180 6 150 4 50 169 141 180 198 270 225 400 225 600 500
46. Outputs Digital Selector Digital Out2 Sel 384 Selector Digital Out3 Sel O Selector 0 5ms 217 401 Dig Out Status DigOut 1 Dig Out1 Level Dig Out OnTime Dig Out1 OffTime 217 302 E O TB1 13 E O TB1 12 O TB1 11 E O TB1 14 Dig Out Status DigOut 2 Dig Out2 Level Dig Out2 OnTime Dig Out2 OffTime TB1 15 O TB1 16 217 Jos Dig Out Status DigOut 3 Dig Out3 Level Dig Out3 OnTime Dig Out3 OffTime Ath I NC 6 surebeiq 49018 DA00Z Xe 4uamod 67 e1nB14 erc suieiBeiq xoolg TB1 1 TB1 2 TB1 17 TB1 18 TB1 3 TB1 4 TB1 19 TB1 20 Inputs amp Outputs Analog 2 0ms Anlg Out Absolut Analog Out1 Hi Anlg Out Config Speed Ref A Hi GOE 5 Goa Analog In1 Hi Speed Ref B Hi F
47. PIRef gt PIFbk gt A 32K I PI Output Ld Process PI Controller e Feedback Square Root This feature uses the square root of the feedback signal as the PI feedback This is useful in processes that control pressure since centrifugal fans and pumps vary pressure with the square of speed The PI has the option to take the square root of the selected feedback signal This is used to linearize the feedback when the transducer produces the process variable squared The result of the square root is normalized back to full scale to provide a consistent range of operation The option to take the square root is selected in the PI Configuration parameter e Stop Mode PowerFlex 700 Only When Stop Mode is set to 1 and a Stop command is issued to the drive the PI loop will continue 2 144 Process Pl Loop 100 0 Ka S 790 a amp 50 0 e E 25 0 s 0 0 n 3 25 0 N tw 50 0 E o 75 0 z 100 0 100 0 75 0 50 0 25 0 0 0 25 0 50 0 75 0 100 0 Normalized Feedback to operate during the decel ramp until the PI output becomes more than the master reference When set to 0 the drive will disable PI and perform a normal stop This bit is active in Trim mode only e Anti Wind Up PowerFlex 700 Only When Anti Windup is set to 1 the PI loop will automatically prevent the integrator from creating an excessi
48. Protector Number ND HD kHz C Amps kVA Cont 1Min 3Sec Min Max Min Max 2 Max Max 8 690 Volt AC Input 20BF052 5 145 4 50 46 9 561 52 57 78 60 110 60 175 175 375 4 50 40 1 48 0 46 69 92 50 90 50 150 150 20BF060 5 55 4 50 57 7 68 9 60 66 90 80 125 80 225 225 45 4 50 46 9 561 52 78 104 60 110 60 175 175 20BF082 5 75 2 50 79 0 944 82 90 123 100 200 100 375 375 55 2 50 57 7 68 9 60 90 120 80 125 80 225 225 20BF098 5 90 2 40 94 7 113 198 108 127 125 200 125 375 375 75 2 40 79 0 944 82 123 140 100 200 100 375 375 20BF119 6 110 2 50 115 137 119 181 179 150 250 150 400 90 2 50 94 7 113 98 147 196 125 200 125 375 20BF142 6 132 2 50 138 165 142 156 213 175 300 175 450 A 110 2 50 115 137 119 179 238 150 250 150 400 Notes Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection For US NEC minimum size is 125 of motor FLA Ratings shown are 1 2 a RO D T maximum Circuit Breaker inverse time breaker For US NEC minimum size is 12596 of motor FLA Ratings shown are maximum Motor Circuit Protector instantaneous trip circuit breaker For US NEC minimum size is 125 of motor FLA Ratings shown are maximum Bulletin 140M with adjust
49. manipulate the bits of the command word as shown below e olo 1 Condition True 1 0 0 Condition False x Reserved ojoj o o o o o v e D mia n The effectiveness of these bits or digital inputs can be affected by Accel Mask See Masks on page 2 114 for more information Times are adjustable in 0 1 second increments from 0 0 seconds to 3600 0 seconds In its factory default condition when no accel select inputs are closed and no accel time bits are 1 the default acceleration time is Accel Time 1 and the rate is determined as above 2 2 Advanced Tuning Advanced Tuning Advanced Tuning Parameters PF700 Vector Control Only operation the following parameters must only be changed by ATTENTION To guard against unstable or unpredictable qualified service personnel The following parameters can only be viewed when 2 Unused is selected in parameter 196 Param Access Lvl o g E 2 Parameter Name amp Description Values amp 500 KI Current Limit Default 1500 Current Limit Integral gain This gain is Min Max 0 10000 applied to the current limit error signal to Units 1 eliminate steady state current limit error A larger value increases overshoot during a Step of motor current load 501 KD Current Limit Default 500 Current Limit Derivative gain This gain is Min Max 0 10000 applied to the sensed motor
50. s reaction Terms The following is a definition of terms Some of these values are drive parameters and some are not The description of how these operate is explained below Term Definition Vbus The instantaneous DC bus voltage Vmem The average DC bus voltage A measure of the nominal bus voltage determined by heavily filtering bus voltage Just after the pre charge relay is closed during the initial power up bus pre charge bus memory is set equal to bus voltage Thereafter it is updated by ramping at a very slow rate toward Vbus The filtered value ramps at 2 4V DC per minute for a 480VAC drive An increase in Vmem is blocked during deceleration to prevent a false high value due to the bus being pumped up by regeneration Any change to Vmem is blocked during inertia ride through Vslew The rate of change of Vmem in volts per minute Vrecover The threshold for recovery from power loss Vtrigger The threshold to detect power loss PowerFlex 700 The level is adjustable The default is the value in the PF700 Bus Level table If Pwr Loss Lvl is selected as an input function AND energized Vtrigger is set to Vmem minus Power Loss Level Vopen is normally 60V DC below Vtrigger in a 480VAC drive Both Vopen and Vtrigger are limited to a minimum of Vmin This is only a factor if Power Loss Level is set to a large value PowerFlex 70 This is a fixed value WARNING When using a value of Parameter
51. salen IMPORTANT 3 19 i Start Up pars Use Rotate Tune Note Yes 3 Motor Tests Yes if no load low Start Up da o Cannot start due py N fiction Fux C Inertia Test State 3 4 allows No to open Stop Vector mode Caution Inertia Start Jo input or other Else use Static Test causes o 34 Y Start Inhibits Tune For shaft rotation Start Up Press Enter special applic START to begin A Directn Test ations see ref Enter Press Jog or Start E erence maual 3 20 Backup to begin 3 3 y Start U Start Jog Start Up p ooo Backup disallow Start Jog Static B AutoTune enema ta gt Y Enter 87 Make a selectioon 9 test 3 5 Start Up Tune Note Set 61 Static Tune Please wait A Directn Test puedas Bon T Rotate Tune Motor rotation selection correct for Rotate Tune application Yes No Note States 3 8 No For gt 7 If NO amp 3 9 allow Start Vag If YES amp positive stops 3 16 encoder counts drive a 3 7 3 8 y 3 9 stops drive Start Up Start Up tart Up 3 6 IF YES amp Start Up B Auto Tune B Auto Tune B Auto Tune i A Directn Test Static Tune will Caution Rotate Enter value for StartUp negative Startup will energize motor Tune will cause Autotune Torque me ia pud automatically with shaft shaft rotation 6 0 est complete counts reverse the XXX X lt gt yyy Press ENTER stops MotorLeads SETS del press START to Wy drive a egin egin 3 15 Y Start disallow Start disallow S Faul
52. the flux current is not increased when the motor is at or above rated speed At higher speeds field weakening is active and the motor flux current cannot be increased As the speed decreases below base speed the flux current increases until there is enough voltage margin to run rated motor current Because flux braking increases motor losses the duty cycle used with this method must be limited Check with the motor vendor for flux braking or DC braking application guidelines You may also want to consider using external motor thermal protection Flux Up Flux Up 2 97 Flux Up Mode AC induction motors require flux to be established before controlled torque can be developed To build flux in these motors voltage is applied to them PowerFlex drives have two methods to flux the motor The first method is a normal start During a normal start flux is established as the output voltage and frequency are applied to the motor While the flux is being built the unpredictable nature of the developed torque may cause the rotor to oscillate even though acceleration of the load may occur In the motor the acceleration profile may not follow the commanded acceleration profile due to the lack of developed torque Figure 2 21 Accel Profile during Normal Start No Flux Up Frequency 0 LLL Reference 3 S g Stator iE Rotor Oscillation due lt to flux being established 0 Time The second method is Flux Up Mode
53. z P I Speed Reference I Commanded Freq C r1 Speed Ref A Sel 9 Jog Speed 1 Diva Hak Rsk gt t 23 gt I e 2 Speed Ref B Sel 93 Jog Speed 2 108 Pl Regulator j Lead Lag gt S c o Analog 1 2 Mampan speed I C Lead Lag Bo Had g e gt gt 273 gt Drive Ramp Rslt Speed N Q E Enc Pulse Linear Feedback E o MOP 1 10 Ramp amp From Encoder I S z ot p i Kp Speed Loop U 2 a Presets 1 7 S Curve Min Max I o ss TY Spd Ref B Logic Limits I Ki Speed Loop 445 e ga DPI Port 1 6 I 2 o I Kf Speed Loop ED ini e Speed Ref Selection Speed Desired BW Caso 5 I Po de t z Po Me o ee ee M e le e o PI Excl PI Speed lt 5 Mode Trim e T Process Control 2ms PI Output Meter I Torque Control 0 25ms o 3 c I 138 I I MirTor Cur Ref 44 de 2 ontro l PI Reference gt I Speed Torque Mod I 2 c 110 pd Reg In I PI Regulator P 01 I gt gt 2 L M 5 m Notch 1 p Bn 8 gt orque H gt gt Pi Feedback p TET Dx ruin bog Gled Control Flux g 3 m Limit e l Bus Reg Mode A 161 Bus Volt Drive I amp Power 8 Motor 5 I Bus Reg Mode B C18 D Regulator Protection I gt J I a pce ce g ct 2 lt gt Read Only Parameter O Vector Control Mode with Speed Control E A g A Read Only Parameter with Bit Enumeration z 4 CA Read Write Parameter with Bit Enumeration Hj O C X Read Testpoint with Data Sel
54. 001 amp later Enhancements Process PID Control and Trim enhancements have been included in firmware version 3 001 and later for the PowerFlex 700 Vector Control drive including e Derivative term added to Process PI controller to create PID e Ability to scale output of PID to a percentage of Speed Reference e Connect scale blocks to the Reference and Feedback selections on PID e Ability to select of Reference for the Speed Trim function Derivative Term The Derivative term has been added to the Process PI This adds to the flexibility of the Process control 459 Plout KD Sec x PI Deriv Time Refer to formula below OPI Error dt Sec Default Min Max Units 0 00 Secs 0 00 100 00 Secs 0 01 Secs For example winders using torque control rely on PD control not PI control Also PI BW Filter is useful in filtering out unwanted signal response in the PID loop The filter is a Radians Second low pass filter Process PlLoop 2 151 Percent of Reference 124 PI Configuration 124 O Sets configuration of the PI regulator m i sS A AS VE SS HISENSE SES STEENS O ASADAS E x xIxix xix o o o o o o o o o o J braded p 1514 13 12 11 10 98765413 210 x Reserved Bit Vector Control Option Only Factory Default Bit Values Vector firmware 3 001 amp later When using Process PID control the output can be s
55. 109 for typical 2 and 3 wire configurations Start An open to closed transition while the drive is stopped will cause the drive to run in the current direction unless the Stop Clear Faults input function is open The terminal block bit must be set in the Start Mask and Logic Mask parameters in order for the terminal block to start or change the direction of the drive using these inputs If Start is configured then Stop Clear Faults must also be configured Forward Reverse This function is one of the ways to provide direction control when the Start Stop Run functions of the drive are configured as 3 wire control An open input sets direction to forward A closed input sets direction to reverse If state of input changes and drive is running or jogging drive will change direction The terminal block bit must be set in the Direction Mask and Logic Mask parameters in order for the terminal block to select the direction of the drive using this input function Important Direction control is an Exclusive Ownership function see Owners This means that only one control device terminal block DPI device HIM etc at a time 1s allowed to control direction at a time The terminal block must become direction owner before it can be used to control direction If another device is currently the direction owner as indicated by Direction Owner it will not be possible to Digital Inputs 2 6
56. 156 162 096 140 194 380 384 388 124 PowerFlex 70 Digital Input Selection 36 362 363 364 365 366 INPUTS amp OUTPUTS File J Digital In1 Sel Digital In2 Sel Digital In3 Sel Digital In4 Sel Digital In5 Sel Digital In6 Sel Selects the function for the digital inputs 1 When Digital Inx Sel is set to option 2 Clear Faults the Stop button cannot be used to clear a fault condition 2 Typical 3 Wire Inputs Requires that only 3 wire functions are chosen Including 2 wire selections will cause a type 2 alarm 3 Typical 2 Wire Inputs Requires that only 2 wire functions are chosen Including 3 wire selections will cause a type 2 alarm 4 Speed Select Inputs 3 12 Auto Reference Source 1 0 Reference A 1 Reference B 0 Preset Speed 2 1 Preset Speed 3 0 1 0 1 Preset Speed 4 Preset Speed 5 Preset Speed 6 Preset Speed 7 2 xa 20000 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 To access Preset Speed 1 set Speed Ref A Sel or Speed Ref B Sel to Preset Speed 1 Type 2 Alarms Some digital input programming may cause conflicts that will result in a Type 2 alarm Example Digital In1 Sel set to 5 Start in 3 wire control and Digital In2 Sel set to 7 Run in 2 wire Refer to Alarm Descriptions in the User Manual for information on resolving this type of conflict 5 Auto Manual Refer to User Manual for details 6 Opening an Enab
57. 16 bit transfers or in conjunction for 32 bit transfers Because each Datalink consists of a pair of parameters when enabled each Datalink occupies two 16 or 32 bit words in both the input and output image tables depending on configuration A user enters a parameter number into the Datalink parameter The value that is in the corresponding output data table word in the controller is then transferred to the parameter whose number has been placed in the Datalink parameter The following example demonstrates this concept The object of the example is to change Accel and Decel times on the fly under PLC control The user makes the following PowerFlex drive parameter settings Parameter 300 Data In A1 140 the parameter number of Accel Time 1 Parameter 301 Data In A2 142 the parameter number of Decel Time 1 Programmable Remote I O Adjustable Frequency Controller Communication AC Drive 1 0 Image Table Module Output Image Block Transfer Logic Command Analog Reference Datalink A Parameter Number MORD 3 esel Data In A1 300 WORD 4 a gt Data ln A2 301 WORD 5 Datalink A WORD 6 Data Out A1 310 WORD 7 Data Out A2 311 Input Image Block Transfer Logic Status Analog Feedback WORD 3 WORD 4 WORD 5 WORD 6 WORD 7 In the PLC data Table the user enters Word 3 as a value of 100 10 0 Secs and word 4 as a value of 133 13 3 seconds On each I O scan the parameters in the PowerFlex driv
58. 175 Auto Rstrt Delay 180 Wake Level 181 Wake Time 182 Sleep Level 183 Sleep Time 185 Power Loss Time 186 Power Loss Level 321 Anlg In Sqr Root 322 Analog In1 Hi 323 Analog In1 Lo 324 Analog In1 Loss 325 Analog In2 Hi 326 Analog In2 Lo 327 Analog In2 Loss 343 Analog Out1 Hi 344 Analog Out1 Lo 346 Analog Out2 Hi 347 Analog Out2 Lo 381 Dig Out1 Leve 382 Dig Out1 OnTime 383 Dig Out1 OffTime 385 Dig Out2 Leve 386 Dig Out2 OnTime 387 Dig Out2 OffTime 389 Dig Out3 Leve 390 Dig Out3 OnTime 391 Dig Out3 OffTime 416 Fdbk Filter Sel 419 Notch Filter Freq 420 Notch Filter K 428 Torque Ref A Hi 429 Torque Ref A Lo 430 Torq Ref A Div 432 Torque Ref B Hi 433 Torque Ref B Lo 434 Torq Ref B Mult 435 Torque Setpoint 436 Pos Torque Limit 437 Neg Torque Limit 445 Ki Speed Loop 446 Kp Speed Loop 447 Kf Speed Loop 449 Speed Desired BW 450 Total Inertia 454 Rev Speed Limit 460 PI Reference Hi 461 PI Reference Lo 462 PI Feedback Hi 463 PI Feedback Lo 2 114 Masks Masks A mask is a parameter that contains one bit for each of the possible Adapters Each bit acts like a valve for issued commands Closing the valve setting a bit s value to 0 stops the command from reaching the drive logic Opening the valve setting a bit s value to 1 allows the command to pass through the mask into the drive logic 276 Logic Mask 288 Determines whi
59. 18 Auto Manual 7 Start in 3 wire control and Digital 19 Local In2 Sel set to 7 Run in2 wire 20 Acc2 4 Dec2 Refer to User Manual for information 21 Accel 2 on resolving this type of conflict bacis 2 Vector Control Option Only 24 MOP Ds 0 321 Spd Trq Mode 25 Excl Link 0 10 0 Zero Torque 26 PI Enable 0 10 1 Spd Reg 27 PI Hold 0 1 0 Torque Reg 28 PI Reset a I Mex ET 29 Pwr Loss Lvl 1 0 1 Sum Spd Trq 30 Precharge En 1 t o Absolute 3133 Spd Trq Sel1 3 2 3 1 1 1 Zero Trq 4 Jog 2 2 4 When Digital Inx Sel is set to option 2 Clear Faults the Stop button cannot be used to clear a fault condition 5 Typical 3 Wire Inputs Requires that only 3 wire functions are chosen Including 2 wire selections will cause a type 2 alarm 9 Typical 2 Wire Inputs Requires that only 2 wire functions are chosen Includ ing 3 wire selections will cause a type 2 alarm See User Manual for conflicts 7 Auto Manual Refer to User Manual for details 8 Opening an Enable input will cause the motor to coast to stop ignoring any programmed Stop modes 9 A Dig In ConflictB alarm will occur if a Start input is programmed without a Stop input 10 Refer to the Sleep Wake Mode Attention statement on User Manual 11 A dedicated hardware enable input is available via a jumper selection Refer to User Manual for further information
60. 186 Power Loss Level larger than default the customer must provide a minimum line impedance to limit inrush current when the power line recovers The input impedance should be equal or greater than the equivalent of a 5 transformer with a VA rating 5 times the drive s input VA rating Vinertia The software regulation reference for Vbus during inertia ride through Vclose The threshold to close the pre charge contactor Vopen The threshold to open the pre charge contactor Vmin The minimum value of Vopen Voff The bus voltage below which the switching power supply falls out of regulation Table 2 Y PF70 Bus Levels Class 200 240 VAC 400 480 VAC 600 690 VAC Vslew 1 2V DC 2 4V DC 3 0V DC Vrecover Vmem 30V Vmem 60V Vmem 75V Vclose Vmem 60V Vmem 120V Vmem 150V Vtrigger1 Vmem 60V Vmem 120V Vmem 150V Vtrigger2 Vmem 90V Vmem 180V Vmem 225V Vopen Vmem 90V Vmem 180V Vmem 225V Vmin 204V DC 407V DC 509V DC Voff 3 300V DC Line Loss Mode Decel Power Loss 2 131 Line Loss Mode Coast 700 700 i Recover Recover Close Close 650 E Trigger 650 E
61. 2 Table of Contents Specifications amp Dimensions PowerFlex 70 700 Specifications clie n 1 1 Input Output Ratings ses excite RP n i IUn Hae han GU a cR recs c n pr o ere ddr rer 1 3 Heat Dissipatlon EM D 1 3 iDeratmg Guidelines z s aes iretur pe b cr A Oc RR eere e PR oraret ird t ren 1 3 PowerFlex 70 Dimensions 4 is eee age aia 1 7 PowerFlex 700 Dimensions scene eem eere ame ey gene em em y here gre Rn 1 13 Detailed Drive Operation Accel Time ir A a a TREE RET I E DURS 2 1 Advanced Tuning cant da Ade up opes ERR E saa A UU ERE 2 2 ALAMOS X4 PP 2 5 Analog Inputs uses senec a li EE Hae See ada es a a WAR RO de a EA RAE 2 0 Analog Outp ts midis a DAKE Dee dA QUERER EOE ade aa 2 21 Auto Manual a i ee ERR Ae REA CEPR ORQES as S408 ae ra AT ae NS 2 27 Auto Restart Reset Run 0 0 ene nent beeen teen eee eens 2 29 AMOS P ia da tn ae ae and 2 31 Block Diagrams je sel ak cite Ear i rhR deck RR EERTRERRA SCC Gras RAS oo donk ee kid 2 34 Bus Regulation coco EEUU DUE ss wens MWe ett Ed DES E QI E we eed ed 2 46 Cable Control goss csc Sharda wa Reda a RR pan ewe i aac uu x esed dades 2 51 Cable Motor Lengths cuisine 2 51 Cable POW nis RR shed be Ice DS Wie eb We A ern DS Hw kde ag DA reu cR wa ae Rae 2 51 Cable Trays and Conduit i sv ii bh ieee Sed rares Ga nore LAER Mea pe RE Paru net 2 51 Carrier PWM Frequency a sexes eese a b pa marea ue Cet ER
62. 2 as DigIn CflctA DigIn CflctB and DigIn CflctC DigIn CfIctA indicates a conflict between different input functions that are not specifically associated with particular start modes The table below defines which pairs of input functions are in conflict 66 4 99 Combinations marked with a will cause an alarm Important There are combinations of input functions in Table 2 J that will produce other digital input configuration alarms DigIn CflctA alarm will also be produced if Start is configured and Stop Clear Faults is not Table 2 J Input function combinations that produce DigIn CflctA alarm Acc2 Dec2 Accel2 Decel2 Jog JogFwd JogRev Fwd Rev Acc2 Dec2 i Ej Accel 2 EN Decel 2 EN Jog Jog Fwd JL Jog Rev JL Fwd Rev 2 76 Digital Inputs DigIn CflctB indicates a digital Start input has been configured without a Stop input or other functions are in conflict Combinations that conflict are 66 99 marked with a 5 and will cause an alarm Table 2 K Input function combinations that produce Digln CflctB alarm Fwd Start Stop CF Run RunFwd RunRev Jog Jog Fwd Jog Rev Rev Start i Stop CF Run Fwd Run Rev Jog l Es Jog Fwd E Jog Rev A Fwd Rev Es Digin CflctC indicates that more than one physical input ha
63. 2 61 gt lt 128 0 5 04 232 3 9 15 6 All 34 9 1 37 Dia 22 2 0 87 Dia 56 2 2 21 gt 3 Places 62 7 2 47 Dia 4 Places 458 1 80 gt i Removable Junction Box CPN eres iia J B O n 1 UG I ae B 2420 9 53 i 7 i ae 222 3 10 i J 8 75 185 4 1485 f 7 30 585 1518 us I ES Don 5 474 185 52 1 2 05 69 1 2 72 gt lt 130 1 5 12 gt 230 1 9 06 280 1 11 03 lt 330 1 13 00 1 20 PowerFlex 700 Dimensions Notes Accel Time Chapter 2 Detailed Drive Operation This chapter explains PowerFlex drive functions in detail Explanations are organized alphabetically by topic Refer to the Table of Contents for a listing of topics Accel Time 1 2 The Accel Time parameters set the rate at which the drive ramps up its output frequency after a Start command or during an increase in command frequency speed change The rate established is the result of the programmed Accel Time and the Minimum and Maximum Frequency as follows Maximum Speed Accel Time Accel Rate Hz sec Two accel times exist to allow the user to change acceleration rates on the fly via PLC command or digital input The selection is made by programming Accel Time 1 amp Accel Time 2 and then using one of the digital inputs Digital Inx Sel programmed as Accel 2 see Table 2 1 for further information However if a PLC is used
64. 20 8920 267000 T20R8K92 29 12826 359925 445 10 20 5940 260000 T20R5K94 29 12667 359925 440 104 20 1500 28000 T20RIK5 29 8487 253840 445 104 20 900 18500 T20R900W 29 5130 199993 442 10 20 600 17300 T20R600W 29 3800 127069 442 104 20 300 18700 T20R300W 27 27400 2075000 T27R27K4 18 30910 899814 440 12 27 21600 1346000 T27R21K6 18 20664 1336477 44512 27 15000 931000 T27R15K0 18 20612 1336477 440 12A 27 11500 391000 T27R11K5 18 13810 660558 445 12A 27 8420 358000 T27R8K42 18 8266 234734 44232 27 3300 73900 T27R3K3 18 6184 152850 442 12A 2 200 GE TEN 15 35663 1313968 440 13 27 1500 23700 T27R1K5 15 28894 719851 445 13 PE 1200 4169000 Te 15 23772 719851 440 13A 27 900 24000 T27R900W 15 15927 1158280 445 13A 27 600 15400 T27R600W 15 11400 734000 TI5RTIK4 27 300 18500 T27R300W ies oi aol aaa 25 8420 328000 T25R8K42 15 8570 466000 T1SR8K57 25 3900 190000 T25R3K9 15 7182 179963 442313A 25 3300 73900 T25R3K3 15 6160 232000 TI5R6K16 25 1500 22000 T25RIK5 15 4210 143000 T15R4K21 25 1200 27700 T25RiK2 15 1500 38800 TI5RIKS 25 900 23000 T25R900W 15 900 22000 T15R900W 25 600 14300 T25R600W 15 600 20800 TI5R600W 25 300 17200 T25R300W 15 300 16400 T15R300W 23 16172 825698 445 11 14 12700 1038000 TI4RI2K7 23 11125 492736 445 114 14 11400 734000 TI4RTIK4 23 10200 310000 T23R10K2 14 6160 232000 TI4R6K16 23 7490 328000 T23R7K49 14 1800 27800 TI4RIK8 23 6469 399830 442 1 14 1200 24500 TI4RiK2 23 6310 179000 T23R6K31 14 900 20700 T14R900W 23 498
65. 250 112514 50 147 122 156 234 312 200 350 200 600 450 250 xi xi 20BD248 6 200 2 40 233 194 248 273 372 300 550 300 700 700 400 150 2 40 169 141 180 270 360 225 400 225 600 500 250 See page 2 105 for Notes Fuses and Circuit Breakers Table 2 T PF700 600 Volt AC Input Protection Devices 2 105 Motor Dual Circuit Circuit Drive a HP PWM Input Element Time Non Time Breaker Protector 140M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Catalog Rating Freg Temp Ratings Output Amps Delay Fuse Delay Fuse 3 4 Range 56 Number z ND HD kHz C Amps kVA Cont 1 Min 3 Sec Min 1 Max Min Max Max Max Available Catalog Numbers 140 7 600 Volt AC Input 20BE1P7 0 1 10 5 4 50 1 3 1 4 1 7 2 2 6 2 4 2 6 15 3 M C2E B16 20BE2P7 0 2 1 4 50 2 1 21 27 3 6 4 8 3 6 3 10 15 3 M C2E B25 20BE3P9 0 3 2 4 50 3 0 3 1 39 143 5 9 6 9 6 15 15 7 M C2E B40 M D8E B40 20BE6P1 0 5 3 4 50 5 3 55 6 1 6 7 9 2 9 12 9 20 20 15 M C2E B63 M D8E B63 20BE9P0 0 7 5 5 4 50 78 81 9 9 9 13 5 10 20 10 35 30 15 M C2E C10 M D8E C10 M F8E C10 20BE011 1 10 17 5 4 50 9 9 10 2 11 13 5 18 15 25 15 40 40 15 M C2E C10 M D8E
66. 3 4 PowerFlex 700 Power Curves cessere x CR oC RE ERR EHI Oo AU ed ced wom ES 3 8 Section 4 selecting An External Resistor 22e ere eret RE RR ER ERSTE AE Ur REFER EE 4 1 How to Select an External Dynamic Brake Resistor avauuvaavvnaveavvva rea eee 4 1 iv Table of Contents PowerFlex 70 700 Specifications Category Agency Certification Specifications amp Dimensions Specification PF70 PF700 Type 1 Flange Type 4X IP 30 Type 12 IP 66 All Description Chapter 1 Viv v v Listed to UL508C and CAN CSA C2 2 No 14 M91 v Listed to UL508C for plenums Rear heatsink only Viv v v CE Marked for all applicable European Directives EMC Directive 89 336 EEC EN 61800 3 Adjustable Speed electrical power drive systems Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC EN 50178 Electronic Equipment for use in Power Installations Viv v v O N223 Certified to AS NZS 1997 Group 1 Class A v Certified to Criteria C 2 1983 The drive is also designed to meet the following specifications NFPA 70 US National Electrical Code NEMA ICS 3 1 Safety standards for Construction and Guide for Selection Installation and Operation of Adjustable Speed Drive Systems IEC 146 International Electrical Code 1 Applied noise impulses may be counted in addition to the standard pulse train causing erroneously high Pulse Freq readings Category Protection
67. 480 685V DC 750V DC On 8V DC 685V DC Memory 65V DC 600 856V DC 937V DC On 10V DC 856V DC Memory 81V DC 600 690V 983V DC 1076V DC On 11V DC PowerFlex 700 983V DC Memory 93V DC Frames 5 amp 6 Only 880 815 DB Turn On DB Turn Off 750 685 650 DC Volts 320 360 460 484 528 576 AC Volts If Bus Reg Mode A parameter 161 is set to Dynamic Brak The Dynamic Brake Regulator is enabled In Dynamic Brak mode the Bus Voltage Regulator is turned off The DB Turn On and turn off curves apply Table 2 C For example with a DC Bus Memory at 684V DC the Dynamic Brake Regulator will turn on at 750V DC and turn back off at 742V DC If Bus Reg Mode A parameter 161 is set to Both Frq 1st Both regulators are enabled and the operating point of the Bus Voltage Regulator is lower than that of the Dynamic Brake Regulator The Bus Voltage Regulator setpoint follows the Bus Reg Curve 2 below a DC Bus Memory of 650V DC and follows the DB Turn Off curve above a DC Bus Memory of 650V DC Table 2 D The Dynamic Brake Regulator follows the DB Turn On and turn off curves Table 2 C For example with a DC Bus Memory at 684V DC the Bus Voltage Regulator setpoint is 742V DC and the Dynamic Brake Regulator will turn on at 750V DC and back off at 742V DC If Bus Reg Mode A parameter 161 is set to Adjust Freq The Bus Voltage Reg
68. 597 6260 550 1A 117 2700 14300 T117R2K7 956 400 6260 555 1A 117 2100 18600 T117R2K1 956 242 4225 552 1 117 1500 15800 T117R1iK5 956 179 4225 552 1A 117 1200 12500 TH7RIK 695 1258 15258 550 2 117 900 10600 T117R900W 695 832 7981 555 2 117 600 10100 T117R600W 695 825 7981 550 2A 117 300 7950 T117R300W 695 553 7981 555 2A 97 4200 19100 TO7R4K2 695 333 4929 552 2 97 3600 22400 T97R3K6 695 248 4929 552 2A 97 3000 16800 T97R3K0 546 1601 36619 550 3 97 2700 X 19100 T97R2K7 546 1059 23004 555 3 97 2100 15400 T97R2K1 546 1055 23004 550 3A 97 1500 20800 T97R1K5 546 707 12050 555 3A 97 1200 16500 T97R1K2 546 424 12050 552 3 97 900 13800 T97R900W 546 316 5634 552 3A 97 600 13400 T97R600W 4 T SE 97 300 10300 T97R300W 364 1590 38496 550 4A 85 10285 361490 550 8 364 1588 38496 555 4 85 6854 231135 550 8A 364 1065 24412 555 4A 85 6801 231135 555 8 364 635 15336 552 4 85 4592 233795 555 8A 364 477 3990 552 4A 85 2720 92016 552 8 360 86 17000 AKR2360P500 AO SG a BA 285 309 76680 5503 GU 3000 209000 TBOEKD 299 2 2049 E TH 998 en 80 5700 29400 T80R5K7 209 E 2049 48120 39979 80 4500 23300 T80RA4K5 on NE a c MODE 80 4200 25100 T80R4K2 PBI E AA 3929 80 3600 18500 T80R3K6 c D A s 80 3000 22100 TB0R3KO 196 4460 130669 550 6 80 2700 24600 T80R2K7 196 2965 83096 550 6A 80 2100 19100 T80R2K1 196 2950 83096 555 6 80 1500 17500 T80RiK5 196 1987 53519 555 6A 80 1200 13700 T80RIK2 196 1180 33567 552 6 80 900 18500 T80R900W 196 890 20970 552 6
69. 734000 TISRTiK4 IV HEU T TENE ODD FUR 15 8570 466000 TI5RSK57 a a nO 15 6160 232000 T15R6K16 Rea OR 15 4210 143000 TI5RAK21 a aT E 15 1500 38800 TISRIK5 E DU EE E 15 900 22000 T15R900W 15 600 20800 T15R600W 5 7 24694 1781970 220 11 15 520 104000 2 5 7 16461 880744 220 11A AKR2030P1K2 57 16314 880744 22541 15 300 16400 T15R300W 57 11020 905640 225 114 14 12700 1038000 TI4RI2K7 5 7 6525 421193 222 11 14 11400 734000 TI4R11K4 57 4938 200810 222 11A 14 10045 523728 220 8 54 104000 3444000 T5F4R104KO 14 6708 1721388 220 8A 5 4 51900 1953000 T5FARBIK9 14 6642 172138 225 8 5 4 48100 1845000 T5F4R48Ki 14 6160 232000 T14R6K16 54 37700 2310000 T5F4R37K7 14 4495 117367 225 8A 54 22000 717000 TSFAR22K0 14 2657 154455 222 8 5 4 20300 738000 T5FAR20K3 14 2012 61344 222 8A 5 4 12000 699000 T5FARI2KO 14 1800 27800 TI4RiK8 54 7280 328000 TSFAR7K28 14 1200 24500 TI4RiK2 5 4 5780 169000 T5FAR5K78 4 8 Selecting An External Resistor 240V AC Drives Continued Watt Catalog Ohms Watts Seconds Number 5 4 5080 401000 T5F4R5K8 5 4 2680 185000 T5F4R2K68 5 4 1670 55700 T5F4R1K67 4 8 132000 8077000 T4F8R132K0 4 8 99300 6159000 T4F8R99K3 4 8 61000 3916000 T4F8R61KO 4 8 58200 3696000 T4F8R58K2 4 8 34600 2310000 T4F8R34K6 4 8 25800 984000 T4F8R25K8 4 8 19200 586000 T4F8R19K2 4 8 10900 359000 T4F8R10K9 4 8 8880 260000 T4F8R8K88 4 8 5490 169000 T4F8R5K49 48 4
70. 77 1200 20800 T77R1K2 117 1200 12500 T117R1K2 77 900 17900 T77R900W 4 10 Selecting An External Resistor 480V AC Drives Continued Watt Catalog Watt Catalog Ohms Watts Seconds Number Ohms Watts Seconds Number 77 600 10600 T77R600W 44 12784 369388 440 9 77 8300 8210 T77R300W 44 8537 302807 440 9A 60 11000 448000 T6ORTIKO 44 8454 305624 445 9 60 6900 164000 T60R6K9 44 5720 184031 445 9A 60 4500 28000 T60R4KS 44 3381 190604 442 9 60 3600 22000 T60R3K6 44 2561 121670 442 9A 60 2700 18500 T60R2K7 40 22000 1202000 T40R22K0 60 1500 20800 T6ORIK5 40 19000 568000 T40R19KO 60 1200 16400 T60RIK2 40 17000 574000 T40R17KO 60 900 13700 T60R900W 40 16000 521000 T40R16KO 60 600 13000 T60R600W 40 11000 333000 T40R11KO 60 520 104000 2 40 10000 309000 T40R10KO AKR2120P1K2 40 4000 105000 T40R4K0 60 300 10300 T60R300W 40 1800 18500 TAOBIKE 56 10045 388094 440 8 40 1200 17300 T40R1K2 56 6702 245375 740 BA 40 900 14300 T40R900W 56 6642 245375 145 8 40 300 10900 T40R300W 56 4490 245062 445 8A 34 26000 1591000 T34R26K0 56 2657 154455 442 8 34 19000 1048000 T34R19KO 56 2010 61344 442 8A 34 18000 1017000 T34R18K0 48 20400 716000 T48R20K4 34 17000 990000 T34R17K0 48 19100 6560
71. AC Input 20AB2P2 A 05 033 29 11 25 27 137 6 6 6 10 15 7 140M C2E B40 140M D8E B40 20AB4P2 A 1 075 56 2 48 155 74 10 10 10 175 15 7 140M C2E B63 140M D8E B63 20AB6P8 B 2 115 10 36 78 103 138 15 15 15 30 30 15 140M C2E C10 140M D8E C10 140M F8E C10 20AB9P6 B 3 2 14 51 t 124 165 20 25 20 40 40 30 140M C2E C16 140M D8E C16 140M F8E C16 20AB015 C 5 13 116 58 175 192 266 20 35 20 70 70 30 140M C2E C20 140M D8E C20 140M F8E C20 20AB022 D 75 5 233 83 253 278 379 30 50 30 100 100 30 140M C2E C25 140M D8E C25 140M F8E C25 140 CMN 2500 20AB028 D 10 175 29 8 107 322 379 506 40 70 40 125 125 50 140M F8E C32 140 CMN 4000 240 Volt AC Input 20AB2P2 A 05 033 25 11 22 24 133 3 45 3 8 15 3 140M C2E B25 140M D8E B25 20AB4P2 A 1 075 48 2 42 48 6 4 6 9 6 15 15 7 140M C2E B63 140M D8E B63 20AB6P8 B 2 115 87 136 68 9 12 15 15 15 25 25 15 140M C2E C10 140M D8E C10 140M F8E C10 20AB9P6 B 3 2 1122 51 96 106 144 20 20 20 35 35 15 140M C2E C16 140M D8E C16 140M F8E C16 20AB015 C 5 13 1139 58 153 174 232 20 30 20 60 60 30 140M C2E C16 140M D8E C16 140M F8E C16 20AB022 D 75 5 199 83 22 244 33 25 45 25 80 80 30 140M C2E C20 140M D8E C20 140M F8E C20 20AB028 D 10 7 5 257 10 7 28 33 44 35 60 35 110 110 50 140M F8E C32 140 CMN 4000 Table 2 N PF70 400 480 Volt AC Input Recommended Protection Devices
72. B Switch Positions for Bus Regulator Active SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW 4 SW5 Bus Regulation Limit Bus Reg Open Closed Don t Care 2 48 Bus Regulation Figure 2 13 Bus Voltage Regulator Current Limit and Frequency Ramp Current Limit U Phase Motor Current Derivative Gain Magnitude g Block Calculator Le W Phase Motor Current SW3 Current Limit Level gt gt PI Gain Block ae I Limit No Bus Reg 3 g o S E 5 T 5 g 8 p Limit 0 6 SW1 No Limit Limit Y No Bus Reg Frequency Acc Dec Rate Jerk Jerk No Limit gt Frequency Reference y Frequency Output Frequency Ramp Clamp p Limits sw2 Integrator Bus Reg Speed SW5 Control Frequency Set Point o Mode Maximum Frequency Minimum Speed Maximum Speed Overspeed Limit Frequency Reference to Ramp Control Speed Ref etc Speed Control Slip Comp Process PI etc 3 E 3 5 E E S ES S SW4 8 a Bus Voltage Regulation Point Vreg gt PI Gain Block A Bus Reg On Derivative Bus Voltage Vbus Gain Block Bus Voltage Regulator The derivative term senses a rapid rise in the bus voltage and activates the bus regulator prior to actually reaching the bus voltage regulation set point Vreg The derivative term is important since it minimizes overshoot in the bus vo
73. C10 M F8E C10 20BE017 1 15 10 4 50 154 16 0 17 187 255 20 40 20 60 50 20 M C2E C16 M D8E C16 M F8E C16 20BE022 2 20 15 4 50 202 21 0 22 255 34 30 50 30 80 80 30 M C2E C25 M D8E C25 M F8E C25 CMN 2500 20BE027 2 25 20 4 50 248 25 7 27 33 44 35 60 35 100 100 50 M F8E C25 CMN 2500 20BE032 3 30 25 4 50 294 30 5 32 405 54 40 70 40 125 125 50 M F8E C32 CMN 4000 20BE041 3 40 30 4 50 376 39 1 41 48 64 50 90 50 150 150 100 M F8E C45 CMN 4000 20BE052 3 50 40 4 50 47 7 49 6 52 615 82 60 110 60 200 200 100 CMN 6300 20BE062 4 60 50 2 50 58 2 60 5 62 78 104 80 125 80 225 225 100 CMN 6300 20BE077 5 75 2 50 723 75 1 77 85 116 90 150 90 300 300 100 CMN 9000 160 2 50 58 2 60 5 63 94 126 90 125 90 250 250 100 CMN 6300 20BE099 5 100 2 40 92 9 96 6 99 109 126 125 200 125 375 375 150 5H 2 40 GES TS 72 116 138 100 175 100 300 300 100 CMN 9000 20BE125 6 125 2 50 117 122 125 138 188 150 250 150 375 375 250 i 2 50 93 96 6 99 149 198 125 200 125 375 375 150 20BE144 6 150 2 50 135 141 144 158 216 175 300 175 400 400 250 T 2 50 117 1122 125 1188 250 150 275 150 375 375 250 Table 2 U PF700 690 Volt AC Input Protection Devices Dual Drive o KW PWM Element Time Delay Non Time Delay Circuit Motor Circuit Catalog E Rating Freq Temp Input Ratings Output Amps Fuse Fuse Breaker
74. D Motor NP Active Cur timit ls Min 234 6 lt at gt Torque Lo Gain Current Lim Val Cue gt Min 234e G3 Y IR Voltage Drop 62 Flux Rs E ED Los HIqs Rated Power Unit Data 235 7 Flux Current Ref C ea D Calc Iq Actual Lim Ixo Voltage Drop Ce 1 Flux Current 3 gt Torque Ref Trim 529 IT openloop Torque Control Commanded Torque 0 25ms 9 swebeig 49018 3A007 X9 34eMog 97 21Nbi4 swesbeiq 190 8 68 2 From Reference Selectable Source s PI Reference Sel gt From Feedback Selectable Source s gt Process Trim 2 0 ms PI Ref Meter Out Lo Hi Lo 135 Scale Selector PI Reference Hi PI Reference Lo i PI Configuration Invert Error PI Feedback Sel D 01 128 28 Error PI Error Meter Pl Output Meter E 137 p Out Lo Filter Hi Lo Sart 136 i
75. Dat Ramps StartUp i Complete these 3 Motor steps in order Tests 1 Input Voltage 2 Motr Dat Ramp 3 Motor Tests 4 Speed Limits 5 Speed Control 6 Strt Stop l O 7 Done Exit AA Limits 4 Speed n MEE poe 5 Speed Control gt 6 Strt Stop Nc Go to previous state Go to Backup screen for previous state Goto 1 0 Go to 2 0 Go to 3 0 Go to 4 0 Go to 5 0 Go to 6 0 Figure 2 39 PowerFlex 70 amp 700 Standard Control Option Startup 1 Backup Backup 1 1 StartUp 1 Input Voltage 480V 60 Hz 1 0 StartUp 1 Input Voltage This step should be done only when alternate voltage is needed see user manual It will reset all drive gt parameters with specific choice of Volts and Hz T Enter v Rated Volts 2300 Yes No 1 2 StartUp Enter choice for Enter choice for Input Supply Input Supply 400V 50 Hz 208V 60 Hz 1 Input Voltage lt 240V 60 Hz gt Start Up 2 183 Basic Start Up Input Voltage Backup Enter Enter 13 ak StartUp 1 Input Voltage Reset all No parameters to their defaults Yes No StartUp 1 Input Voltage Clear fault to continue Fault Clear Go to 0 1 2 2 184 Start Up Figure 2 39 PowerFlex 70 amp 700 Standard Control Option Startup 2 2 0 StartUp 2 Motr Dat Ramp Use moto
76. Hz After 2 5 volts the frequency will increase at a rate of 0 16667 volts per hertz to 7 5 volts After 7 5 volts on the analog input the frequency command will remain at 45 Hertz 2 20 Analog Inputs Example 2 Consider the following setup e Anlg In Config bit 0 0 voltage e Speed Ref A Sel Analog In 1 e Analog Inl Hi 10V e Analog Inl Lo 0V e Speed Ref A Hi 50hz e Speed Ref A Lo Ohz e Maximum Speed 45hz e Minimum Speed 15hz The only change from Example 1 is the Speed Ref A Hi is changed to 50 Hz Minimum Speed Maximum Speed Analog In1 Hi 10V Motor Operating Range h gt Frequency Deadband 9 10 Volts _ lt Frequency Deadband 0 3 Volts Command Frequency Analog In1 Lo ov Hz 50 Hz 0Hz 15 Hz Slope defined by Analog Volts Command Frequency Speed Ref A Hi Speed Ref A Lo The deadband as it relates to the analog input can be calculated as follows 1 The ratio of analog input volts to frequency Volts Hertz needs to be calculated The voltage span on the analog input is 10 volts The frequency span is 60 Hz 10 Volts 50 Hz 0 2 Volts Hz 2 Determine the frequency span between the minimum and maximum speed limits and the Speed Ref A Hi and Lo Speed Ref A Hi Maximum Speed 50 45 5 Hz and Minimum Speed Speed Ref A Lo 15 0 15 Hz 3 Multiply by th
77. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I y 008 EE EEE EE EEE E I NE ts Ji e et Ea I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I A rs co ia Pe epee peer I I I I I I I I I I gt I I I I I I I I I I I I I I l I I 5 6 I I I I I a I I c I I I I I I rs 4 cc I I I I I I I I I I I I r I I I I I I Output Hertz Analog Scaling Speed Reference A Sel Analog In 1 Analog In 1 Hi Speed Ref A Hi 10V 30 Hz Analog In 1 Lo Speed Ref A Lo ov 0 Hz 2 14 Analog Inputs Configuration 3 e Anlg In Config bit O 1 Current e Speed Ref A Sel Analog In 1 e Speed Ref A Hi 60 Hz e Speed Ref A Lo 0 Hz e Analog In 1 Hi 2 20 mA e Analog In 1 Lo 4 mA This configuration is referred to as offset In this case a 4 20 mA input signal provides 0 60 Hz output providing a 4 mA offset in the speed command Analog Scaling Speed Reference A Sel Analog In 1 Analog In 1 Hi Speed Ref A Hi 20 mA 60 Hz Analog In 1 Lo Speed Ref A Lo 4mA 0 Hz 0 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 Output Hertz Configuration 4 e Anlg In Config bit 0 0 Voltage e Speed Ref A Sel Analog In 1 e Speed Ref A Hi 2 0 Hz e Speed Ref A Lo 60 Hz e Analog In 1 Hi 10V e Analog In 1 Lo 2 OV This configuration is used to invert the operation of the input signal Here maximum input 10 Volts represents 0 Hz
78. In 2 for our trim Scale2 In Value Commanded Speed Use Commanded Speed as Input to Scale Block 2 Scale1 Out Hi Scale2 Out Value Use the output of Scale Block 2 to set the upper limit of Scale Block 1 output Preset Speed 1 Scale 1 Out Value Use the scaled analog input as the trim reference into Preset Speed 1 Commanded Speed 33 Scale2 In Hi S Scale2 In Value e2 Out Hi 485 485 zLink Scale2 Out Value l l 1 Scale2 In Lo Scale2 Out Lo C486 gt 1 1 Scalet In Hi Scale Out Hi 479 Analog In2 Value Preset Speed 1 Scale1 Out 2 gt C476 Scale In Value value 481 gt 101 478 Scale1 In Lo Scale1 Out Lo 480 Example Configuration 2 Setup a scale block to send parameter 415 Encoder Speed to Analog Output 1 as a 0 10V signal la oc se sg co Oo 25 88 oe uu i i 01 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Analog Outi Value Volts Parameter Settings Parameter Value Description Analog Out1 Sel Scale Block1 Out Scale Block1 Output goes to Analog Out1 Analog Outt Hi 10 V Hi value of Analog Output 1 corresponding to Hi value of encoder speed Analog Out Lo 0 V Lo value of Analog Output 1 corresponding to Lo value of encoder speed Scale1 In Hi 1800 RPM Hi value of the encoder speed Scale1 In Lo 0 RPM Lo value of the encoder speed Scale Blocks 2 159 Parameter Links Destination Parameter Desc
79. Limit 440 gt 47 I From Torque Trim Control Status rqu Us 20 A Notch Filter Freq Notch I Max gt Notch Filter K Torque Ref A 427 5 Torq Ref A Div 430 6 Speed Feedback 25 gt q Pos Torque Limit 436 id Torque Ref B 431 x Min Torque Ref B Mult 434 Abs Min Power Limit Calc Rated Volts 27 gt _ Bus Volt DC Bus Memory s gt Regulator Limit Mas Iq Actual Lim Bus Reg Mode A Cast Limit Bus Reg Mode B e gt Gs gt Neg Torque Limit DC Bus Voltage CS Regen Power Lim Torque Current Torque Reg Kp Calc Observe Sts Torque Reg Enable Output Frequency lt i Gn P Gain 124 X14 Torque Current 4 kp i T Flux Current 5 Torque I HH l Torque Ref Out Estimator Torque Est I l Vds Cmd 234 6 506 gt oll ol Mtr Tor Cur Ref Gar 2346 D ki 0 2 H 0 Iq Rated Qu 357 gt s Drive Rated _ NegTrqCurLim i Vas Cmd 2346 X503 gt Gain pus Iq Scale Limit 440 Y 0 Rate Lim Mot 235 7 Mi Rated Amps otor Torque Reg Ki eser ED 440 gt 1 Control Calc DC Bus Voltage 2 gt noth SEHK Motor NP Volts C41 ctive req x PosTrqCurLim Output Freq lt 1 gt Iq Rated Motor NP Amps Qa a 1 MERE Rs Gain PWM Frequenc Peak Torq Current Limit Motor NP Hertz 4 y lotor N Sene Amps FMS c0 and Tuning Motor NP Torque Amps x10 2946 a Current Rate Limit Motor NP RPM 44 Data Drive OL Mode 150 Motor NP Flux Thermal Manager 357 gt Motor NP Power D burden Output Current 3 B Mi Motor Poles
80. Logic Mask parameters Run An open to closed transition on this input while drive is stopped will cause the drive to run in the currently selected direction unless the Stop Clear Faults input function is configured and open If this input is open then the drive will stop The purpose of this input function is to allow a 2 wire start while the direction is being controlled by some other means 2 66 Digital Inputs The terminal block bit must be set in the Start Mask and Logic Mask parameters in order for the terminal block to start the drive using this input If the Run input function is configured it will not be possible to start or jog the drive from any other control device This is true irrespective of the state of the Start Mask Direction Mask and Logic Mask parameters The Effects of 2 Wire Start Modes on Other DPI Devices The Run Stop and Run Fwd Rev start modes are also called 2 wire start modes because they allow the drive to be started and stopped with only a single input and two wires When a 2 wire terminal block start mode is put into effect by the user the drive can no longer be started or jogged from any other control device i e HIM network card etc This restriction persists as long as one or more of Run Run Forward and Run Reverse are configured This is true even if the configuration is otherwise illegal and causes a configuration alarm See page 2
81. Max Min Max Max Max Available Catalog Numbers 9 600 Volt AC Input 20AEOP9 A 0 5 0 33 13 13 09 J11 14 8 3 3 35 15 3 140M C2E B16 20AE1P7 A 1 075 19 2 fiz 2 26 3 6 3 6 15 3 140M C2E B25 140M D8E B25 20AE2P7 A 2 15 3 31 27 36 48 4 6 4 10 15 7 140M C2E B40 140M D8E B40 20AE3P9 B 3 2 44 145 39 43 59 6 8 6 15 15 7 140M C2E C63 140M D8E B63 20AE6P1 B 5 3 75 78 61 67 92 10 12 10 20 20 15 140M C2E C10 140M D8E C10 140M F8E C10 20AE9PO C 75 5 77 18 J9 99 135 J10 20 10 35 35 15 140M C2E C10 140M D8E C10 140M F8E C10 20AE011 C 10 75 98 101 11 135 118 15 20 15 40 40 15 140M C2E C16 140M D8E C16 140M F8E C16 20AE017 D 15 10 153 115917 187 255 20 35 20 60 60 30 140M C2E C20 140M D8E C20 140M F8E C20 20AE022 D 20 15 20 208 22 255 34 25 45 25 80 80 30 140M C2E C25 140M D8E C25 140M F8E C25 140 CMN 2500 1 For IP 66 NEMA Type 4X 12 enclosures drives listed as Frame A increase to Frame B and drives listed as Frame C increase to Frame D 2 Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping 3 Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection For US NEC minimum size is 125 of motor FLA Ratings shown are maximum Circuit Breaker inverse time breaker For US NEC minimum size is 125 of motor FLA Ratings shown
82. Output FLA D 400V NEMA Type 2 6 kHz None 1 Flange 8 10 kHz 50 o 3 48 8kHz 5 46 2 44 x 10kHz 42 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 of Output FLA E 400V NEMA Type 2 6 kHz None 1 Flange 80kHz o e H 50 4 40 8kHz S 30 2 12kHz amp 204 3 10 t t T 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 of Output FLA PowerFlex 700 Ambient Temperature Load ND Voltage Rating Enclosure Frequency Derate 400V 5 5kW Open NEMA 2 10 kHz None Type 1 IP20 460V 7 5HP Open NEMA 2 10 kHz None Type 1 IP20 400V 11kW Open NEMA 2 6 kHz 50 4 Type 1 IP20 45 40 35 30 Max Surrounding Air Temp C 25 20 40 50 60 70 of Output FLA 80 90 100 Frame cont Derating Guidelines 1 5 ND Voltage Rating Enclosure Frequency Derate 460V 15 HP Open NEMA 2 6 kHz p 91 Type 1 IP20 45 z 40 35 g 30 E 25 20 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 of Output FLA 400V 15kW Open NEMA 8 10 kHz 2 505 Type 1 IP20 3 SHE 45 E 40 z 10 kHz E 35 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 of Output FLA 460V 20 HP Open NEMA 10 kHz Q 804 Type 1 IP20 E 4g a 10 kHz 46 E 44 e T s 50 60 70 80 90 100 of Output FLA 25 HP Open NEMA 6 10 kHz o
83. Preset Speed 7 If the Speed Select input functions select Speed Ref A Sel or Speed Ref B Sel then the value of that parameter further selects a reference source There are a large number of possible selections including all 7 presets If the input functions directly select one of the preset speed parameters then the parameter contains a frequency that is to be used as the reference Digital Inputs 2 69 The terminal block bit must be set in the Reference Mask and Logic Mask parameters in order for the reference selection to be controlled from the terminal block using the Speed Select inputs functions Important Reference Control is an Exclusive Ownership function see Owners on page 2 127 This means that only one control device terminal block DPI device HIM etc at a time is allowed to select the reference source The terminal block must become direction owner before it can be used to control direction If another device is currently the reference owner as indicated by Reference Owner it will not be possible to select the reference by using the terminal block digital inputs and the Speed Select Inputs will have no effect on which reference the drive is currently using Because any combination of open closed conditions or unwired condition commands a reference source terminal block seeks ownership of reference selection as soon as any of these input functions are configured which may happen at p
84. Range Range 200 240 200 200 200 264 180 264 208 208 208 264 240 230 230 264 380 400 380 380 380 528 342 528 400 400 400 528 480 460 460 528 500 600 600 575 575 660 432 660 Frames 0 4 Only 500 690 600 575 575 660 475 759 Frames 5 6 690 690 690 759 475 759 Only Drive Full Power Range Nominal Motor Voltage to Drive Rated Voltage 10 Rated power is available across the entire Drive Full Power Range Drive Operating Range Lowest Nominal Motor Voltage 10 to Drive Rated Voltage 10 Drive Output is linearly derated when Actual Line Voltage is less than the Nominal Motor Voltage us P 5 2 5 i o o 2 amp E lt gt Derated Power Range 2 i Full Power Range gt 2 Drive Operating Range Nominal Motor Voltage 10 i Drive Rated Voltage Nominal Motor Voltage gt Drive Rated Voltage 10 Actual Line Voltage Drive Input Example Calculate the maximum power of a 5 HP 460V motor connected to a 480V rated drive supplied with 342V Actual Line Voltage input e Actual Line Voltage Nominal Motor Voltage 74 3 e 74 3 x 5 HP 3 7 HP e 74 3 x 60 Hz 44 6 Hz At 342V Actual Line Voltage the maximum power the 5 HP 460V motor can produce is 3 7 HP at 44 6 Hz eo I e T E I I HP Motor Drive Output 480V gt 342V gt i 460V gt 528V gt i Actual Line Voltage Drive Input Watts Loss Watts Loss
85. Ref B Sel in firmware version 3 001 and later for the PowerFlex 700 Vector Control drive e Scale Block Output available as a selection e Torque Setpoint 2 is new and available as a selection 427 Torque Ref A Sel Default 1 Torque Setpt 053 431 Torque Ref B Sel 1 Disabled 9 Selects the source of the external torque Options 0 Torque Setpt reference to the drive How this reference Torque Stpt1 2 is used is dependent upon Speed 1 Analog In 1 Torque Mod 2 Analog In 2 t 3 17 Reserved See User Manual for DPI port 1822 DPI Port 1 5 locations 23 Reserved 2 Vector firmware 3 001 and later 24 Disabled 2528 Scale Block1 4 2 29 Torque Stpt2 2 438 Torque Setpoint2 Default 0 096 Provides an internal fixed value for Min Max 800 0 Torque Setpoint when Torque Ref Sel is Units 0 1 set to Torque Setpt 2 See Faults on page 2 93 and Advanced Tuning on page 2 2 2 210 Unbalanced or Ungrounded Distribution Systems Unbalanced or Ungrounded Distribution Systems User Sets Refer to Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INOOI for detailed information on Unbalanced or Ungrounded Distribution Systems After a drive has been configured for a given application the user can store a copy of all of the parameter settings in a specific EEPROM area known as a Use
86. Sleep Wake Torque Ref A Torque Ref 8 0L c sindu Bojeuy Analog 1 Voltage Analog 1 Current Analog 2 Unipolar Analog 2 Bipolar Analog 2 Current Parameter Processing ees ie Selection Control Anlg In Config Anlg In 1 Loss i Anlg In Sqr Root 0 10v Unipolar Loss Limit l Cal 1 i F Detect 0 10V ADC neat 1 0 20mA Current Ss Loss Limit Cal 1 Detect 4 20mA Ll Square Analog In1 Value Note If either of these parameters is 0 input will go into bipolar mode otherwise unipolar peta etek r 4 Analog In 2 Lo eg DOTE 535 Anlg In Conf I Anlg In 2 Loss Anlg In Sqr Root nlg In Config Analog In 2 Hi g nlg In Sqr Roo EEE EE UO RUM nen j 1 040v Unipolar Loss Limit i Cal2 i Detect 0 10V i voltage 10v 10v Bipolar Limit ADC H orage 1 gt p gt 10V to gt i I Cal 2 1 i i i I i 10V i I current 0 20mA Current Loss Limit i i Cal 2 Detect 4 20mA LL m L gt Analog In2 Value Cal Anal
87. Spec Control 8 Speed Control Enter value for No Yes enter Enter value for Enter value for Preset Speed 7 Enter 1 Speed Ref A Lo Speed Ref A Lo 35 0 Hz P do Hz 00 Hz XXX X lt yyy y XX yy X X lt y y Go to Go to 5 1 z nn 592 Start Up A 5 Speed Control Note Verify high low E I speeds with I For V Hz mode the MOP option in 5 1 is NOT displayed screens 5 14 high low analog thru 5 17 and 5 18 thru 5 31 are also NOT displayed signals 2 196 Start Up Figure 2 40 PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Option Startup 6 B Flux Vector Start Up Strt Stop l O 50 Start Up 6 Strt Stop l O This section defines 1 0 l B Basic mode functions Start Up B Dig p gt including Start 6 Strt Stop l O Outputs So and Stop Complete these Enter P Steps in order Backup lt A Dig Inputs gt B Dig Outputs C Analog y gt Start Up Abuin C Analog Outputs F Output E E d Dig Inputs la I nter choice for G E D Done D Done P dl Digital Int Sel Digital In 1 I Start Up 6 21 A Dig Inputs 6 19 Start Up Start Up Digital Input A Dig Inputs OE NEM A Dig Inputs Config options Select a Digital Digital In 2 Enter choice for Easy Configure Custom Configure Input Digital In2 Sel Custom Configure lt p 1 Digital In 1 gt be 7 More info a i Digtalln3 a
88. Start Up B 5 78 Hz XXX XX lt gt yyy yy 5 0 Figure 2 40 PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Option Startup 5 Start Up 2 195 Start U 5 Speed Control Start Up 5 34 Flux Vector Start Up Speed Torque Control This section C Anlg Inputs selects the Yes Enter choice for Torque Go to 6 49 5 13 speed torque Reference control source lt Speed gt Start Up 5 1 No Torque 5 Speed Control Note p A Enter choice for Only Analog and Local HIM Input Signal are displayed in 5 1 for Basic Start Up Analog Input Analog Input 1 mode 5 Speed Control A S Analog Input 2 Choose source 6 haan of Reference MOP Set Set 90to Set 90 to omm Adapter 1 Analog Input Analog Input 1 Analog Input 2 y write to 90 Ref A 2 Preset Speed 1 eta Se 5 18 K 5 25 5 2 Sel selection 3 Digital Inputs io 9 U 4 Comm Adapter Local HIM Port 1 Start Up Start Up Start Up 5 Local HIM Set param 90 5 Speed Control 5 Speed Control Comm Adapter 6 Remote HIM Ref A Sel to 18 Enter choice for Enter Choice for Make a selection 7 MOP 5 14 Signa ype Sina ype lt Port 5 internal gt Cia a Port 2 common Go to 0 1 6 Strt Start U Port 3 external Stop 1 0 5 8 ed Control i Port 4 external Sp
89. Torque FOC Frequency V Hz Trq Absolute Enter value for 1 7 Regulate 1 y 1 17 Break Voltage Set 88 y 10 0 Hz Start Up to 2 Start Up 1 25 Start Up XX yy Torque FOC Torque FOC Frequency V Hz a Control selected Control selected Start Up Control selected i 1 22 is Torque FOC is Torque FOC Speed SVC is Freq Fan Pump Max Torque Speed Sum Torque Speed Control selected no Slip Comp Start Up 1 8 is Speed SVC Frequency V Hz with Slip Comp Enter value for Start Up Break Frequency Torque FOC 10 0 Hz Control selected XXXXX lt Y is Torque FOC SIV Torque Regulate 1 18 Y il 1 23 Start Up Start Up Frequency V Hz Frequency V Hz Control selected Enter value for is Freq V Hz Max Voltage Start Up 10 0V Speed SVC Y XX yy Enter value for Max Voltage y 1 24 10 0V Go to NG Start Up XX yy Frequency V Hz Startu Control selected art Jp T is Freg Custom Spa Sve EN Usa Speed SVC Enter choice of for applications Speed Units requiring speed TH Y regulation li C Go to 0 1 2 Motr Dat Ramp Stop Modes Stop Modes 2 201 Stop Mode A B DC Brake Lvl Sel DC Brake Level DC Brake Time 1 Coast to Stop When in Coast to Stop the drive acknowledges the Stop command by shutting off the output transistors and releasing control of the motor The load motor will coast or free spin until the mechanical energy is dissipated Output Voltage Output Current Motor Speed gt Time S Coast Time is load depende
90. Value Action on Signal Loss Disabled default Fault Hold input continue to use last frequency command Set Input Hi use Minimum Speed as frequency command Set Input Lo use Maximum Speed as frequency command use Preset 1 as frequency command Hold Out Freq maintain last output frequency ola Bc pm o If the input is in current mode 4 mA is the normal minimum usable input value Any value below 3 2 mA will be interpreted by the drive as a signal loss and a value of 3 8 mA will be required on the input in order for the signal loss condition to end 4mA 3 8 mA 3 2 mA Signal Loss End Signal Loss Condition Condition If the input is in unipolar voltage mode 2V is the normal minimum usable input value Any value below 1 6 volts will be interpreted by the drive as a signal loss and a value of 1 9 volts will be required on the input in order for the signal loss condition to end 2 18 Analog Inputs No signal loss detection is possible while an input is in bipolar voltage mode The signal loss condition will never occur even if signal loss detection is enabled Signal Loss End Signal Loss Condition Condition Trim An analog input can be used to trim the active speed reference Speed Reference A B If analog is chosen as a trim input two scale parameters are provide to scale the trim reference The trim is a value which is summed with the current sp
91. alarm is cleared If the drive is still in inertia ride through operation the drive immediately accelerates at the programmed rate to the set speed If the drive is coasting and it is in a run permit state the reconnect algorithm is run to match the speed of the motor The drive then accelerates at the programmed rate to the set speed 407V 305V 480V example shown see Table 2 7 for further information Half Voltage This mode provides the maximum power ride through In a typical application 230VAC motors are used with a 480VAC drive the input voltage can then drop to half and the drive is still able to supply full power to the motor impedance must be provided to limit inrush current when the power line recovers The input impedance should be equal or greater than the equivalent of a 5 transformer with a VA rating 6 times the drive s input VA rating ATTENTION To guard against drive damage a minimum line The drive determines a power loss has occurred if the bus voltage drops below Vtrigger If the drive is running the inverter output is disabled and the motor coasts If the bus voltage drops below Vopen V min In this mode of operation Vopen and Vmin are the same value or if the Enable input is de energized the inverter output is disabled and the motor coasts If the Not Stop or Run inputs are de energized the drive stops in the programmed manner Pow
92. and no fault will be generated 2 74 Digital Inputs This input is not used for a fast output power removal The drive will not stop running until the software detects the open state of this input function If multiple Enable inputs are configured then the drive will not run if any of the inputs are open Exclusive Link This input function is used to activate the state of the input to control one of the drive s digital outputs See Digital Outputs If an Input is so configured no function exists for the input until complementary Digital Output programming is done If no outputs are programmed linked the input has no function This choice is made when the user wishes to link the input to the output but desires that no other functionality be assigned to the input The state of any digital input can be passed through to a digital output by setting the value of a digital output configuration parameter Digital Outx Sel to Input n Link The output will then be controlled by the state of the input even if the input is being used for a second function If the input is configured as Not used input function the link to the input is considered non functional Power Loss Level PowerFlex 700 only When the DC bus level in the drive falls below a certain level a power loss condition is created in the drive logic This input allows the user to select between two different power loss detection levels d
93. and will not be less than flux current When drive temperature reaches the level where current limit would be clamped the Drv OL Lvl 2 Alarm is turned on This alarm will be annunciated even if reduced current limit is not enabled The active current limit is used during normal operation and during DC injection braking Any level of current requested for DC injection braking is limited by the Active Current Limit Configuration The Drive OL Mode allows the user to select the action s to perform with increased current or drive temperature When this parameter is Disabled the drive will not modify the PWM frequency or current limit When set to Reduce PWM the drive will only modify the PWM frequency Reduce CLim will only modify the current limit Setting this parameter to Both PWM 1st the drive will modify the PWM frequency and the current limit DTO Fault For all possible settings of Drive OL Mode the drive will always monitor the Tj and Tprive and generate a fault when either temperature becomes critical If Tprive is less than 20 C a fault is generated With these provisions a DTO fault is generated if the NTC ever malfunctions Temperature Display The Drive s temperature is measured NTC in the IGBT module and displayed as a percentage of drive thermal capacity in Drive Temp This parameter is normalized to the thermal capacity of the drive frame dependent and displays thermal usage in of max
94. applications mechanical hardware can be damaged if the motor is allowed to develop excess torque If a mechanical jam should occur shutting down the system may be the only way to prevent damage For example a chain conveyor may be able to hook itself causing a jam on the conveyor Excess torque from the motor could cause chain or other mechanical damage Np dl ly Y 7 7 V V7 v7 V v7 o e e e e e e e By programming the Shear Pin feature the user can cause the drive to fault stopping the excess torque before mechanical damage occurs Skip Frequency Skip Frequency 2 161 Figure 2 30 Skip Frequency Frequency Command F Frequency Drive Output AL requency Skip 1 2 Band L f 2 V LA Skip Frequency gt Time Some machinery may have a resonant operating frequency that must be avoided to minimize the risk of equipment damage To assure that the motor cannot continuously operate at one or more of the points skip frequencies are used Parameters 084 086 Skip Frequency 1 3 are available to set the frequencies to be avoided The value programmed into the skip frequency parameters sets the center point for an entire skip band of frequencies The width of the band range of frequency around the center point is determined by parameter 87 Skip Freq Band The range is split half above and half below the skip frequency parameter If the commanded frequency of the drive is grea
95. are applied to the reference These limits apply to the positive and negative references The minimum speed limits will create a band that the drive will not run continuously within but will ramp through This is due to the positive and negative minimum speeds If the reference is positive and less than the positive minimum it is set to the positive minimum If the reference is negative and greater than negative minimum it is set to the negative minimum If the minimum is not 0 hysteresis is applied at 0 to prevent bouncing between positive and negative minimums See below Max Spd Max Spd Min Spd MinSpd Fa t Band Min Spd Max Spd Max Spd Maximum frequency The maximum frequency defines the maximum reference frequency The actual output frequency may be greater as a result of slip compensation and other types of regulation This parameter also defines scaling for frequency reference This is the frequency that corresponds to 32767 counts when the frequency reference is provided by a network 2 176 Speed Regulator Speed Regulator The drive takes the speed reference that is specified by the speed reference control loop and compares it to the speed feedback The speed regulator uses proportional and integral gains to adjust the torque reference that is sent to the motor This torque reference attempts to operate the motor at the specified speed This regulator also produces a high bandwidth
96. are maximum Maximum allowable rating by US NEC Exact size must be chosen for each installation 6 Motor Circuit Protector instantaneous trip circuit breaker For US NEC minimum size is 125 of motor FLA Ratings shown are maximum Bulletin 140M with adjustable current range should have the current trip set to the minimum range that the device will not trip Manual Self Protected Type E Combination Motor Controller UL listed for 208 Wye or Delta 240 Wye or Delta 480Y 277 or 600Y 347 Not UL listed for use on 480V or 600V Delta Delta systems 9 The AIC ratings of the Bulletin 140M Motor Protector may vary See publication 140M SG001B EN P Fuses and Circuit Breakers 2 103 Table 2 P PF700 208 Volt AC Input Protection Devices Motor Dual Circuit Circuit Drive o HP PWM Input Element Time Non Time Breaker Protector 140M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Catalog amp Rating Freq Temp Ratings Output Amps Delay Fuse Delay Fuse 3 4 Range 5 6 Number ND HD kHz C Amps kVA Cont 1 Min 3 Sec Min Max Min Max 2 Max Max 8 Available Catalog Numbers 140 7 208 Volt AC Input 20BB2P2 0 0 5 0 33 4 50 1 9 OT 25 2 8 3 8 3 6 3 10 15 3 M C2E B25 M D8E B25 20BB4P2 0 1 0 75 4 50 3 7 13 4
97. as slip compensation PI Loop bus regulator The actual output may be different than the commanded frequency This parameter displays the output kW of the drive The output power is a calculated value and tends to be inaccurate at lower speeds It is not recommended for use as a process variable to control a process Output Voltage This parameter displays the actual output voltage at the drive output terminals The actual output voltage may be different than that determined by the sensorless vector or V Hz algorithms because it may be modified by features such as the Auto Economizer 2 126 Overspeed Limit Overs peed Limit The Overspeed Limit is a user programmable value that allows operation at maximum speed but also provides an overspeed band that will allow a speed regulator such as encoder feedback or slip compensation to increase the output frequency above maximum Speed in order to maintain maximum Motor Speed Figure 2 27 illustrates a typical Custom V Hz profile Minimum Speed determines the lower speed reference limit during normal operation Maximum Speed determines the upper speed reference limit The two Speed parameters only limit the speed reference and not the output frequency The actual output at maximum speed reference is the sum of the speed reference plus speed adder components from functions such as slip compensation encoder feedback or process trim The Overspeed Limit is added to Maximum Spee
98. assumes that the entered value for the limit Dig Outx Level is degrees C No units will be reported to LCD HIM users offline tools devices communicating over a network PLC s etc The online and offline limits for the digital output threshold parameters will be the minimum and maximum threshold value required for any output condition If the user changes the currently selected output condition for a digital output then the implied units of the corresponding threshold parameter will change with it although the value of the parameter itself will not For example if the output is set for At Current and the threshold for 100 drive current over 10046 will activate the relay If the user changes the output to At Temp the relay will deactivate even if current gt 100 because the drive is cooler than 100 degrees C The following values can be annunciated Value Description At Freq The drive output frequency equals or exceeds the programmed Limit At Current The drive total output current exceeds the programmed Limit At Torque The drive output torque current component exceeds the programmed Limit At Temp The drive operating temperature exceeds the programmed Limit At Bus Volts The drive bus voltage exceeds the programmed Limit At PI Error The drive Process PI Loop error exceeds the programmed Limit The relay changes state because a Digital Input link has been established and the Input is closed Digita
99. auto reset run feature provides 2 status bits in Drive Status 2 an active status and a countdown status 210 Drive Status 2 Read Only 209 Present operating condition of the drive n gt E AT M TA Re VE S R Q 9 IS sE SSESEESSS SOM E E AAA AT ASESORES gt E ASQ GYRUS SS QJ G7 S N QS a x x oj0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 inm pi 14 18 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 8 2 1 0 y Reserved Bit Vector firmware 3 001 amp later The typical steps performed in an Auto Reset Run cycle are as follows 1 The drive is running and an auto resettable fault occurs tripping the drive 2 After the number of seconds in Auto Rstrt Delay the drive will automatically perform an internal Fault Reset resetting the faulted condition 2 30 Auto Restart Reset Run 3 The drive will then issue an internal Start command to start the drive 4 If another auto resettable fault occurs the cycle will repeat itself up to the number of attempts set in Auto Rstrt Tries 5 If the drive faults repeatedly for more than the number of attempts set in Auto Rstrt Tries with less than five minutes between each fault the auto reset run is considered unsuccessful and the drive remains in the faulted state 6 Aborting an Auto Reset Run Cycle see Aborting an Auto Reset Run Cycle for details 7 If the drive remains running for five minutes or more since the last reset
100. before installing the drive 3 Grounding as described on page 2 107 4 Output power control I O and signal wiring must be braided shielded cable with a coverage of 75 or better metal conduit or equivalent attenuation 5 All shielded cables should terminate with the proper shielded connector 6 Conditions in the appropriate table 2 E 2 F or 2 G 2 54 CE Conformity Table 2 E PowerFlex 70 EN61800 3 EMC Compatibility Second Environment Restrict Motor Cable Internal External Input Drive Description to 40 m 131 ft Filter Option Filter 1 Ferrite 2 Drive Only v Drive with any Comm Option v Drive with ControlNet B Drive Only Drive with any Comm Option Drive with ControlNet C Drive Only Drive with any Comm Option Drive with ControlNet D Drive Only Drive with any Comm Option Drive with ControlNet E Drive Only Drive with any Comm Option Drive with ControlNet gt Frame SSISISS SIS K KIKKI KIK SIS Table 2 F PowerFlex 70 EN61800 3 First Environment Restricted Distribution P First Environment Restricted Distribution E Restrict Motor Internal External Comm Cable Common Drive Description Cable to Filter Option Filter 1 Ferrite 2 Mode Core 9 A Drive Only 40 m 131 ft i v z Drive with any Comm Option 40 m 131 ft v i Drive with ControlNet 40 m 13
101. communicate with PowerFlex 70 amp 700 drives at the same time This communication interface is the primary way to interact with and control the drive Important The PowerFlex 700 Vector Control option only supports the DPI communication protocol It will not communicate with SCANport peripheral devices Client Server Client Server messages operate in the background relative to other message types and are used for non control purposes The Client Server messages are based on a 10ms ping event that allows peripherals to perform a single transaction i e one C S transaction per peripheral per time period Message fragmentation because the message transaction is larger than the standard CAN message of eight data bytes is automatically handled by Client Server operation The following types of messaging are covered e Logging in peripheral devices e Read Write of parameter values e Access to all parameter information limits scaling default etc e User set access e Fault Alarm queue access e Event notification fault alarm etc e Access to all drive classes objects e g Device Peripheral Parameter etc Producer Consumer operation overview Producer Consumer messages operate at a higher priority than Client Server messages and are used to control report the operation of the drive e g start stop etc A P C status message is transmitted every 5ms by the drive and a command message is received from every c
102. current to Units 1 anticipate a current limit condition A larger value reduces overshoot of the current relative to the current limit value 502 Bus Reg ACR Kp Default 450 This proportional gain in conjunction with Min Max 0 10000 P160 adjusts the output frequency of the Units 1 drive during a bus limit or inertia ride through condition The output frequency is adjusted in response to an error in the active or torque producing current to maintain the active bus limit or inertia ride through bus reference A larger value of gain reduces the dynamic error of the active current 503 Jerk Default 900 This parameter allows you to adjust the Min Max 2 30000 amount of S Curve or Jerk applied to the Units 1 Acc Dec rate To enable the Jerk feature bit 1 of P56 must be set high 504 Kp Ln Ls Bus Reg Default 500 This proportional gain adjusts the active Min Max 0 10000 current command during an inertia ride Units 1 through condition in response to a bus error A larger value of gain reduces the dynamic error of the bus voltage as compared to the bus voltage reference 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 523 524 536 537 Parameter Name amp Description Kd Ln Ls Bus Reg Line Loss Bus Reg Kd is a derivative gain which is applied to the sensed bus voltage to anticipate dynamic changes and minimize them A larger value reduces overshoot of the bus voltage
103. e PI Reference Sel 0 PI Setpoint e PI Setpoint 0 e PI Feedback Sel 2 Analog In 2 e PI Reference Hi 100 e PI Reference Lo 100 e PI Feedback Hi 100 e PI Feedback Lo 100 46 e Analog In 2 Hi 10V e Analog In 2 Lo 0V PI Feedback Scaling Torque Ref A Sel Analog In 1 Analog In 2 Hi PI Feedback Hi 10V 100 Analog In 1 Lo PI Feedback Lo ov 100 Now 5V corresponds to 0 on the PI Feedback so we will try to maintain a PI setpoint of 0 SV Now PI Ref Meter and PI Fdback Meter are displayed as bipolar values PI Setpoint This parameter can be used as an internal value for the setpoint or reference for the process If PI Reference Sel points to this Parameter the value entered here will become the equilibrium point for the process PI Output The PI Error is then sent to the Proportional and Integral functions which are summed together PI Gains The PI Proportional Gain and the PI Integral Gain parameters determine the response of the PI The PI Proportional Gain is unitless and defaults to 1 00 for unit gain With PI Proportional Gain set to 1 00 and PI Error at 1 00 the PI output will be 1 00 of maximum frequency The PI Integral Gain is entered in seconds If the PI Integral Gain is set to 2 0 seconds and PI Error is 100 00 the PI output will integrate from 0 to 100 00 in 2 0 seconds 2 148 Process Pl Loop
104. following _ 60 Hz SpeedRef 430 Hz X 32767 15123 The following example illustrates how a change in P55 Maximum Freq in the PowerFlex 70 or 700 affects the speed reference scaling Overspeed Limit 10 Hz this is factory default Maximum Speed 60 Hz this is factory default Maximum Freq Maximum Speed Overspeed Limit 60 Hz 10 Hz 70 Hz Using the above formula calculate the Speed Reference sent from a network using a DPI adapter Speed Reference 2 173 For example to send out a command frequency of 60 Hz with Maximum Freq 70 Hz we would calculate the following SpeedRef a x 32767 28086 Jog When the drive is not running pressing the HIM Jog button or a programmed Jog digital input will cause the drive to jog at a separately programmed jog reference This speed reference value is entered in Jog Speed parameter 100 Figure 2 34 Speed Reference Selection Default Digital Inx Select Pl Exclusive Mode Trim Speed Sel 3 2 1 Pl Configuration Pure Reference Auto Speed Ref Options yyy Bio ExdMode 0 Drive Ref Rit I po follower drive for Speed Ref A Sel Parameter 090 0 0 0 Frequency Reference Speed Ref B Sel Parameter 093 0 0 1 ine lod Functions Preset Speed 2 Parameter102
105. less than 50 of the motor flux current as programmed in Flux Current Ref parameter 63 During acceleration and deceleration the economizer is inactive and sensorless vector motor control performs normally Maximum Voltage Motor Nameplate Voltage 2 Increasing Load Rated Flux Current Vtotal Reduced Flux Current minimum of 50 of Rated Flux Current I Ir Voltage i 0 0 Frequency Motor Nameplate Maximum Frequency Frequency The following chart shows typical efficiency for PWM variable frequency drives regardless of size Drives are most efficient at full load and full speed 1 us vs Speed vs Load co al Efficiency 80 75 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Speed Load 2 92 Fan Curve Fan Curve When torque performance see page 2 205 is set to Fan Pump the relationship between frequency and voltage is shown in the following figure The fan pump curve generates voltage that is a function of the stator frequency squared up to the motor nameplate frequency Above base frequency voltage is a linear function of frequency At low speed the fan curve can be offset by the run boost parameter to provide extra starting torque if needed No extra parameters are needed for fan pump curve The pattern matches the speed vs load characteristics of a centrifugal fan or pump and optimizes the drive output to those characteristics
106. mA Alarms 2 7 The signal is designated as the active speed reference by setting Speed Ref A Sel to its factory default value of 1 090 Speed Ref A Sel Default 2 Analog In 2 002 9 Selects the source of the speed Options 1 Analog In 1 d reference to the drive unless Speed Ref 2 Analog In 2 ru B Sel or Preset Speed 1 7 is selected 3 6 Reserved ee 7 Pulse In 1 See User Manual for DPI port 8 Encoder 107 2 locations 9 MOP Level 117 8 10 Reserved thru o 11 Preset Spd1 120 12 Preset Spd2 192 13 Preset Spd3 a 14 Preset Spd4 194 e 15 Preset Spd5 213 16 Preset Spd6 272 17 Preset Spd7 18 DPIPort 1 273 19 DPIPort2 t 520 20 DPI Port 3 0 21 DPIPorta fu 22 DPI Port 50 968 By setting Speed Ref A Hi to 60 Hz and Speed ref A Lo to 0 Hz the speed reference is scaled to the application needs Because of the Input scaling and link to the speed reference 4 mA represents minimum frequency 0 Hz and 20 mA represents Maximum Frequency 60 Hz Scale Block The input is configured to recognize a loss of signal and react accordingly to the programming 324 Analog In 1 Loss Default 0 Disabled 091 327 Analog In 2 Loss 0 Disabled 092 Selects drive action when an analog Options 0 Disabled signal loss is detected Signal loss is 1 Fault defined as an analog s
107. may be used for integrator preloading during transfer and can be used to hold the integrator at zero during manual mode Take the example of a process whose feedback signal is below the reference point creating error The drive will increase its output frequency in an attempt to bring the process into control If however the increase in drive output does not zero the error additional increases in output will be commanded When the drive reaches programmed Maximum Frequency it is possible that a significant amount of integral value has been built up windup This may cause undesirable and sudden operation if the system were switched to manual operation and back Resetting the integrator eliminates this windup 2 146 X Process PI Loop NOTE In the PowerFlex 70 once the drive has reached the programmable positive and negative PI limits the integrator stops integrating and no further windup is possible 3 PI Status parameter is a set of bits that indicate the status of the process PI controller e Enabled The loop is active and controlling the drive output e Hold A signal has been issued and the integrator is being held at its current value e Reset A signal has been issued and the integrator is being held at Zero e In Limit The loop output is being clamped at the value set in PI Upper Lower Limit PI Reference and Feedback The selection of the source for the reference signal is
108. momentary contact Instead 3 wire control Stop Fai devices such as pushbuttons are requires a Stop input to Stop SS used the drive un U Direction control is Start accomplished either with um E momentary inputs i Stop 89888 Forward nn o o EN Reverse Or with a maintained input Start oO CO Stop lg Powerflex Forward Reverse H 2 110 Input Power Conditioning Input Power Conditioning Jog Refer to Chapter 2 of Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES IN001A EN P Also refer to Jog on page 2 67 When a JOG command is issued by any of the controlling devices terminal block digital input communications adapter or HIM the drive ouputs voltage and frequency to the motor as long as the command is present When the command is released the drive output stops Whenever a jog command is present the value programmed in parameter 100 Jog Speed becomes the active speed reference Regardless of the Speed Mode or Feedback Select setting no modifications i e no PI adder no slip adder no trim adder etc will be made to the reference For PowerFlex 70 and PowerFlex 700 with Standard Control the jog reference will always be a positive number limited between Minimum Speed and Maximum Speed If Direction Mode Unipolar the drive will jog using the Jog reference parameter value and will use the direction currently selected via the DPI co
109. motor torque PI Config Figure 2 28 Process PI Block Diagram Process Pl Loop ZeroClamp PI Config Exclusive latus P Enabled Spd Ref PI Pos Limit Linear Ramp amp S Curve Y Spd Ramp 2 149 PI Neg Limit PI Kp PI ExcessErr PI Ref Sel bC PI Ref DE Y Spd Cmd Linear Ramp po PlCmd PI Status Enabled gt T gt PI Output vv k POP X 5 PI Config RampCmd z o ma P Fbk Sel f gt PIFbk Y brt PI Config Sart PI Config Invert PIKi atus ld Preload Value A Spd Cmd Spd Cmd PI Config PI Config PreloadCmd Exclusive Current Limit or Volt Limit 2 150 Process Pl Loop Figure 2 29 Vector Control Option Process PI Loop Overview
110. must be set in the MOP Mask and Logic Mask parameters in order for the MOP to be controlled from the terminal block In order for the drive to use the MOP value as the current speed reference either Speed Ref A Sel or Speed Ref B Sel must be set to MOP Stop Mode B This digital input function selects between two different drive stop modes See also Stop Modes on page 2 201 If the input is open then Stop Mode A selects which stop mode to use If the input is closed then Stop Mode B selects which stop mode to use If this input function is not configured then Stop Mode A always selects which stop mode to use Bus Regulation Mode B This digital input function selects how the drive will regulate excess voltage on the DC bus See also Bus Regulation If the input is open then Bus Reg Mode A selects which bus regulation mode to use If the input is closed then Bus Reg Mode B selects which bus regulation mode to use If this input function is not configured then Bus Reg Mode A always selects which bus regulation mode to use PI Enable If this input function is closed the operation of the Process PI loop will be enabled If this input function is open the operation of the Process PI loop will be disabled See Process PI Loop on page 2 137 PI Hold If this input function is closed the integrator for the Process PI loop will be held at the current value which is to say that it will not increase I
111. no special parameters or settings F T 1 E t 1 500 Inverter V div 1670 Vpk 500 Motor V div Time sec The above figure shows the inverter line to line output voltage top trace and the motor line to line voltage bottom trace for a 10 HP 460V AC inverter and an unloaded 10 HP AC induction motor at 60 Hz operation 500 ft of 12 AWG cable connects the drive to the motor Reflected Wave 2 153 Initially the cable is in a fully charged condition A transient disturbance occurs by discharging the cable for approximately 4ms The propagation delay between the inverter terminals and motor terminals is approximately lms The small time between pulses of 4ms does not provide sufficient time to allow the decay of the cable transient Thus the second pulse arrives at a point in the motor terminal voltage s natural response and excites a motor over voltage transient greater than 2 pu The amplitude of the double pulsed motor over voltage is determined by a number of variables These include the damping characteristics of the cable bus voltage and the time between pulses the carrier frequency modulation technique and duty cycle The plot below shows the per unit motor overvoltage as a function of cable length This is for no correction versus the modulation correction code for varied lengths of 12 AWG cable to 600 feet for 4 and 8 kHz carrier frequencies The outp
112. on page 2 121 Circuit Breakers Fuses See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 2 100 Filters EMC Refer to CE Conformity on page 2 53 Input Modes Input Modes 2 109 The PowerFlex family of drives does not use a direct choice of 2 wire or 3 wire input modes but allows full configuration of the digital I O As a means of defining the modes used consider the following 2 Wire Control A maintained contact device This input mode is so named such as a thermostat for because it only utilizes one example closes its contact to Run Stop device and 2 wires to control both Run the drive and opens to T the Start normally referred to as Stop the drive RUN in 2 wire and Stop Poner functions in an application In other applications the maintained device such as a limit switch can directly control both Run Stop and pina direction control Y Run Reverse pour CORRE Or a combination of the two may be desirable Run II Forward Reverse Powerflex H 3 Wire Control A Start is issued when the This input mode utilizes 2 devices Start button is closed but Sah requiring 3 wires to control the unlike 2 wire circuits the 33388 Start proper term for 3 wire and drive does not Stop when the o o Stop functions in an application Start button is released PE In this case
113. power board along with other information to define the operation of the drive thermal overload function These values are not user adjustable In addition to the maximum junction temperature there are thresholds that select the point at which the PWM frequency begins to fold back and the point at which current limit begins to fold back As Ty increases the thermal manager may reduce the PWM frequency If Tj continues to rise current limit may be reduced and if Ty continues to rise the drive generates a fault The calculation of the reduced PWM frequency and current limit is implemented with an integral control PWM Frequency PWM Frequency as selected by the user can be reduced by the thermal manager The resulting Active PWM Frequency may be displayed in a test point parameter The active PWM frequency will change in steps of 2 kHz It will always be less than or equal to the value selected by the user and will not be less than the drives minimum PWM frequency When drive temperature reaches the level where PWM frequency would be limited the Drv OL Lvl 1 Alarm is turned on This alarm will be annunciated even if the reduced PWM frequency is not enabled Drive Overload 2 89 Current Limit Current Limit as selected by the user can be reduced by the thermal manager The resulting active current limit may be displayed as a test point parameter The active current limit will always be less than or equal to the value selected by the user
114. relative to the inertia ride through bus voltage reference Angl Stblty Gain Angle Stability Gain adjusts the electrical angle to maintain stable motor operation An increase in the value increases the angle adjustment Volt Stblty Gain Adjusts the output voltage to maintain stable motor operation An increase in the value increases the output voltage adjustment Stability Filter The Stability Filter coefficient is used to adjust the bandwidth of a low pass filter The smaller the value of this coefficient the lower the bandwidth of the filter Lo Freq Reg Kpld This proportional gain adjusts the output voltage at very low frequency in response to the reactive or d axis motor current A larger value increases the output voltage change Lo Freq Reg Kplq The proportional gain adjusts the output voltage at very low frequency in response to the active or q axis motor current A larger value increases the output voltage change Ki Cur Reg This integral gain adjusts the output voltage in response to the q and d axis motor currents A larger value increases the output voltage change Kp Cur Reg This proportional gain adjusts the output voltage in response to the q and d axis motor currents A larger value increases the output voltage change Bus Utilization This value sets the drive output voltage limit as a percentage of the fundamental output voltage when operating in 6 step mode Values ab
115. response to speed command and load changes Integral Gain The integral gain block outputs a torque command relative to the error integrated over a period of time Ki Speed Loop sets the integral gain of the speed regulator Its value is automatically calculated based on the bandwidth setting in Speed Desired BW Integral gain may be manually adjusted by setting Speed Desired BW to a value of zero Units are per unit torque sec per unit speed For example when Ki Speed Loop is 50 and the speed error is 1 the integral output will integrate from 0 to 50 motor rated torque in 1 second Proportional Gain The proportional gain determines how much of a speed error occurs during a load transient Kp Speed Loop sets the proportional gain of the speed regulator Its value is automatically calculated based on the bandwidth setting in Speed Desired BW Proportional gain may be manually adjusted by setting Speed Desired BW to a value of zero Units are per unit torque per unit speed For example when Kp Speed Loop is 20 the proportional gain block will output 20 motor rated torque for every 1 error of motor rated speed Feed Forward Gain The first section of the PI regulator is the feed forward block Kf Speed Loop allows the speed regulator to be dampened during speed changes To reduce speed overshoot reduce the value of Kf Speed Loop During auto tune the feed forward is left open no dampening Spee
116. stopped Example A customer s process is normally controlled by a remote PLC but the drive is mounted on the machine The customer does not want anyone to walk up to the drive and reverse the motor because it would damage the process The local HIM drive mounted Adapter 1 is configured with an operator s panel that includes a REV Button To assure that only the PLC connected to Adapter 2 has direction control the Direction Mask can be set as follows MOP MOP 2 115 Direction Mask o M o gt pp o o o 0 0 0 1 0 X 5 3 2 1 This masks out the reverse function from all adapters except Adapter 2 making the local HIM Adapter 1 REV button inoperable Also see Owners on page 2 127 Adapter The Motor Operated Pot MOP function is one of the sources for the frequency reference The MOP function uses digital inputs to increment or decrement the Speed reference at a programmed rate The MOP has three components e MOP Rate parameter e Save MOP Ref parameter e MOP Frequency parameter MOP increment input MOP decrement input The MOP reference rate is defined in MOP rate The MOP function is defined graphically below MOP dec MOP inc MOP reference MOP rate is defined in Hz sec The MOP reference will increase decrease linearly at that rate as long as the MOP inc or dec is asserted via TB or DPI port the MOP inputs are trea
117. this hardware power loss input will provide a power loss signal before the bus drops to less than Vopen The drive determines a power loss has occurred if the pulse input is de energized OR the bus voltage drops below Vopen If the drive is running the inverter output is disabled The Power Loss alarm in Drive Alarm 1 is set and the power loss timer starts 2 136 Power Loss The Alarm bit in Drive Status 1 is set if the Power Loss bit in Alarm Config 1 is set The drive faults with a F003 Power Loss fault if the power loss timer exceeds Power Loss Time and the Power Loss bit in Fault Config 1 is set The drive faults with a F004 UnderVoltage fault if the bus voltage falls below Vmin and the UnderVoltage bit in Fault Config 1 is set The pre charge relay opens if the bus voltage drops below Vopen and closes if the bus voltage rises above Vclose If the pulse input is re energized and the pre charge relay is closed the drive determines the power loss is over The power loss alarm is cleared If the drive is in a run permit state the reconnect algorithm is run to match the speed of the motor The drive then accelerates at the programmed rate to the set speed Decel Input PF700 only This mode can provide additional ride through time by sensing the power loss via an external device that monitors the power line and provides a hardware power loss signal This signal is then connected to the driv
118. to 100 step input from a steady state the output of Filter A will take 500ms to get to 95 of maximum 810 ms to get to 99 and 910 ms to get to 100 PowerFlex 700 Firmware 3 001 amp later Enhancements Certain analog output enhancements have been included in firmware version 3 001 and later for the PowerFlex 700 Vector Control drive These include e Ability to scale the analog outputs e Connect scale blocks to the analog outputs e Analog Output controlled via Datalink Output Scalin A new scaling feature has been added to allow scaling Prior to this feature Analog Outx Lo and Analog Outx Hi limited only the voltage This voltage range was scaled to the selected option range listed in Analog Outx Sel With the new feature Analog Outx Lo and Analog Outx Hi still set the voltage range but the scaling parameter now scales the range of the Analog Outx Sel selection See the following example Analog Outputs 2 25 354 Anlg Out Scale Default 0 0 355 Anlg Out2 Scale Min Max Analog Outt Sel Sets the high value for the range of Units 0 01 analog out scale Entering 0 0 will disable this scale and max scale will be used Example If Analog Out Sel Commanded Trq a value of 150 150 scale in place of the default 800 Analog Outputs N 2 a gt o og wn E 2 a Example Analog Output 1 set for 0 10V DC at 0 100 Commanded Torque Setup e Analog Outl Sel par
119. value for 5 12 i Preset Analog In 1 Hi Analog In 2 Hi Preset Speed 2 S 10 0 Hz peed 1 Start Up 10 0V 10 0V XXX X lt yyy y 5 Speed Control Upon Enter write to XRX lt YYYY IS M Select a Preset i 1 5 6 Start Up Preset Speed Ve MOP Hah s 5 21 i 5 28 5 Speed Control Speed 2 lt 1 Preset Speed 1 gt Start Up Start Up Enter value for 2 Preset Speed 2 5 17 5 Speed Control 5 Speed Control Preset Speed 3 N 3 Preset Speed 3 Enter value for Enter value for ido Preset 4 Preset Speed 4 PF70 Start Up Speed Ref A Hi Speed Ref A Hi RAS WY Speed 3 Pee 5 Speed Control 60 0 Hz ves 60 0Hz XX y XX y 5 7 zn 7 Preset Speed 7 Sud oe for i yy Speed Control D Enter value for Preset 8 Done 5 0 Hz 521 o 9291 Preset Speed 4 XX Yyy Start Up Start Up 20 0 Hz 5 Speed Control 5 Speed Control XXX X lt yyy y Preset The next two The next two d5 steps scale a steps scale a 5 8 Start Up did Done law speed with iow speed with 5 Speed Control Enter a low analog a low analog Enter value for iie d value value Preset Speed 5 pee 250Hz 53i 5 23 530 AY Preset Start Up Start Up 5 9 Startu Speed 7 Start Up 5 Speed Control 5 Speed Control p 5 Speed Control Enter value for Enter value for 5 Speed Control d Configure other Analog In 1 Lo Analog In 2 Lo Enter value for Preset Speed 6 Spd References 0 0 V 0 0 V 30 0 Hz Se X XXXX lt y yyyy X XXXX lt VYYYY HKA lt YYYY 524 sa 5 10 Start Up 7 5 Speed Control 5
120. very erratic and unpredictable operation will occur Fdbk Filter Select determines the type of filter to use for the speed feedback The filter is used to filter out high frequency signals noise by reducing the gain at high frequencies The selections for the filter are Description To select this type of filter Select this value No filter Gain 0 0 db Rad Sec A light 35 49 radian Gain 1 feedback filter 0 db 6 db NN ON 35 49 Rad Sec A heavy 20 40 Gain 2 radian feedback 0 db filter ER ON 12 db 20 40 Rad Sec Speed Reference Speed Reference 2 171 Operation The output frequency of the drive is controlled in part by the speed command or speed reference given to it This reference can come from a variety of sources including e HIM local or remote e Analog Input e Preset Speed Parameter e Jog Speed Parameter e Communications Adapter e Process PI Loop e Digital Input MOP Selection Binary Logic Some references can be selected by binary logic through digital inputs to the terminal block or bit manipulation of the Logic Command Word in a communications adapter These sources are used when the drive is in Auto mode The default reference is from the source selected in Speed Ref A Sel parameter 90 This parameter can be set to any one of the 22 choices If the binary logic selection is zero this will be the active speed reference Auto Manual Many appl
121. x 2 15 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 of Output FLA Consult the factory for further derate information at other frequencies PowerFlex 70 Dimensions PowerFlex 70 Dimensions 1 7 Table 1 4 PowerFlex 70 Frames Output Power Frame Size 208 240V AC Input 400 480V AC Input 600V AC Input kW HP Not IP66 Not IP66 Not IP66 ND HD ND HD Filtered Filtered 4X 12 Filtered Filtered 4X 12 Filtered Filtered 4X 12 0 37 0 25 0 5 0 33 JA B B A B B A B 0 75 0 55 1 0 75 A B B A B B A B 15 11 2 15 B B B A B B A E B 22 15 3 9 B B B B B B B n B 4 3 5 3 C D B B B B B 554 75 l D D C D C D 7 5 5 5 10 7 5 l D D E C D C D 1107 5 15 10 l 2 D D D D 15 11 20 15 l n 2 D D D D 18 5 15 25 20 l D D 22 18 5 30 25 l D D Figure 1 1 PowerFlex 70 Frames A D 1P20 66 NEMA Type 1 4X 12 Flange Mount le gt C gt Le C gt i no o m UU Jes 10 MUI i A i RU VE HM B UNT UT Y mr O Tg T 128 0 55 6 4 84 2 19 Dimensions are in millimeter
122. zero Then when the PI is enabled the value used for the PI reference will ramp to the selected value for PI reference at the selected acceleration or deceleration rate After the PI reference reaches the selected value the ramp is bypassed until the PI is disabled and enabled again S curve is not available as part of the PI linear ramp e Zero Clamp This feature limits the possible drive action to one direction only Output from the drive will be from zero to maximum frequency forward or zero to maximum frequency reverse This removes the chance of doing a plugging type operation as an attempt to bring the error to zero The PI has the option to limit operation so that the output frequency will always have the same sign as the master speed reference The zero clamp option is selected in the PI Configuration parameter Zero clamp is disabled when PI has exclusive control of speed command For example if master speed reference is 10 Hz and the output of the PI results in a speed adder of 15 Hz zero clamp would limit the output frequency to not become less than zero Likewise if master speed reference is 10 Hz and the output of the PI results in a speed adder of 15 Hz zero clamp would limit the output frequency to not become greater than zero gt gt 0 Y 32K PE PI Config 0 lor ZeroClamp 0 Ramp Spd Ramp XS i va gt Spd Cmd amp S Curve 32
123. 0 1600 1400 1200 1000 800 600 400 200 0 1 2 8 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Decel Time Seconds Section 4 Selecting An External Resistor How to Select an External Dynamic Brake Resistor In order to select the appropriate External Dynamic Brake Resistor for your application the following data must be calculated Peak Regenerative Power Expressed in watts This value is used to determine the maximum resistance value of the Dynamic Brake Resistor If this value is greater than the maximum imposed by the peak regenerative power of the drive the drive can trip off due to transient DC bus overvoltage problems Power Rating of the Dynamic Brake Resistor The average power dissipation of the regenerative mode must be estimated and the power rating of the Dynamic Brake Resistor chosen to be greater than the average regenerative power dissipation of the drive 4 2 Selecting An External Resistor Protecting External Resistor Packages mounted brake resistors A risk of fire exists if external braking resistors are not protected External resistor packages must be self protected from over temperature or the protective circuit show below or equivalent must be supplied ATTENTION PowerFlex drives do not offer protection for externally Figure 4 1 External Brake Resistor Circuitry
124. 0 4 17 gt I 139 4 5 49 1774 6 98 gt 1 18 PowerFlex 700 Dimensions Frame Rating Dimensions in millimeters and inches 3 All lt 1053 4 15 ex EE t 22 2 0 87 Dia 947 373 Stan Dia 50 HP 28 7 1 13 Dia 480V 2 Places 87 kW 400V 1845 1651 7 28 6 50 160 1 15141 6 30 6 95 1277 5 03 227 0 89 lt gt 29 0 1 14 lt gt 66 0 2 60 lt 97 0 3 82 I 197 2 6 40 1870 7 36 50 HP lt 106 3 4 15 gt oe a Dia 480V lt 94 7 3 73 gt 487 184 Dia zu laces 37 kW 287 1 13 Di 7 1 13 Dia 400V apace 7 Normal Duty A E T 7 184 5 Drive TE 7 26 1651 m n 650 H ET 1277 6 03 Y Vent Plate n n Y 227 0 89 lt 290 1 4 lt 66 0 2 60 gt 130 0 6 12 186 0 7 32 4 All 47 0 1 88 Dia 760 2 9 t13 Dia 2 Places lt 653 257 54 1 2 13 Dia 22 2 0 87 Dia E 2 Places 1897 p 7 47 1779 7 00 157 9 621 141 9 6 59 105 1 4 14 Y 26 8 1 06 36 8 145 50 7 2 00 63 8 2 51 gt lt 1120 4 41 180 0 7 09
125. 0 100 CMN 9000 20BB104 5 40 4 50 98 40 6 104 115 175 125 225 125 400 300 150 30 4 50 73 30 5 80 120 160 100 175 100 300 300 100 CMN 9000 20BB130 5 50 4 50 122 50 7 130 143 175 175 275 175 500 375 250 40 4 50 98 40 6 104 156 175 125 225 125 400 300 150 20BB154 6 60 4 50 145 60 1 154 169 231 200 300 200 600 450 250 50 4 50 122 50 7 130 195 260 175 275 175 500 375 250 20BB192 6 75 4 50 180 74 9 192 211 288 225 400 225 600 575 250 60 4 50 145 60 1 154 231 308 200 300 200 600 450 250 See page 2 105 for Notes 2 104 Fuses and Circuit Breakers Table 2 R PF700 400 Volt AC Input Protection Devices Dual Motor Drive o KW PWM Input Element Time Non Time Circuit Circuit 140M Motor Starter with Adjustable Catalog amp Rating Freq Temp Ratings Output Amps Delay Fuse Delay Fuse Breaker 9 Protector Current Range 5 8 Number ND HD kHz C Amps kVA Cont 1 Min 3 Sec Min Max 9 Min 1 Max Max Max Available Catalog Numbers 140 7 400 Volt AC Input 20BC1P3 0 0 37 0 25 4 50 14 0 77 1 3 14 1 9 3 3 3 6 15 3 M C2E B
126. 0 82 19 240 44 8 145 209 74 195 76 17 245 41 7 150 180 60 200 70 15 250 39 7 Motor Start Stop Precautions Motor Start Stop Precautions 2 121 Input Contactor Precautions disconnects and reapplies the AC line to the drive to start and stop the motor can cause drive hardware damage The drive is designed to use control input signals that will start and stop the motor If an input device is used operation must not exceed one cycle per minute or drive damage will occur ATTENTION A contactor or other device that routinely includes solid state components If hazards due to accidental contact with moving machinery or unintentional flow of liquid gas or solids exist an additional hardwired stop circuit may be required to remove the AC line to the drive An auxiliary braking method may be required ATTENTION The drive start stop enable control circuitry Output Contactor Precaution contactors the following information must be read and understood One or more output contactors may be installed between the drive and motor s for the purpose of disconnecting or isolating certain motors loads If a contactor is opened while the drive is operating power will be removed from the respective motor but the drive will continue to produce voltage at the output terminals In addition reconnecting a motor to an active drive by closing the contactor could produce excessive current that may cause the drive to fault If any of these condit
127. 0 T40R1K8 60 1200 16400 T60R1K2 40 1200 17300 T40R1K2 60 900 13700 T60R900W 40 900 14300 T40R900W 80 800 13000 TGORGOOW 40 300 10900 T40R300W 60 520 104000 2 36 24978 1321116 550 11 AKR2120P1K2 36 16863 449907 550 11A 60 300 10300 T60R300W 36 16517 449907 555 11 48 20400 716000 T48R20K4 36 11208 316618 555 11A 48 19100 656000 TA48R19K1 35 6498 249757 552 11 48 12600 359000 T48R12K6 35 5058 157272 552 11A 48 6600 131000 T48R6K6 48 5670 131000 TASR5K67 34 26000 1591000 T34R26K0 28 4200 23800 T48R4K2 34 19000 1048000 T34R19K0 48 3600 28000 TA8R3K6 34 18000 1017000 T34R18K0 34 17000 990000 T34R17K0 48 3000 21100 T48R3KO 4S 2700 25300 Tame 34 15000 456000 T34R15KO SN SES Se 34 18000 456000 T34R13K0 4E 1200 20800 RE 34 9000 285000 T34R9KO 8 00 500 TAN 34 8000 262000 T34R8KO 48 600 16500 T48R600W S P900 SHBODO TARMO 48 300 18100 T48R300W Si P 9600 199000 Ei 34 2400 30100 T34R2K4 45 19427 563362 550 10 34 1800 25100 T34R1K8 45 19100 656000 T45R19Ki 34 900 19100 T34R00W 45 12943 409420 550 10A 34 800 14700 T34A300W 45 12846 409420 555 10 32 28000 2304000 T32R28K0 45 12600 359000 T45R12K6 se ee 32 26000 1591000 T32R26K0
128. 0 rad sec bandwidth Category Control continued Encoder PowerFlex 700 Only Input Output Ratings 1 3 Specification Torque Regulation Torque Regulation without feedback 10 600 rad sec bandwidth Torque Regulation with feedback 5 2500 rad sec bandwidth Selectable Motor Control Sensorless Vector with full tuning Standard V Hz with full custom capability PF700 adds Vector Control Stop Modes Multiple programmable stop modes including Ramp Coast DC Brake Ramp to Hold and S curve Accel Decel Two independently programmable accel and decel times Each time may be programmed from 0 3600 seconds in 0 1 second increments Intermittent Overload 110 Overload capability for up to 1 minute 150 Overload capability for up to 3 seconds Current Limit Capability Proactive Current Limit programmable from 20 to 160 of rated output current Independently programmable proportional and integral gain Electronic Motor Overload Protection Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response Investigated by U L to comply with N E C Article 430 U L File E59272 volume 12 Type Incremental dual channel Supply 12V 500 mA 12V 10 mA minimum inputs isolated with differential transmitter 250 kHz maximum Quadrature 90 27 degrees at 25 degrees C Duty Cycle 50 10 Requirements Encoders must be line driver type quadrature dual channel or pulse single c
129. 00 T48R19K1 34 15000 456000 T34R15K0 48 12600 359000 T48R12K6 34 13000 456000 T34R13K0 48 6600 181000 T48R6K6 34 9000 285000 T34R9K0 48 5670 131000 T48R5K67 34 8000 262000 T34R8K0 48 4200 23800 T48R4K2 34 4000 98600 T34R4K0 48 3600 28000 T48R3K6 34 3600 93000 T34R3K6 48 3000 21100 T48R3K0 34 2400 30100 T34R2K4 48 2700 23300 T48R2K7 34 1800 25100 T34R1K8 48 1500 16600 T48R1K5 34 900 19100 T34R900W 48 1200 20800 T48RIK2 34 300 14700 T34R300W 48 900 17900 I48H9D0W 32 28000 2304000 T32R28K0 48600 16500 T48R600W 32 26000 1591000 T32R26K0 48 300 13100 T48R300W 32 18000 1017000 T32R18K0 45 19100 656000 T45R19K1 32 17100 931000 T32R17K1 45 12600 359000 T45R12K6 32 12700 410000 T32R12K7 45 6000 125000 T45R6KO 32 8420 246000 T32R8K42 45 3600 26600 T45R3K6 32 4500 105000 T32R4K5 45 3000 19800 T45R3K0 32 4000 83300 T32R4K0 45 2700 22000 T45R2K7 32 2700 25200 T32R2K7 45 2100 28100 T45R2K1 32 2100 20200 T32R2K1 45 1500 24900 T45R1K5 32 1500 28100 T32R1K5 45 1200 19100 T45R1K2 32 900 19100 T32R900W 45 600 15800 T45R600W 32 600 17500 T32R600W 45 300 12300 T45R300W 32 300 13800 T32R300W Selecting An External Resistor 4 11 480V AC Drives Continued Watt Catalog Watt Catalog Ohms Watts Seconds Number Ohms Watts Seconds Number 29 19396 615920 440 10
130. 00 0 90 0 80 0 70 0 60 0 50 0 40 0 30 0 20 0 10 0 00 Current Level Per Normal 1 00 10 00 100 00 1 000 00 Time Seconds The lower curve in Figure 2 19 shows the boundary of heavy duty operation In heavy duty the drive is rated to produce 150 of rated current for 60 seconds 200 for three seconds and 220 for 100 milliseconds The maximum value for current limit is 200 so the limit of 220 for 100 milliseconds should never be crossed If the load on the drive exceeds the level of current as shown on the upper curve current limit may fold back to 100 of the drive rating until the 10 90 or 5 95 duty cycle has been achieved For example 60 seconds at 150 will be followed by 9 minutes at 100 and 3 seconds at 200 will be followed by 57 seconds at 100 With the threshold for where to take action slightly above the rated level the drive will only fold back when drive ratings are exceeded Again if fold back of current limit is not enabled in the Drive OL Mode the drive will generate a fault when operation exceeds the rated levels This fault can not be disabled If current limit fold back is enabled then a fault is generated when current limit is reduced Figure 2 19 Heavy Duty Boundary of Operation 2 50 2 25 2 00 1 75 1 50 1 25 1 00
131. 000 Volts 378 Anlg2 Out Setpt Min Max 0 000 20 000mA Sets the analog output value from a 10 000V communication device Example Set Units 0 001 mA Data In Ax to 377 value from 0 001 Volt communication device Then set Analog Outx Sel to Param Cnt Example Analog Output 1 controlled by DataLink C1 Output 0 10V DC with DataLink values of 0 10000 Setup e Data In C1 parameter 304 Analog Output 1 Setpoint e Analog Outl Sel parameter 342 24 Parameter Control e Analog Outl Hi parameter 343 10 000 Volts e Analog Outl Lo parameter 344 0 000 Volts The device that writes to DataLink C1 now controls the voltage output of Analog Outl For example 2500 2 5V DC 5000 5 0V DC 7500 7 5V DC Auto Manual Auto Manual 2 27 The intent of Auto Manual is to allow the user to override the selected reference referred to as the auto reference by either toggling a button on the programming terminal HIM or continuously asserting a digital input that is configured for Auto Manual e Alt Function on the HIM By toggling the Alt and Auto Man function on the HIM the user can switch the speed reference back and forth between the active Auto source per drive programming and inputs and the HIM requesting the manual control Manual switches the Reference Source to the HIM Auto switches it back to drive programming The HIM manual reference c
132. 1 85 202 5 403 9 15 90 850 0 33 46 275 5 10 85 300 0 11 81 825 0 32 48 71 44 157 5 1 Refer to Table 1 B for frame information 2 Weights include HIM and Standard I O 6 PowerFlex 700 Dimensions 1 17 Figure 1 11 PowerFlex 700 Bottom View Dimensions Frame Rating Dimensions in millimeters and inches 0 All 96 0 3 78 lt 75 0 2 95 gt 55 0 2 17 gt 35 0 1 38 lt gt 22 2 0 87 Dia 4 Places 185 0 7 28 LLI 41 9 1 65 gt 56 1 2 21 gt 75 9 2 99 lt 96 0 3 78 gt 1 All lt 108 5 4 27 gt lt 87 5 3 44 gt 47 5 1 87 22 2 0 87 Dia 28 6 1 13 Dia 1 8Places Y 255 1 00 187 6 7 39 133 3 525 LI 43 0 1 69 lt lt 70 0 2 76 lt 75 9 2 99 gt lt 96 0 3 78 2 All I 167 5 6 59 lt 156 9 6 18 28 7 1 13 Dia 22 4 0 88 Dia 3 Places 2Places 150 9 594 112 4 441 ws 6 20 O II 39 3 1 55 p lt 57 2 2 25 gt lt 72 7 2 86 lt 106
133. 1 ft i v B B Drive Only 12 m 40 ft v B Drive with any Comm Option 12 m 40 ft v i Drive with ControlNet 12 m 40 ft v C Drive Only 12 m 40 ft i v Drive with any Comm Option 12 m 40 ft v Drive with ControlNet 12 m 40 ft E v D Drive Only 12 m 40 ft Drive with any Comm Option 12 m 40 ft x Drive with ControlNet 12 m 40 ft E E Drive Only 30 m 98 ft v E Drive with any Comm Option 30 m 98 ft v Drive with ControlNet 30 m 98 ft i v Table 2 G PowerFlex 700 EN61800 3 EMC Compatibility 1 Second Environment First Environment Restricted Distribution Restrict Motor Cable to 30 m 98 ft Restrict Motor Cable to 150 m 492 ft E Any Drive and Option Any Drive and Option External Filter Required 0 6 v v v 1 External filters for First Environment installations and increasing motor cable lengths in Second Environment installations are available Roxburgh models KMFA RF3 for UL installations and MIF or Schaffner FN3258 and FN258 models are recommended Refer to Table 2 H and http www deltron emcon com and http www mtecorp com USA or http www schaffner com respectively 2 Two turns of the blue comm option cable through a Ferrite Core Frames A B C Fair Rite 2643102002 Frame D Fair Rite 42643251002 or equivalent 3 Refer to the 1321 Reactor and Isolation Transformer Technical Data publication 1321 TD001x for 1321 Mxxx sel
134. 14 Local Owner 2 127 Logic Mask 2 114 MOP Mask 2 114 MOP Owner 2 127 PI Configuration 2 151 PI Deriv Time 2 150 PI Reference Sel 2 151 Power Loss Mode 2 132 Reference Mask 2 114 Reference Owner 2 127 Reset Meters 2 154 Speed Mode 2 166 Speed Ref A Sel 2 7 Start Mask 2 114 Start Owner 2 127 Stop Owner 2 127 Testpoint 1 Sel 2 204 Testpoint x Data 2 204 Torque Perf Mode 2 205 Torque Ref x Sel 2 209 Torque Setpoint2 2 209 Trim Out Select 2 151 Password HIM 2 107 PET Ref Wave 2 129 PI Config 2 137 PI Configuration 2 151 PI Control 2 137 PI Deriv Time 2 150 PI Error Meter 2 137 PI Feedback Meter 2 137 PI Feedback Sel 2 137 PI Integral Time 2 137 PI Output Meter 2 137 PI Preload 2 137 PI Prop Gain 2 137 PI Ref Meter 2 137 PI Reference Sel 2 137 2 151 PI Setpoint 2 137 Index 4 PI Status 2 137 PI Upper Lower Limit 2 137 Power Loss 2 130 Power Loss Group 2 132 Power Loss Mode 2 132 Power Up Marker 2 95 Preset Frequency 2 137 Process Pl Loop 2 137 PWM Frequency 2 52 2 89 R Reference Mask 2 114 Reference Owner 2 127 Reference Speed 2 64 2 68 2 171 Reflected Wave 2 152 Repeated Start Stop 2 121 Reset Meters 2 154 Reset Run 2 154 RFI Filter 2 154 S S Curve 2 154 Scale Blocks 2 157 Sensorless Vector 2 207 Shear Pin 2 160 Signal Loss 2 17 Skip Frequency 2 161 Sleep Mode 2 163 Slip Compensation 2 166 Specifications Agency Certificat
135. 16 20BC2P1 0 0 75 0 55 4 50 1 8 13 2 1 24 32 3 6 3 8 15 3 M C2E B25 M D8E B25 20BC3P5 0 1 5 10 75 4 50 3 2 22 35 4 5 6 0 6 Y 6 12 15 7 M C2E B40 M D8E B40 20BC5P0 0 22 15 4 50 4 6 32 50 5 5 7 5 6 10 6 20 20 7 M C2E B63 M D8E B63 20BC8P7 0 4 2 2 4 50 79 55 8 7 9 9 13 2 15 17 5 15 30 30 15 M C2E C10 M D8E C10 M F8E C10 20BC011 0 5 5 4 4 50 108 7 5 115 13 17 4 15 25 15 45 45 15 M C2E C16 M D8E C16 M F8E C16 20BC015 1 7 5 55 4 50 144 10 0 15 4 172 23 1 20 30 20 60 60 20 M C2E C20 M D8E C20 M F8E C20 20BC022 1 11 17 5 4 50 206 14 3 22 242 33 30 45 30 80 80 30 M C2E C25 M D8E C25 M F8E C25 20BC030 2 15 11 4 50 28 4 19 7 30 33 45 35 60 35 120 120 50 M F8E C32 20BC037 2 18515 4 50 35 0 24 3 37 45 60 45 80 45 125 125 50 M F8E C45 20BCO43 3 22 18 5 4 50 40 7 28 2 43 56 74 60 90 60 150 150 60 20BC056 3 30 22 4 50 53 36 7 56 64 86 70 125 70 200 200 100 20BC072 3 37 30 4 50 68 9 47 8 72 84 112 90 150 90 250 250 100 20BC085 4 45 4 45 814 56 4 85 94 128 110 200 110 300 300 150 37 4 45 68 9 47 8 72 108 144 90 175 90 275 300 100 20BC105 5 55 4 50 100 5 69 6 105 116 158 125 225 125 400 300 150 45 4 50 814 56 4 85 128 170 110 175 110 300 300 150 20BC125 5 55 4 50 121 1 83 9 125 138 163 150 275 150 500 375 250 45 4 50 91 9 63
136. 2 Figure 2 42 Scale 428 Ref A H Torque Ref A Sel 429 Ref ALo Torq Ref A Div 430 FB Hi Ref B Hi Ref B Lo Torq Ref B Mult Scale Torque Ref B Sel Torque Reference Input Torque Ref A parameter 427 is used to supply an external reference for how much torque is desired The scaling of this parameter is from 800 to 800 via Torq Ref A Hi and Torq Ref A Lo Torque Ref 1 is then divided by Torq Ref A Div parameter 430 This defines the scaled Torque Ref A Troubleshooting Troubleshooting 2 209 Torque Ref B parameter 431 is used to supply an external reference for how much torque is desired The scaling of this parameter is from 800 to 800 via Torq Ref B Hi and Torq Ref B Lo The Torque Ref B is then multiplied by Torq Ref B Mul parameter 434 This defines the scaled Torque Ref B Once the scaling is complete on both Torque Ref A and Torque Ref B the output is summed to create the external torque reference This can be utilized when a master slave multi drive system is configured The torque reference into the slave can be scaled to create the proper torque output Keep in mind that the motors may be different ratings and this function is used to help the system share the load PowerFlex 700 Firmware 3 001 amp later Enhancements Extra selections have been added to Torque Ref A Sel and Torque
137. 2 213 The following table lists watts loss data for PowerFlex drives running at full load full speed and a factory default PWM Frequency of 4 kHz PowerFlex 70 For PowerFlex 70 drives Internal Watts are those dissipated by the control structure of the drive and will be dissipated into the cabinet regardless of mounting style External Watts are those dissipated directly through the heatsink and will be outside the cabinet for flange mount and inside the cabinet for panel mount Table 2 AC PowerFlex 70 Watts Loss at Full Load Speed 4kHz 1 Voltage NDHP External Watts Internal Watts Total Watts Loss 480 0 5 11 5 17 9 29 4 1 27 8 19 5 47 3 2 43 6 21 6 65 2 3 64 6 24 0 88 6 5 99 5 28 2 127 7 7 5 140 0 27 8 167 8 10 193 3 32 0 225 3 15 305 4 342 339 6 20 432 9 42 9 475 8 240V 0 5 12 2 19 2 31 4 1 30 7 20 5 512 2 44 6 22 6 67 2 3 67 3 254 92 7 5 141 3 33 2 174 5 75 205 7 34 2 239 9 10 270 4 48 1 318 5 1 Includes HIM PowerFlex 700 PowerFlex 700 drives are offered in panel mount versions only At this time no method exists for venting outside of a secondary enclosure This requires enclosure sizing for total watts see Table 2 AD Table 2 AD PowerFlex 700 Watts Loss Rated Load Speed amp PWM 2 Voltage ND HP External Watts Internal Watts Total Watts Loss 240V 0 5 9 37 46 1 22 39 61 2 38 39 77 3 57 41 98 5 97
138. 2 254205 442 11A 14 600 19400 T14R600W 28 2100 23100 T28R2K1 14 300 15400 TI4R300W gt WS m areal 12 48204 1314510 440 14 mus Er NE RE 12 21531 1924486 445 14A 20 34600 1148000 T20R34K6 12 12398 890985 442 14 20 28400 1066000 T20R28K4 12 9641 440372 442 14A 20 24910 1781970 440 11 E E 104 72300 4620000 T10F4R72K3 so 16605 625698 MOTTA 104 43900 1367000 T10F4R43K9 20 15200 804000 T2ORTSKA 104 35600 1230000 T10F4R35K6 DE SZ S 104 26000 2002000 T10FAR26K0 104 18900 1991000 _ T10F4R18K9 4 12 Selecting An External Resistor 480V AC Drives Continued Watt Catalog Watt Catalog Ohms Watts Seconds Number Ohms Watts Seconds Number 10 4 15500 1742000 T10F4R15K5 4 8 132000 8077000 T4F8R132K0 10 4 11000 359000 T10F4R11KO 48 99300 6159000 T4F8R99K3 10 4 8890 801000 T10F4R8K89 48 61000 3916000 T4F8R61KO 10 4 6040 489000 T10F4R6K4 48 58200 3696000 T4F8R58K2 10 4 5360 329000 T10F4R5K36 48 34600 2310000 T4F8R34K6 10 4 2970 95100 T10F4R2K97 48 25800 984000 T4F8R25K8 10 4 1500 25400 T10F4R1K5 48 19200 586000 T4F8R19K2 10 4 900 24500 T10F4R900W 48 10900 359000 T4F8R10K9 10 4 600 22900 T10F4R600W 48 8880 260000 T4F8R8K88 10 4 300 17300 T10F4R300W 4 8 5490 169000 T4F8R5K49 95 89635 1820386 440 18 48 4590 401000 T4F8RAKS9 9 5 39955 1079776 445 15 48 2580 185000 4F8R2K58 9 5 39755 2851152 440 15A 4 42308 1386961 442 19 9 5 26636 3000513 44
139. 20 BUSSMANN JKS 20 20BD014 1110 75 1147 95 14 165 22 30 BUSSMANN JKS 30 20BD022 1 15 10 233 151 22 242 33 45 BUSSMANN JKS 45 20BD027 2 20 15 289 188 27 33 44 60 BUSSMANN JKS 60 20BD034 2 25 20 1364 236 34 1405 54 70 BUSSMANN_JKS 70 20BD040 3 30 25 429 278 40 51 68 80 BUSSMANN JKS 80 20BD052 3 40 30 55 7 361 52 60 80 100 BUSSMANN_JKS 100 20BD065 3 50 40 69 7 454 65 78 104 150 BUSSMANN_JKS 150 20BR077 1 4 150 67 9 45 4 65 98 130 150 BUSSMANN_JKS 150 4 60 1845 547 77 85 116 150 BUSSMANN JKS 150 20BR096 1 5 60 845 547 77 116 154 1150 BUSSMANN_JKS 150 75 1053 68 3 96 106 144 200 BUSSMANN_JKS 200 20BR125 1 5 75 105 3 68 3 96 144 168 200 BUSSMANN JKS 200 100 1371 88 9 125 138 163 250 BUSSMANN JKS 250 20BR156 1 6 100 137 1 889 125 188 250 250 BUSSMANN JKS 250 125 1712 110 9 156 172 234 300 BUSSMANN JKS 300 20BR180 1 6 125 171 2 110 9 156 234 312 300 BUSSMANN JKS 300 150 2041 1322 180 198 270 400 BUSSMANN_JKS 400 1 Also applies to J voltage class Grounding General HIM Memory HIM Operations Grounding General 2 107 Refer to Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INOO1 See Copy Cat on page 2 55 Selecting a Language See also Language on page 2 111 PowerFlex 700 drives support multiple languages When you first app
140. 200 Fax 1 414 212 5201 Headquarters for Allen Bradley Products Rockwell Software Products and Global Manufacturing Solutions Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation SA NV Vorstlaan Boulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation 27 F Citicorp Centre 18 Whitfield Road Causeway Bay Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Headquarters for Dodge and Reliance Electric Products Americas Rockwell Automation 6040 Ponders Court Greenville SC 29615 4617 USA Tel 1 864 297 4800 Fax 1 864 281 2433 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation Br hlstra3e 22 D 74834 Elztal Dallau Germany Tel 49 6261 9410 Fax 49 6261 17741 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation 55 Newton Road 11 01 02 Revenue House Singapore 307987 Tel 65 6356 9077 Fax 65 6356 9011 U S Allen Bradley Drives Technical Support Tel 1 262 512 8176 Fax 1 262 512 2222 Email support amp drives ra rockwell com Online www ab com support abdrives Publication PFLEX RM001G EN E August 2004 Supersedes PFLEX RMOO01F EN E dated May 2003 Copyright 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA
141. 25 442 1A 97 3000 16800 T97R3KO 439 1281 24647 440 2 97 2700 19100 T97R2K7 439 848 9389 440 2A 97 2100 15400 T97R2K1 439 847 11267 445 2 97 1500 20800 T97R1K5 439 568 2973 445 2A 97 1200 16500 T97R1K2 439 339 2973 442 2 97 900 13800 T97R900W 439 254 2973 442 2A 97 600 13400 T97R600W 360 86 17000 AKR2360P500 zd 200 19300 PEN 81 6944 221276 440 7 342 1645 36306 440 3 81 4629 221432 440 7A 342 1096 22534 440 3A 81 4592 224640 445 7 o o Her 342 435 3677 142 3 81 1837 55084 442 7 342 329 3677 442 3A B 1393 als 3 a m 8 25 Dep Teo 237 1577 39748 440 4A T 80 5700 29400 80R5K7 eel 1510 eee iud 80 4500 23300 T80RAK5 237 1057 25351 445 4A 80 4200 25100 T80R4K2 ee ET 80 3600 18500 T8ORGK6 80 3000 22100 80R3K0 181 3108 77775 440 5 80 2700 24600 T80R2K7 181 2068 77853 440 5A 80 2100 19100 T80R2K1 181 2055 77853 445 5 80 1500 17500 T80R1K5 181 1385 30985 445 5A 80 1200 13700 T80R1K2 181 822 19248 442 5 80 900 18500 T80R900W 181 620 19248 442 5A 80 600 10900 T80R600W 128 4395 188024 4406 B NT TN 128 2912 82626 440 6A 77 9300 230000 T77R9K3 128 2906 86382 445 6 77 9000 209000 T77R9KO 128 1951 55397 445 6A 77 5700 28700 T77R5K7 128 1162 32863 442 6 77 4500 22400 T77R4K5 128 874 22065 442 6A 77 4200 24200 T77R4K2 120 250 52000 AKR2120P1K2 SU EG 77 3000 21300 77R3K0 117 3000 20800 T117R3K0 77 2700 23800 T77R2K7 117 2700 14300 T117R2K7 77 2100 19100 T77R2K1 117 2100 18600 T117R2K1 77 1500 16400 T77R1K5 117 1500 15800 T117R1K5
142. 25200 32R2K7 45 2056 124800 220 5 de 2100 20200 T32R2K1 45 1500 24900 TA5RIKS 32 1955 88578 22564 ae 0000 EBA 32 1500 28100 32R1K5 45 1200 19100 T45R1K2 32 1162 55162 222 6 EE 2005 32 900 19100 T32R900W 45 617 30828 222 5 32 875 95054 222 6A 45 600 15800 T45R600W 32 600 17500 T32R600W 45 300 12300 T45R300W 32 300 13800 TS2R300W 40 22000 1202000 T40R22KO 30 260 52000 AKR2030P1K2 40 19000 568000 T40R19KO 27 27400 2075000 T27R27K4 40 17000 574000 T40R17KO 27 21600 1346000 T27R21K6 40 16000 521000 T40R16KO 27 15000 931000 T27R15K0 40 11000 333000 TAOR11KO 27 11500 391000 T27R11K5 40 10000 309000 T40R10KO 27 8420 358000 T27RBK42 40 4000 105000 T40R4KO 27 3300 73900 T27R3K3 40 1800 18500 T40RIK8 27 2100 27300 T27RXKi 40 1200 17300 T40RIK2 27 1500 23700 T27RIK5 40 900 14300 TA40R900W 27 1200 18800 T27RIK2 40 300 10900 T40R300W 27 900 24900 T27R900W 34 26000 1591000 T34R26K0 27 600 15400 T27R600W 34 19000 1048000 T34R19KO 27 300 18500 T27R800W 34 18000 1017000 T34R18KO 25 8420 328000 T25R8K42 34 17000 990000 T34R17K0 25 3900 190000 T25R3K9 34 15000 456000 T34R15KO 25 3300 73900 T25R3K3 34 13000 456000 T34R13K0 25 1500 22000 T25R1K5 34 9000 285000 T34R9KO 25 1200 27700 T25RIK2 34 8000 262000 T34R8KO 25 900 23000 T25R900W 34 4000 98600 T34R4KO 25 600 14300 T25R600W 34 3600 93000 T34R3K6 25 300 17200 T25R300W
143. 3 5 Enter 3 1 P stops drive E Backup Startup Startup Startup 3 Motor Tests B Directn Test A Auto Tune Test aborted ls direction of Executing test Fault Clear the fault motor forward Please wait Check motor data Yes settings Verity No load is removed Yes No Rotate Static stops drive stops drive Tune complete stops drive 3 6 J 3 7 p 311 y Startup Startup Startup B Directn Test B Directn Test A Auto Tune Test complete Press Enter Test complete Then power down and swap 2 output wires to motor 2 186 Start Up Figure 2 39 PowerFlex 70 amp 700 Standard Control Option Startup 4 4 0 Basic Start Up Speed Limits StartUp 4 Speed Limits This section defines min max speeds and direction method Enter 41 4 4 2 StartUp StartUp 4 Speed Limits 4 Speed Limits Disable reverse Enter choice for gt operation No Direction Method Yes lt Fwd Rev Command gt lt No gt Speed Ref Yes Enter er StartUp 4 Speed Limits Enter value for Maximum Speed 4 Backup 60 00 Hz XXX XX lt gt yyy yy Backup T Enter StartUp 4 Speed Limits Enter value for MaxSpd OSL Backup gt MaxFreq Minimum Speed Enter Go to 0 1 5 5 78 Hz XXX XX lt gt yyy yy Yes 4 5 Y StartUp 4 Speed Limits Maximum Freq and Overspeed Limit will be changed to support yo
144. 3 OffTime Min Max 0 00 600 00 Secs 388 Sets the OFF Delay time for the digital Units 0 01 Secs outputs This is the time between the disappearance of a condition and de activation of the relay Either timer can be disabled by setting the corresponding delay time to 0 Important Whether a particular type of transition False True or True False on an output condition results in an energized or de energized output depends on the output condition If a transition on an output condition occurs and starts a timer and the output condition goes back to its original state before the timer runs out then the timer will be aborted and the corresponding digital output will not change state Relay Activates lt gt CR1 On Delay 2 Seconds Current Limit Occurs rT I O O ET RE 0 5 10 Relay Does Not Activate pt gt CR1 On Delay 2 Seconds 0 5 10 Cyclic Current Limit every other second 2 82 Direction Control Direction Control PowerFlex 700 Firmware 3 001 amp later Enhancements Certain digital output enhancements have been included in firmware version 3 001 and later for the PowerFlex 700 Vector Control drive These include e Digital output control via Datalink Parameter Controlled Digital Outputs Enables control of the digital outputs through the Data In parameters 379 Dig Out Setpt 380 Sets the digital outp
145. 5 15A 4 28207 1321116 442 19A 9 5 17890 479901 442 15 9 5 11926 316618 442 15A 3 9 62996 8013142 445 19A 3 9 49108 3246136 442 20 8 70477 3325398 440 16 8 47519 1560331 445 16 3 9 32736 2405659 442 20A 8 46977 2966898 440 16A 2 6 44505 1126723 442 21A 8 31474 1564893 445 16A 8 21143 693480 442 16 8 14093 401656 442 16A 6 44 58718 4929414 445 17 6 4 58430 4818224 440 17A 6 4 39148 1231840 445 17A 6 4 26292 719851 442 17 6 4 17529 574859 442 17A 5 4 104000 3444000 T5F4R104K0 5 4 51900 1953000 T5F4R51K9 5 4 48100 1845000 T5F4R48K1 5 4 37700 2310000 T5F4R37K7 5 4 22000 717000 T5F4R22K0 5 4 20300 738000 T5F4R20K3 5 4 12000 699000 T5F4R12K0 54 7280 328000 T5F4R7K28 5 4 5780 169000 T5F4R5K78 5 4 5080 401000 T5F4R5K8 5 4 2680 185000 T5F4R2K68 5 4 1670 55700 T5F4R1K67 5 76534 3651418 445 18 5 51028 1733701 445 18A 5 34269 959801 442 18 5 22048 1603773 442 18A Selecting An External Resistor 4 13 Table 4 C Resistor Selection 600V AC Drives Watt Catalog Watt Catalog Ohms Watts Seconds Number Ohms Watts Seconds Number 7 056 915 6260 5501 120 260 52000 AKR2120P1K2 956 605 6260 5551 117 3000 20800 T117R3K0 956
146. 590 401000 T4F8R4K59 4 8 2580 185000 T4F8R2K58 4 5 30918 1486256 220 12 45 20715 1425576 225 12 4 5 20612 1425576 220 12A 4 5 13810 660558 225 12A 4 5 8266 239950 222 12 45 6184 152850 222 12A 3 8 36138 2672955 220 13 38 24212 1321116 225 13 3 8 24089 751149 220 13A 3 8 16139 430346 225 13A 3 8 9788 328491 222 13 38 7227 182571 222 13A 2 7 35178 2187360 225 14 2 7 35003 2164091 220 14A 2 7 23452 1173670 225 14A 2 7 15750 520110 222 14 2 7 10500 521631 222 14A 2 2 44785 1724576 225 15 2 2 29860 1685270 225 15A 2 2 20053 1603773 222 15 2 2 13370 316618 222 15A 18 34281 2138364 225 16A 18 23026 1570711 222 16 18 15350 782447 222 16A 15 19884 1308926 222 17A Selecting An External Resistor 4 9 Table 4 B Resistor Selection 480V AC Drives Watt Catalog Watt Catalog Ohms Watts Seconds Number Ohms Watts Seconds Number 615 915 13300 440 1 117 900 10600 T117R900W 615 605 13615 445 1 117 600 10100 T117R600W 615 602 13302 440 1A 117 300 7950 T117R300W 615 404 4225 445 1A 97 4200 19100 T97R4K2 615 242 4225 442 1 97 3600 22400 T97R3K6 615 180 42
147. 5A Maximum Power AC 50 VA AC 25 VA 1200 VA 840 VA DC 60W DC 30W 150W 105W Minimum DC Current 10 pA 10 mA Switching Time 8 ms 10 ms Initial State De energized De energized Number of relays 2 2 Standard Control Standard I O 3 Vector Control Configuration The outputs may be independently configured via the following parameters to switch for various states of the drive PowerFlex 700 Digital Output Selection 380 Digital Out1 Sel 5 Default 1 Fault 381 384 Digital Out2 Sel 4 Run 385 388 Digital Out3 Sel 4 Run 389 Selects the drive status that will energize Options 1 Fault 1 382 a CRx output relay 2 Alarm as 3 Ready 383 1 Any relay programmed as Fault or B UM Alarm will energize pick up when 5 Forward Run power is applied to drive and 6 Reverse Run deenergize drop out when a fault 7 Auto Restart or alarm exists Relays selected for 8 Powerup Run other functions will energize only 9 At Speed 6 002 when that condition exists and will 10 At Freq 9 001 deenergize when condition is 11 At Current 3 003 removed 12 At Torque 004 2 Vector Control Option Only 13 At Temp 14 At Bus Volts 3 218 3 Activation level is defined in Dig Outx 15 At PI Error 3 012 Level below 16 DC Braking 197 4 Vector firmware 3 001 and later 47 Cur Limit 157 147 5 When TorgProve Cnfg is set to 18 Economiz
148. 60 0 50 0 40 0 Hz 30 0 20 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 Seconds Scale Blocks Scale Blocks 2 157 See also Analog Scaling on page 2 12 and page 2 22 Scale blocks are used to scale a parameter value Scalex In Value is linked to the parameter that you wish to scale Scalex In Hi determines the high value for the input to the scale block Scalex Out Hi determines the corresponding high value for the output of the scale block Scalex In Lo determines the low value for the input to the scale block Scalex Out Lo determines the corresponding low value for the output of the scale block Scalex Out Value is the resulting output of the scale block There are 3 ways to use the output of the scale block 1 A linkable destination parameter can be linked to Scalex Out Value See Example Configuration 1 2 Analog Outx Sel can be set to 20 Scale Block 21 Scale Block2 22 Scale Block3 23 Scale Block4 Note that when the Analog Outputs are set to use the scale blocks the Scale x Out Hi and Scale x Out Lo parameters are not active Instead Analog Outx Hi and Analog Outx Lo determine the scaling for the output of the scale block See Example Configuration 2 3 PI Reference Sel and PI Feedback Sel can also use the output of the scale block by setting them to 25 Scale Block Out 26 S
149. 6384 220 3A 59 1056 39201 225 44 85 730 23004 225 3A 59 631 25038 222 4 85 438 9076 222 3 59 473 10094 222 4A Baca dees UA SORA 48 20400 716000 T48R20K4 80 9300 230000 T80R9K3 48 19100 656000 T48R19K1 80 9000 209000 T80R9KO 48 12600 359000 T48R12K6 80 5700 29400 T80R5K7 48 6600 131000 T48R6K6 80 4500 23300 T80R4K5 48 5670 131000 T48R5K67 80 4200 25100 T80R4K2 48 4200 23800 T48R4K2 80 3600 18500 T80R3K6 48 3600 28000 T48R3K6 80 3000 22100 T80R3K0 48 3000 21100 T48R3K0 4 6 Selecting An External Resistor 240V AC Drives Continued Watt Catalog Watt Catalog Ohms Watts Seconds Number Ohms Watts Seconds Number 48 2700 28300 T48RK7 34 2400 30100 T34R2K4 48 1500 16600 T48RIK5 34 1800 25100 T34RIK8 48 1200 20800 T48RIK2 34 900 19100 T34R900W 48 900 17500 T48R900W 34 300 14700 T34R300W s EA SES eo 32 28000 2304000 T32R28KO 32 26000 1591000 T32R26K0 47 166 33000 AKR2047P500 32 18000 1017000 T32R18K0 TED ER TEK 32 17100 931000 T32R17Ki 45 12600 359000 SE 32 12700 410000 T32R12K7 4E 6000 125000 T4SREKO 32 8420 246000 T32R8K42 Enn O 32 4500 105000 T32R4K5 45 3125 197177 2205 SPONSAE E 2 45 3000 19800 T45R3K0 32 4000 83300 T32R4KO 45 2700 22000 TA5ROK7 32 2918 82626 220 6A 45 2100 28100 T45R2Ki 32 2906 8266 2256 2055 32 2700
150. 7 start the drive or change direction by using the terminal block digital inputs programmed for both Run and Direction control i e Run Fwd Important Because an open condition or unwired condition commands Forward the terminal block seeks direction ownership as soon as this input function is configured which may happen at power up In order for the terminal block to actually gain ownership the masks must be set up correctly see above and no other device can currently have direction ownership Once the terminal block gains direction ownership it will retain it until shutdown until the Direction Mask or Logic Mask bits for the terminal block are cleared or until this input function is no longer configured e Jog Jog is essentially a non latched run start command An open to closed transition while drive is stopped causes drive to start jog in the current direction When the input opens while drive is running jogging the drive will stop The drive will not jog while running or while the Stop Clear Faults input is open Start has precedence the drive is jogging the drive will switch from jog mode to run mode The drive will not stop but may change speed and or change direction ATTENTION If a normal drive start command is received while The terminal block bit must be set in the Jog Mask and Logic Mask parameters in order for the terminal block to cause the drive to jog using this input function
151. 7 96 144 168 125 200 125 375 375 150 20BC140 5 75 4 40 136 93 9 140 154 190 200 300 200 400 400 250 55 4 40 101 69 6 105 157 190 150 225 150 300 300 150 20BC170 6 90 4 50 164 126 170 187 255 250 375 250 600 500 250 75 4 50 136 103 140 210 280 200 300 200 550 400 250 al 20BC205 6 110 4 40 199 148 205 220 289 250 450 250 600 600 400 90 4 40 164 126 170 255 313 250 375 250 600 500 250 20BC260 6 132 2 40 255 177 260 286 390 350 550 350 750 750 400 110 2 40 199 138 205 308 410 250 450 250 600 600 400 Table 2 5 PF700 480 Volt AC Input Protection Devices Motor Dual Circuit Circuit Drive o HP PWM Input Element Time Non Time Breaker Protector 140M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Catalog amp Rating Freq Temp Ratings Output Amps Delay Fuse Delay Fuse 4 Range 9 6 Number ND HD kHz C Amps kVA Cont 1 Min 3 Sec Min Max Min Max 2 Max 8 Max Available Catalog Numbers 140 7 480 Volt AC Input 20BD1P1 0 0 5 oS 4 50 0 9 07 14 12 1 6 3 3 3 6 15 3 M C2E B16 20BD2P1 0 1 ET 4 50 1 6 14 24 24 32 3 6 3 8 15 3 M C2E B25 20BD3P4 0 2 1 5 4 50 2 6 22 3 4 45 6 0 4 8 4 12 15 7 M C2E B40 M D8E B40 20BD5P0 0 3 2 14 50 3 9 32 5 0 5 5 7 5 6 10 6 20 20 7 M C2E B63 M D8E B63 20BD8P0 0 5 3 14 50 6 9 57 80 8 8 12 10 15 10 30 30 15 M C2E C10
152. 7 Motor NP FLA 2 117 Motor NP Hz 2 117 Motor NP Power 2 117 Motor NP Pwr Units 2 117 Motor NP RPM 2 117 Motor NP Volts 2 117 Motor Overload 2 118 Motor Start Stop 2 121 Mounting 2 122 Mounting Dimensions 1 7 N Notch Filter 2 122 O Output Contactor Start Stop 2 121 Output Current 2 124 Output Devices Contactors 2 121 2 124 Output Reactor 2 124 Output Frequency 2 125 Output Power 2 125 Output Reactor 2 124 Output Voltage 2 125 Overspeed 2 126 Owners 2 127 P Parameter access level 2 129 Parameters Accel Mask 2 114 Accel Owner 2 127 Alarm x Code 2 9 Analog In Hi 2 12 Analog In Lo 2 12 Analog In1 Value 2 18 Analog In2 Value 2 18 Analog Out Scale 2 25 Analog Out1 Sel 2 21 Analog Out2 Sel 2 21 Anlg In Config 2 6 2 9 Anlg In Loss 2 7 Anlg In Sqr Root 2 16 Anlg Out Setpt 2 26 Auto Rstrt Delay 2 29 Auto Rstrt Tries 2 29 Bus Reg Gain 2 46 Bus Reg Mode A B 2 46 Clear Fault Owner 2 127 Compensation 2 152 Current Lmt Sel 2 9 2 160 Decel Mask 2 114 Decel Owner 2 127 Dig Out Setpt 2 82 Dig Outx Level 2 80 Dig Outx OffTime 2 81 Dig Outx OnTime 2 81 Digital Inx Sel 2 62 2 63 Digital Outx Sel 2 8 2 78 2 79 Index 3 Direction Mask 2 114 Direction Owner 2 127 Fault Clr Mask 2 114 Fault Config x 2 160 Feedback Select 2 166 Flying Start En 2 98 Flying Start Gain 2 98 Flying StartGain 2 98 Jog Mask 2 114 Jog Owner 2 127 Language 2 111 Local Mask 2 1
153. 8 5 6 7 0 6 10 6 17 5 15 7 M C2E B63 M D8E B63 20BB6P8 1 2 15 4 50 6 8 24 7 8 10 4 138 10 15 10 30 30 15 M C2E C10 M D8E C10 M F8E C10 20BB9P6 1 3 2 4 50 9 5 3 4 11 12 1 17 12 20 12 40 40 15 M C2E C16 M D8E C16 M F8E C16 20BB015 1 5 3 4 50 Br BEJA pes ese 20 35 20 70 70 30 M C2E C20 M D8E C20 M F8E C20 20BB022 1 7 5 5 4 50 230 8 3 25 3 27 8 38 30 50 30 100 100 30 M C2E C25 M D8E C25 M F8E C25 CMN 2500 20BB028 2 10 7 5 4 50 29 6 107 322 38 506 40 70 40 125 125 50 M F8E C32 CMN 4000 20BB042 3 15 10 4 50 445 116 0 48 3 53 1 725 60 100 60 175 175 70 M F8E C45 CMN 6300 20BB052 3 20 15 4 50 als ral ES 64 86 80 125 80 200 200 100 CMN 6300 20BB070 4 25 20 4 50 72 25 9 78 2 93 124 90 175 90 300 300 100 CMN 9000 20BB080 4 30 25 4 50 847 30 5 92 117 156 110 200 110 350 350 150 CMN 9000 20BB104 5 40 4 50 113 40 7 120 132 175 150 250 150 475 350 150 30 4 50 847 30 592 138 175 125 200 125 350 300 150 CMN 9000 20BB130 5 50 l4 50 122 44 1 130 143 175 175 275 175 500 375 250 140 4 50 98 35 3 104 156 175 125 225 125 400 300 150 20BB154 6 60 4 50 167 60 1 177 195 266 225 350 225 500 500 250 50 4 50 141 50 9 150 225 300 200 300 200 500 450 250 20BB192 6 75 4 50 208 750 221 243 308 300 450 300 600 600 400 E 60 4 50 167 160 1 177 266 308 225 350 225 500 500 250
154. 82 179 7 5 134 74 208 10 192 77 269 15 276 92 368 20 354 82 436 25 602 96 698 30 780 96 876 40 860 107 967 50 1132 138 1270 60 1296 200 1496 75 1716 277 1993 100 1837 418 2255 2 214 Watts Loss Voltage ND HP External Watts Internal Watts Total Watts Loss 480V 0 5 11 42 53 1 19 44 63 2 31 45 76 3 46 46 93 5 78 87 164 75 115 79 194 10 134 84 218 15 226 99 326 20 303 91 394 25 339 102 441 30 357 103 459 40 492 117 610 50 568 148 717 60 722 207 930 75 821 286 1107 100 1130 397 1479 125 1402 443 1845 150 1711 493 2204 200 1930 583 2512 600V 0 5 9 37 46 1 14 40 54 2 25 40 65 3 41 42 83 5 59 83 142 7 5 83 75 157 10 109 77 186 15 177 93 270 20 260 83 343 25 291 95 385 30 324 95 419 40 459 109 569 50 569 141 710 60 630 195 825 75 1053 308 1361 100 1467 407 1874 125 1400 500 1900 150 1668 612 2280 2 Worst case condition including Vector Control board HIM and Communication Module Appendix A Dynamic Brake Selection Guide The Dynamic Braking Selection Guide provided on the following pages contains detailed information on selecting and using dynamic brakes Allen Bradley Power Dynamic Braking Resistor Calculator Selection Guide Rockwell Automation A 2 Dynamic Brake Selection Guide Allen Bradley Power Dynamic Braking Resistor Calculator Automation
155. 9 Type 1 IP20 3 30 E 20 E 10 p 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 of Output FLA 400V 18 5 kW Open NEMA 6 10 kHz EE Type 1 IP20 g n E 6 kHz gt 30 E 20 8 kHz 3 10 2 10 kHz 0 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 of Output FLA 22 kW Open NEMA 2 10 kHz None Type 1 IP20 30 kW Open NEMA 6 10 kHz o 50 Type 1 IP20 a E 40 6 kHz E 30 8 kHz E 20 3 10 kHz A 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 of Output FLA 1 6 Derating Guidelines ND Frame Voltage Rating Enclosure Frequency Derate 3 400V 37 kW Open NEMA 4 10 kHz 8 cont Type 1 IP20 g kHz gt 30 6 kHz E 20 3 10 kHz 2 z 10 8kH 0 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 of Output FLA 460V 30 HP Open NEMA 2 10 kHz None Type 1 IP20 40 HP Open NEMA 6 10 kHz o Type 1 IP20 E 3 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 of Output FLA 50 HP Open NEMA 6 10 kHz o Type 1 IP20 g 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 of Output FLA 4 600V 160 HP Open NEMA 2 4 kHz o 7 Type 1 IP20 og m s 4 I 5 4 kHz S 30 E x 10 0 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 of Output FLA 5 400V 155kW Open NEMA 2 8 kHz None Type 1 IP20 460V 75 HP Open NEMA 2 8 kHz None Type 1 IP20 100 HP Open NEMA 4 kHz None Type 1 IP20 6 8 kHz nu g 45 6 kHz 40 9 95 B 5 25 8kHz
156. 968 555 15 20 1200 gt ORS TURNE 15 40388 1300276 550 15A 27 900 24800 T27R900W 15 27060 719851 555 15A IE A ____ T27R600W 15 18173 1158280 552 15 27 900 189907 T27R300W 15 12112 550465 552 15A 25 8420 328000 T25R8K42 15 11400 734000 T1S5R11K4 25 3900 190000 T25R3K9 15 8570 466000 TI5RSK57 25 3300 73900 T25R3K3 15 6160 232000 T15R6K16 25 1500 22000 T25RIK5 15 4210 143000 T15R4K21 25 1200 27700 T25R1K2 15 1500 38800 TISRIK5 25 900 23000 T25R900W 15 900 22000 T15R900W 25 600 14300 T25R600W 15 600 20800 T15R600W 25 300 17200 T25R300W 15 300 16400 T15R300W 24 36710 844315 550 13 14 12700 1038000 114R12K7 24 24468 1871068 550 134 14 11400 734000 TI4R1iK4 24 24086 1173670 555 13 14 6160 232000 T14R6K16 24 16303 533797 555 19A 14 1800 27800 TI4RIK8 24 9635 299038 552 13 14 1200 24500 TIARIK2 24 7840 211079 552 13A 14 900 20700 T14R900W 23 10200 310000 T23R10K2 14 000 19400 TI4RGO0W 4 16 Selecting An External Resistor 600V AC Drives Continued Watt Catalog Watt Catalog Ohms Watts Seconds Number Ohms Watts Seconds Number 14 300 15400 T14R300W 54 2680 185000 TSFAR2K68 e 54 1670 55700 TSFARIK67 12 46170 2247006 555 16 5 46464 3891643 552 20 12 45934 2387466 550 16A 5 30978 1651395 552 204 12 30776 10402211 590 8A 48 132000 8077000 T4F8
157. A 80 600 10900 T80R600W 125 6994 2125135507 BO A TN 125 4625 208131 555 7 77 9300 230000 T77R9K3 125 4620 208131 550 7A 77 9000 209000 T77R9KO 125 3095 130903 555 7A 77 5700 28700 T77R5K7 125 1850 51954 552 7 77 4500 22400 T77R4K5 125 1386 32863 552 7A 77 4200 24200 T77R4K2 TTT TT 77 3600 28100 T77R3K6 4 14 Selecting An External Resistor 600V AC Drives Continued Watt Catalog Watt Catalog Ohms Watts Seconds Number Ohms Watts Seconds Number 77 3000 21300 T77R3K0 45 8672 370410 555 10A 77 2700 23800 T77R2K7 45 6000 125000 T45R6K0 77 2100 19100 T77R2K1 45 5138 308128 552 10 77 1500 16400 T77R1K5 45 3883 120810 552 10A 77 1200 20800 T77R1K2 45 3600 26600 T45R3K6 77 900 17900 T77R900W 45 3000 19800 T45R3K0 77 600 10600 T77R600W 45 2700 22000 T45R2K7 77 300 8210 T77R300W 45 2100 28100 T45R2K1 70 12489 482144 5509 dure 13007 224900 PARIS 70 8424 295765 550 9A 45 1200 19100 45R1K2 70 8258 297173 555 9 45 600 15800 T45R600W 70 5643 189665 555 0A 45 300 12300 T45R300W 70 3303 144048 552 9 40 22000 1202000 T40R22K0 70 2527 76680 552 9A 40 19000 568000 T40R19KO 60 11000 448000 T60R11KO 40 17000 574000 T40R17K0 60 6900 164000 T60R6K9 40 16000 521000 T40R16K0 60 4500 28000 T60R4K5 40 11000 333000 T40R11K0 60 3600 22000 T60R3K6 40 10000 309000 T40R10K0 60 2700 18500 T60R2K7 40 4000 105000 T40R4K0 60 1500 20800 T60R1K5 40 1800 1850
158. AD2P1 A 1 075 24 2 24 24 132 3 6 3 8 15 3 140M C2E B25 140M D8E B25 20AD3P4 A 2 15 38 32 34 145 6 6 6 6 12 15 140M C2E B40 140M D8E B40 20AD5PO B 3 2 56 47 5 55 75 10 10 10 20 20 15 140M C2E C63 140M D8E B63 20ADBPO B 5 3 98 84 8 88 12 15 15 15 30 30 15 140M C2E C10 140M D8E C10 140M F8E C10 20AD011 C 75 5 195 79 11 124 165 15 20 15 40 40 15 140M C2E C16 140M D8E C16 140M F8E C16 20AD014 C 10 7 5 125 104 14 165 22 20 30 20 50 50 20 140M C2E C16 140M D8E C16 140M F8E C16 20AD022 D 15 10 199 166 22 242 33 25 45 25 80 80 30 140M C2E C20 140M D8E C20 140M F8E C20 20AD027 D 20 15 248 206 27 33 44 35 60 35 100 100 50 140M F8E C25 140 CMN 2500 20AD034 D 25 20 34 25 9 34 405 54 40 70 40 125 125 50 140M F8E C45 140 CMN 4000 20AD040 D 30 25 40 397 40 51 68 50 90 50 150 150 50 140M F8E C45 140 CMN 4000 See page 2 102 for Notes 2 102 Fuses and Circuit Breakers Table 2 0 PF70 600 Volt AC Input Recommended Protection Devices Dual Motor Drive 3 HP Input Element Time Non Time Circuit Circuit y Catalog E Rating Ratings Output Amps Delay Fuse Delay Fuse Breaker 4 Protector 6 140M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Range 78 Number E ND HD Amps kVA Cont 1 Min 3 Sec Min 2
159. C PowerFlex 700 933V DC lt DC Bus Memory lt 983V DC 1076V DC Frames 5 amp 6 983v DC Memory 93V DC Only Refer to Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INOOI for detailed information on Cable Control Refer to Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INOOI for detailed information on Cable Motor Lengths Refer to Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INOOI for detailed information on Cable Power Refer to Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INOOI for detailed information on Cable Trays and Conduit 2 52 Carrier PWM Frequency Carrier PWM Frequency See page 1 3 for derating guidelines as they relate to carrier frequency In general the lowest possible switching frequency that is acceptable for any particular application is the one that should be used There are several benefits to increasing the switching frequency Refer to Figure 2 14 and Figure 2 15 Note the output current at 2 kHz and 4 kHz The smoothing of the current waveform continues all the way to 10 kHz Figure 2 14 Current at 2 kHz PWM Frequency Sk Stop 25 0kS s 322 Acgs C4 RMS 11 68mv M2 00ms Chd 7 11 8mV Ch4 10 0mvo Figu
160. C rating of installed fuse circuit breaker Sine coded PWM with programmable carrier frequency Ratings apply to all drives refer to the Derating Guidelines on page 1 3 The drive can be supplied as 6 pulse or 12 pulse in a configured package Carrier Frequency PF70 PF700 Drive rating based on 4 kHz 2 4 8 amp 10 kHz BATEC 2 4 8 amp 12 kHz 2 4 8 amp 10 kHz Output Voltage Range 0 to rated motor voltage Output Frequency Range PF70 PF700 0 to 400 Hz BEE 0 to 500 Hz 0 to 400 Hz BET 0 to 420 Hz Frequency Accuracy Digital Input Analog Input Within 0 01 of set output frequency Within 0 4 of maximum output frequency Frequency Control Speed Regulation w Slip Compensation Volts per Hertz Mode 0 5 of base speed across 40 1 speed range 40 1 operating range 10 rad sec bandwidth Speed Regulation w Slip Compensation Sensorless Vector Mode 0 5 of base speed across 80 1 speed range 80 1 operating range 20 rad sec bandwidth Speed Regulation w Feedback Sensorless Vector Mode 0 196 of base speed across 80 1 speed range 80 1 operating range 20 rad sec bandwidth Speed Control Speed Regulation w o Feedback Vector Control Mode 0 196 of base speed across 120 1speed range 120 1 operating range 50 rad sec bandwidth Speed Regulation w Feedback Vector Control Mode 0 00196 of base speed across 120 1 speed range 1000 1 operating range 25
161. C47 B DAC47 C DAC47 D Reserved Do Not Adjust Host DAC Enable Reserved Do Not Adjust DAC55 A DAC55 B DAC55 C DAC55 D Reserved Do Not Adjust Torq Adapt Speed Selects the operating frequency speed at which the adaptive torque control regulators become active as a percent of motor nameplate frequency Torq Reg Enable Enables or disables the torque regulator Kp Torq Reg Proportional gain for the torque regulator Ki Torq Reg Integral gain for the torque regulator Torq Reg Trim Torque Regulator trim gain A larger value increases the developed torque Typically used to compensate for losses between developed and shaft torque Slip Reg Enable Enables or disables the slip frequency regulator Kp Slip Reg Proportional gain for the slip frequency regulator Ki Slip Reg Integral gain for the slip frequency regulator Flux Reg Enable Enables or disables the flux regulator Kp Flux Reg Proportional gain for the flux regulator Ki Flux Reg Integral gain for the flux regulator Freq Reg Ki Integral gain for the Frequency Regulator Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default nits efault z vce nits efault z vc nits efault Oc cz nits Default nits
162. Current Level Per Normal 0 75 0 50 0 25 0 00 1 00 10 00 100 00 1000 00 10000 00 Time Seconds 2 88 Drive Overload Thermal Manager Protection The thermal manager protection assures that the thermal ratings of the power module are not exceeded The operation of the thermal manager can be thought of as a function block with the inputs and outputs as shown below Figure 2 20 Thermal Manager Inputs Outputs DTO Select DTO Fault Off PWM ILmt Both On Off PWM Frequency Active PWM Frequency 2 12 kHz 2 12 kHz Current Limit Active Current Limit 0 200 0 200 Temperature Analog Input aie Drive Temperature Volts Overload x deg C total V dc IGBT Temperature Amps Volts x deg C Output Frequency KHz Alarm ILmt Alarm 0 400 Hz On Off On Off EE Power Board Data The following is a generalization of the calculations done by the thermal manager The IGBT junction temperature Ty is calculated based on the measured drive temperature Tprive and a temperature rise that is a function of operating conditions When the calculated junction temperature reaches a maximum limit the drive will generate a fault This fault can not be disabled This maximum junction temperature is stored in EE on the
163. DC 24 VDC Common Digital In1 Sel 361 TB1 27 TB2 28 TB229 A Debounce 216 00 Dig In Status Digin 1 Digital In2 Sel Selector Debounce DE Dig In Status Digln 2 Digital In3 Sel Selector 363 TB2 30 216 gt 02 Debounce Dig In Status Digin 3 Digital In4 Sel 364 18231 216 03 Selector Debounce Dig In Status Digln 4 Digital In5 Sel 365 Selector lt 216 04 Debounce Dig In Status Digln 5 Digital In6 Sel 366 TB2 32 216 4 05 Debounce Dig In Status Digin 6 Selector Terminal Block Configuration Setting 11A1 Terminal Block Configuration Setting 11A1 Terminal Block Configuration Setting 11A1 Terminal Block Configuration Setting 11A1 Terminal Block Configuration Setting 11A1 Terminal Block Configuration Setting 11A1 From Internal Selectable Source s From Internal Selectable Source s From Internal Selectable Source s Digital Out1 Sel Es Inputs amp
164. DC per minute for a 480V AC drive Bus memory is used as the base line to sense a power loss condition If the drive enters a power loss state the bus memory will also be used for recovery i e pre charge control or inertia ride through upon return of the power source upon return of the power source Update of the bus memory is blocked during deceleration to prevent a false high value caused by a regenerative condition Decel Time 1 2 Sets the rate at which the drive ramps down its output frequency after a Stop command or during a decrease in command frequency speed change The rate established is the result of the programmed Decel Time and the Minimum and Maximum Frequency as follows Maximum Speed Decel Time Decel Rate Hz sec Two decel times exist to allow the user to change rates on the fly via PLC command or digital input The selection is made by programming Decel Time 1 amp Decel Time 2 and then using one of the digital inputs Digital Inx Sel programmed as Decel 2 see Table 2 1 for further information However if a PLC is used manipulate the bits of the command word as shown below olol 1 Condition True 1 0 0 Condition False x Reserved ooo C o eo D maim The effectiveness of these bits or digital inputs can be affected by Decel Mask See Masks on page 2 114 for more information Times are adjustable in 0 1 s
165. E QE 2 52 CE Conformity stig xiv e ee pte reg A v dade parto ue are so deed 2 53 Copy Cat eiue AA Doa Gis fe Rem Doble ed qae epe ene 2 55 Current mit is sees dos ep sealers vare added temet So bre RU Da UNE 2 56 Liu TTC EDT 2 58 DC Bus Voltage Memory ii cc xsv e Ye pe pe pb ied v P beds et 2 60 IDecelEHie user ee 2 60 Digital Inputs oi eje sed e y ea E DUNS I e orc o woe Rede dre Men Kc e orci b en 2 61 Digital Outputs Cn 2 78 Direction Control eese eset ne e ee gone e ead ceo Roe e Rug ed Saad whee eh 2 82 DPN 2 83 Drive Overload assessment ae degre e 2 86 Drive Ratings KW Amps Volts lesse eet teen eee en eee 2 90 WOOP M EE 2 90 Economizer Auto Economizer lees ehm 2 91 Iustus M 2 91 Fan CUVE ii COSA P 2 92 lp GM T E vane Aa ER 2 92 ld eeg 2 93 Flux Brain Bs M 2 96 Pux Pitas x a bag Paredes n shores Run E dress ES 2 97 BUYS Statt aese nes pesi espe REESE RR b kok pad Recte ETUR ce ig UR Ene Od d 2 08 IFuses and Circuit Breakers edctered4s eRRX a qoe ee dia 2 100 Grounding General sek obe ters eek vea Bare Ge RE EP ERG age la AUR A ec RUE 2 107 HIM Memory e pL Rest ea lee E RE EE RSS e E EX e RUE VALE seco aes 2 107 HIM Operations sepe ete x Re urge Ie hr
166. E Sie A I 1 I i A SS 1288 LEE 588 DD 300 160 0 tse vet SS eic Omo ooo E EE 22 ERE E Sea Se X Yo dd a A 2 zo qusc edu re 1 i 1 i sd EN 0 i 58 DP 52 DPD d MS o LG FSG Lo 9 ss g u o Ec oe gt 3 Ez 12 f 12 3 4 o oS oG oS OG o 2 d Ow oo lt W cO x o o eo 2 a E A 75 Dn lt 2 166 Speed Control Mode Regulation 4 Vector Speed Feedback Speed Control Mode Regulation amp Vector Speed Feedback The purpose of speed regulation is to allow the drive to adjust certain operating conditions such as output frequency to compensate for actual motor speed losses in an attempt to maintain motor shaft speed within the specified regulation percentage The Speed Mode parameter selects the speed regulation method for the drive and can be set to one of 3 choices on the PowerFlex 70 700 The PowerFlex 700 Vector option has 5 choices In addition Feedback Select in the Vector option chooses the feedback used for the speed regulator e Open Loop No speed control is offered e Slip Comp Slip Compensation is active approximately 5 regulation e Process PI The PI Loop sets the actual speed based on process variables 08 Speed Mode Default 0 Open Loop 9 Sets the method of speed regulation Options Open Loop Slip Comp Process PI Open Loop e Feedback Select Default 0 1 2 0 Selects the source for moto
167. Enter value for I Preset Speed 4 parameters link parameters link Preset Speed 2 Preset Preset Sheed 5 a low speed a low speed 10 0 Hz Spesd2 Preset Speed 6 with a low with a low XXX X lt VYy y Preset Speed 7 analog value analog value T T 5 6 Done Done Go to 0 1 6 5 23 Enter 5 30 Enter i Preset StartUp Speed 3 StartUp StartUp 5 Speed Control 1 5 Speed Control 5 Speed Control Enter value for Enter value for Enter value for Preset Speed 3 Preset Preset Preset Preset Enter Analog In 1Lo Analog In 2 Lo 15 0 Hz Speed 4 Speed 5 Speed 6 Speed 7 0 0V 0 0V XXX X lt yy y XXX X lt yyy y XXX X lt YYY y I 5 7 5 8 5 9 X 5 10 i En Bn i m StartUp StartUp StartUp StartUp 5 24 v S31 y 5 Speed Control 5 Speed Control 5 Speed Control 5 Speed Control StartUp StartUp Enter value for Enter value for Enter value for Enter value for 5 Speed Control 5 Speed Control Preset Speed 4 Preset Speed 5 Preset Speed 6 Preset Speed 7 Enter value for Enter value for 20 0 Hz 25 0 Hz 30 0 Hz 35 0 Hz Speed Ref A Lo Speed Ref A Lo XXX X lt yyy y XXX X lt yyy y XXX X lt yyy y XXX X lt yyy y i 0 0 Hz 0 0 Hz pO XXX lt yyy y XXX lt yyy y Figure 2 39 PowerFlex 70 amp 700 Standard Control Option Startup 6 2 188 Start Up 6 0 6 1 StartUp StartUp 6 Strt Stop l O 6 Strt Stop 1 0 This section Complete these defines I O fun ctions including start and stop from digital ins steps in
168. L The calculation of PL in percent gives the percentage of the instantaneous power dissipated by the Dynamic Brake Resistors relative to the steady state power dissipation capacity of the resistors This will give a data point to be drawn on one of the curves provided in Section 3 Determining Dynamic Brake Requirements 2 9 Example Calculation A 10 HP 4 Pole 480 Volt motor and drive is accelerating and decelerating as depicted in Figure 2 1 e Cycle period t is 40 seconds e Rated speed is 1785 RPM and is to be decelerated to 0 speed in 15 0 seconds e Motor load can be considered purely as inertia and all power expended or absorbed by the motor is absorbed by the motor and load inertia e Load inertia is 4 0 Ib ft and is directly coupled to the motor Motor rotor inertia is 2 2 Ib ft e A PowerFlex 70 10 HP 480V Normal Duty rating is chosen Calculate the necessary values to choose an acceptable Dynamic Brake Rated Power 10 HP x 746 watts 7 46 kW This information was given and must be known before the calculation process begins This can be given in HP but must be converted to watts before it can be used in the equations 1785 _ 186 98 Rad 60 S 0 0Rad 60 S Rated Speed w 1785 RPM 21 x Lower Speed 0 RPM 27 x This information was given and must be known before the calculation process begins This can be given in RPM but must be converted to radians per second before it
169. LL ip los ed e E I dme EA edam us tele ostia 2 130 Presets Erequeney A esel 2 137 Process PL LOOP ee A Ram ERR dues AUD ER RUN raden is 2 137 Reflected Wave ce Sd eee e e ed cote ees e e ee m og RR HER ER ket t e a ois 2 152 Regen Power Limit ie eei ee ME Rd Fa E DE ODE SES 2 154 Resets Meters cese A ete E MeUe ber RN DUE E SR GLE Ute tier atten 2 154 Reset Runners epu uu Bin gna Luske DUE S Erg ee E eee VER IRE ne 2 154 REL Filter Grounding is ive eie eroe eer URP LC me UI ERI E 2 154 CUINA aque RUD e depu eae DA der 2 154 Scale Blocks me pu swiss dese stan E PEU n P DRE Ue pte be e MOS RE RE 2 157 Shear Pin Faults M D EE ony Soke peice 2 160 Skip brequency id se Saeed nau Sys ee QV ER RED OR Metadata nee hec i ru i sete 2 161 Sleep Mode surrer Made due eu Hs CH E cn 2 163 Speed Control Mode Regulation amp Vector Speed Feedback 0 000 c eee eee eee 2 166 speed Feedback Filter mus tie eot pce et CATES E Geis tie e Mi Sete settee 2 170 Speed Reference crga Deb desea EEUU e e eS Teas peer ad ce dte HAT dear S ue D e tA ty RC cw iru nn 2 171 Speed Regulator ska ente e WR cate e lee Ru OR Ce rece 2 176 Speed Torque Select ote oet pau AERE ee he e ete A Dat Mee E e coe 2 177 Speed Units vasre qo etti A ue a ete 2 180 AA Het ERE eae oda I UH QURE A RS 2 180 Start Permissives malene Ree ARN Le c P Rest C D ete eie 2 180 Start Upsuns gas tdeo ceri e pA dec led Acad Rom eed Vati Rcs 2 181 Stop Modes nee premens e PERO een e d
170. NTION Enabling the Sleep Wake function can cause Table 2 AA Conditions Required to Start Drive 1 23 Input After Power Up After a Drive Fault After a Stop Command Reset by Stop CF Reset by Clear HIM or TB HIM or TB Faults TB Stop Stop Closed Stop Closed Stop Closed Stop Closed Wake Signal Wake Signal Wake Signal Analog Sig gt Sleep Level 6 New Start or Run Cmd 4 New Start or Run Cmd 4 Enable Enable Closed Enable Closed Enable Closed Enable Closed Wake Signal 4 Wake Signal Wake Signal Analog Sig gt Sleep Level 6 New Start or Run Cmd 4 New Start or Run Cmd 4 Run Run Closed New Run Cmd 9 Run Closed New Run Cmd 6 Run For Wake Signal Wake Signal Wake Signal Wake Signal Run Rev When power is cycled if all conditions are present after power is restored restart will occur If all conditions are present when Sleep Wake Mode is enabled the drive will start The active speed reference is determined as explained in the User Manual The Sleep Wake function and the speed reference may be assigned to the same input Command must be issued from HIM TB or network Run Command must be cycled Signal does not need to be greater than wake level SBS SGS 2 164 Sleep Mode Timers Timers will determine the length of time required for Sleep Wake levels to produce true functions These timers will start counting when the Sleep Wake levels are satisfied and wil
171. No Peer message support DPI Host must ping every port at least every 2 sec Peripherals time out if gt 3 sec Host will wait maximum of 10ms 125k or 5ms 500k for peripheral response to ping Peripherals typical response time is 1ms Peripherals only allow one pending explicit message i e ping response or peer request at a time SCANport Host waits at least 10ms for response to ping Host cannot send more than 2 event messages including ping to a peripheral within 5ms Peripherals typical response time is 1ms DPI Response to an explicit request or fragment must occur within 1 sec or device will time out applies to Host or Peripheral Time out implies retry from beginning Maximum number of fragments per transaction is 16 Flash memory is exception with 22 fragments allowed SCANport Assume same 1 sec time out Maximum number of fragments is 16 DPI During Flash mode host stops ping but still supports status command messages at a 1 5 sec rate Drive will use 1 sec rate Data transfer occurs via explicit message as fast as possible i e peripheral request host response peripheral request etc but only between two devices SCANport No Flash mode support The Minimum Update Time MUT is based on the message type only A standard command and Datalink command could be transmitted from the same peripheral faster than the MUT and still be O K Two successive Datalink commands or standard commands will still have to be separ
172. PlLoop 2 145 may become enabled as soon as the drive goes into run If analog input signal loss is detected the PI loop is disabled DigInCfg Digln PI Control PI Status Running Stopping PI Enable PI Enable PI Enable Signal Loss Enabled H A O DiglnCfg PI Control PI Enable PI Enable 1 PI Hold The Process PI Controller has the option to hold the integrator at the current value so if some part of the process is in limit the integrator will maintain the present value to avoid windup in the integrator The logic to hold the integrator at the current value is shown in the following ladder diagram There are three conditions under which hold will turn on If a digital input is configured to provide PI Hold and that digital input is turned on then the PI integrator will stop changing Note that when a digital input is configured to provide PI Hold that takes precedence over the PI Control parameter If a digital input is not configured to provide PI Hold and the PI Hold bit in the PI Control parameter is turned on then the PI integrator will stop changing If the current limit or voltage limit is active then the PI is put into hold DigInCfg Digln PI Status PI Hold PI Hold Hold O DigInCfg PI Control PI Hold PI Hold MW Current Lmt or Volt Lmt PI Reset This feature holds the output of the integral function at zero The term anti windup is often applied to similar features It
173. Port 2 external Preset Port 3 external Speeds StartUp StartUp StartUp E ed 5 Speed Control 5 Speed Control e next two e next two Emer ere at power down parameters link parameters link lt Yes gt a high speed a high speed Go to 0 1 6 No with a high with a high 5 11 analog value analog value A Enter Enter Enter StartUp 5 16 E 5 20 y 5 27 v 5 3 5 Speed Control StartUp StartUp Note Factory default StartUp 5 Speed Control 5 Speed Control StartUp settings 5 Speed Control Enter value for Enter value for 5 Speed Control provide preset Save MOP speed Analog In 1 Hi Analog In 2 Hi Enter choice for speed operation at stop 10 0 V 10 0 V Remote HIM from the digital Yes XXX X lt yyy y XXX X lt yyy y Port 2 common inputs unless No T Port 3 you change Enter Enter EA AA e their function 5 21 5 28 y 5 4 5 17 Es StartUp StartUp 5 Speed Control 5 Speed Control StartUp DE PF70 StartUp Enter value for Enter value for 5 Speed Control i Enter 5 Speed Control Speed Ref A Hi Speed Ref A Hi Enter value for Enter Enter value for 60 0 Hz 60 0 Hz Preset Speed 1 Backup 5 12 1 MOP Rate XXX X lt yyy y XXX X lt yy y 5 0 Hz i 5 0 Hz T XXX lt yyy y StartUp XXX lt yy y Enter Enter i Preset 5 Speed Control 522 y 5 29 y 5 5 Speed 1 Make a selection 1 lt Preset Speed 1 gt StartUp StartUp StartUp i Preset Speed 2 5 Speed Control 5 Speed Control 5 Speed Control Preset Speed 3 Enter The next two The next two
174. R132K0 12 20679 599878 55216 4 8 99300 6159000 T4F8R99K3 12 13780 890985 95 79A 48 61000 3916000 T4F8R61KO 104 72300 4620000 T10F4R72K3 4 8 58200 3696000 TA4F8R58K2 104 43900 1367000 T10F4R43K9 4 8 34600 2310000 TAFBR34K6 10 4 35600 1230000 T10F4R35K6 4 8 25800 984000 T4F8R25K8 104 26000 2002000 T10F4R26K0 48 19200 586000 T4F8R19K2 104 18900 1991000 TIOFAR18K9 4 8 10900 359000 TAFSRIOK9 104 15500 1742000 T10F4R15K5 48 8880 260000 TAFSRSK88 104 11000 359000 T10F4RT1KO 48 5490 169000 T4F8R5K49 10 4 8890 801000 TIOFARBK89 48 4590 401000 T4F8R4K59 104 6040 489000 Ti0F4RGK4 48 2580 185000 TAFSR2K58 10 4 5360 329000 TIOFAR5K36 10 4 2970 95100 TIOFAR2K97 4 66084 1799627 55221 104 1500 25400 TIOFARIK5 4 44057 9441020 552 21A 104 900 24500 T10F4R900W 104 600 22900 T10F4R600W 104 300 17300 T10F4R300W 10 59339 1950414 555 17 10 59043 1950414 550 17A 10 39559 1956117 555 174 10 26569 903850 552 17 10 17713 479901 552 174 8 78475 5345909 555 18 8 52321 1559677 555 184 8 35138 2494758 552 18 8 23427 1211023 552 184 6 62551 2135190 555 19 6 42015 1981674 552 19 6 28008 1960167 552 19 54 104000 3444000 TSFAR1O4KO 5 4 51900 1953000 T5FARBIKO 5 4 48100 1845000 T5F4R48Ki 54 37700 2310000 TSF4R37K7 54 22000 717000 TSFAR22K0 5 4 20300 738000 TSFAR20K3 54 12000 699000 TS5F4RI2KO 54 7280 328000 TSFAR7K28 54 5780 169000 TS5F4R5K78 54 5080 401000 T5FAR5K8 1 Table A A Minimum Dynamic Brake Resistance A
175. S 110 20BC072 337 30 805 43 5 72 84 112 150 BUSSMANN JKS 150 20BC085 4 37 805 435 72 108 144 150 BUSSMANN_JKS 150 45 951 51 3 85 94 128 200 BUSSMANN JKS 200 20BH105 0 5 45 951 51 3 85 128 170 200 BUSSMANN_JKS 200 ss JE 1174 63 4 105 116 158 200 BUSSMANN JKS 200 20BH125 5 45 91 9 1637 96 144 168 150 55 139 8 75 5 125 138 163 225 BUSSMANN JKS 225 20BH140 1 6 155 1174 63 4 105 158 210 200 BUSSMANN JKS 200 75 158 4 85 6 140 154 210 300 BUSSMANN JKS 300 20DH170 0 6 75 158 4 85 6 140 210 280 300 BUSSMANN_JKS 300 90 192 4 103 9 170 187 255 350 BUSSMANN JKS 350 20DH205 6 90 192 4 103 9 170 255 313 350 BUSSMANN JKS 350 110 232 125 3 205 220 289 400 BUSSMANN_JKS 400 1 Also applies to P voltage class Table 2 W PF700 650 Volt DC Input Protection Devices i kw DC Input Catalog Rating Rende Output Amps Number w ND HD Amps kW Cont 1 Min 3 Sec Fuse Bussmann Style Fuse 650 Volt DC Input 20BD1P1 0 05 0 33 1 0 106 11 12 16 l6 BUSSMANN JKS 6 20BD2P1 oli 075 19 12 21 124 32 6 BUSSMANN JKS 6 20BD3P4 012 15 380 20 34 45 leo 6 BUSSMANN JKS 6 20BD5P0 0 3 2 145 129 15 0 155 175 10 BUSSMANN JKS 10 20BD8P0 0 5 13 81 152 80 88 12 15 BUSSMANN JKS 15 20BD011 0175 15 tt1 72 111 121 165
176. Set bit 0 of 320 to 0 Set bit 1 of 320 to 0 Remote Preset Digital Inputs y 4 HIM write Bal Speed Set 5 amp 6 will be for Volts amp 1 for Amps for Volts amp 1 for Amps to 90 Ref Inputs param 90 set to MOP Inc amp Go to 0 1 6 StrU A Sel Ref A Sel MOP Dec Stop 0 selection to 11 1 5 3 511 5 35 345 Start Up Start Up Start Up PE Control Remote HIM 5 Speed Control 5 Speed Control Save MOP speed No If Aln 1 Hi Lo No If Aln 2 Hi Lo Make a selection Note Factory Enter value for at power down value out of range value out of range Port 2 common gt default settings Preset Speed 1 Yes i set to min of Signal set to min of Signal Port 3 provide preset 5 0 Hz No type selected type selected Port 4 speed operation XXX X lt yyy y from the digital 5 19 I 5 26 inputs Start U PME p Start Up Upon Enter write to 5 Speed Control 5 Speed Control bit 0 of param 194 The next two The next two 5 4 Start Up Set params 90 Ref A Save MOP Ref steps scale a steps scale a 5 Speed Control Sel to Anig In 1 93 Ref 516 4 high speed to high speed to Enter value for B Sel to Preset Spd 1 a high analog a high analog Preset Speed 1 364 66 Digital In 4 6 Start Up value value 5 0Hz to Speed Sel 1 2 3 5 Speed Control XXX lt yyy y a speed 5 20 5 27 4 T Enter Yes Start Up Start Up 5 5 Start Up Backup No 5 Speed Control 5 Speed Control 5 Speed Control Enter value for Enter value for Enter
177. V 90 kW 480V 125 HP 400V 110 kW 480V 150 HP 400V 132 kW 480V 200 HP Rated Continuous Power Minimum Ohms 19 Internal Resistors Pg External Resistors Regen DC Bus Voltage 790 for 400V and 480V Drives PowerFlex 70 Va Frame Watts Frame Watts 4 PowerFlex 700 PowerFlex Product 600V 0 5 HP 600V 1 HP 600V 2 HP 600V 3 HP 600V 5 HP 600V 7 5 HP 600V 10 HP 600V 15 HP 600V 20 HP 600V 25 HP 600V 30 HP 600V 40 HP 600V 50 HP 600V 60 HP 987 5 010 000 UU 2mm 2 600V 75 HP 600V 100 HP 600V 125 HP 600V 150 HP 1135 690V 45 kW 690V 55 kW 690V 75 kW 690V 90 kW 690V 110 kW 690V 132 kW Does not include a resistor tolerance 1135 NA 18 1 18 1 18 1 6 3 6 3 e www rockwellautomation com Corporate Headquarters Rockwell Automation 777 East Wisconsin Avenue Suite 1400 Milwaukee WI 53202 5302 USA Tel 1 414 212 5200 Fax 1 414 212 5201 Headquarters for Allen Bradley Products Rockwell Software Products and Global Manufacturing Solutions Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation SA NV Vorstlaan Boulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation 27 F Citic
178. a slip estimator a high performance current limiter or regulator and the vector algorithms CURRENT FEEDBACK TOTAL Current TORQUE EST Resolver CURRENT FEEDBACK V Hz Control GATE VREF Voltage SIGNALS re Control Flux V VECTOR Vector Control SLIP FREQUENCY Slip Estimator The algorithms operate on the knowledge that motor current is the vector sum of the torque and flux producing components Values can be entered to identify the motor values or an autotune routine can be run to interrogate and identify the motor values see Autotune on page 2 31 Early versions required feedback but today performance is sensorless It offers high breakaway torque exceptional running torque a wider speed range than V Hz higher dynamic response and a fast accel feed forward selectable for low inertia loads adaptive current limit Current ELEC FREQ V Hz Inverter SPEED REF O FREQUENCY REF lt gt gt 11831 3NOYOL TORQUE EST Sensorless vector is not a torque regulating technology It does NOT independently control the flux and torque producing currents Therefore it cannot be used to regulate torque torque follower In sensorless vector control the drive maintains a constant flux current up to base speed allowing the balance of the drive available current to develop maximum motor torque By manipulating output voltage as a functi
179. able current range should have the current trip set to the minimum range that the device will not trip Manual Self Protected Type E Combination Motor Controller UL listed for 208 Wye or Delta 240 Wye or Delta 480Y 277 or 600Y 347 Not UL listed for use on 480V or 600V Delta Delta systems The AIC ratings of the Bulletin 140M Motor Protector may vary See publication 140M SG001B EN P Maximum allowable rating by US NEC Exact size must be chosen for each installation 2 106 Fuses and Circuit Breakers Table 2 V PF700 540 Volt DC Input Protection Devices i kW DC Input CONS E Rating Ratings Output Amps Number i ND HD Amps kW Cont 1 Min 3 Sec Fuse Bussmann Style Fuse 540 Volt DC Input 20BC1P3 1 0 37 0 25 1 3 07 13 14 1 9 3 BUSSMANN_JKS 3 20BC2P1 1 1075 0 55 2 1 11 21 24 32 6 BUSSMANN JKS 6 20BC3P5 ls 107 67 20 3 5 4 5 6 0 8 BUSSMANN JKS 8 20BC5P0 1 22 1 5 53 29 15 0 5 5 7 5 10 BUSSMANN JKS 10 20BC8P7 114 3 0 9 3 5 0 18 7 9 9 13 2 20 BUSSMANN JKS 20 20BC011 1 55 4 126 68 115 13 174 25 BUSSMANN_JKS 25 20BC015 1 75 55 168 9 1 154 172 231 30 BUSSMANN JKS 30 20BC022 1111 17 5 24 13 22 242 33 45 BUSSMANN JKS 45 20BC030 2 15 11 33 2 17 9 30 33 45 60 BUSSMANN_JKS 60 20BC037 2 185 15 1409 221 37 45 60 80 BUSSMANN_JKS 80 20BC043 322 185 475 25 7 43 56 74 90 BUSSMANN_JKS 90 20BC056 330 22 619 33 4 56 64 86 110 BUSSMANN JK
180. ameter 342 14 Commanded Torque e Analog Out Hi parameter 343 10 000 Volts e Analog Outl Lo parameter 344 0 000 Volts e Anlg Outl Scale parameter 354 100 0 If Analog Out1 Lo 10 000 Volts the output will be 10 0 to 10 0V DC for 100 to 100 Commanded Torque If Anlg Out1 Scale 0 0 the default scaling listed in Analog Out1 Sel will be used This would be 0 1 25V DC for 0 100 Torque or 0 800 for 0 10V DC Scale Block Analog Output Selects scaled analog output relative to the Scale Block value Values not in the Analog OutX Sel parameter list can be used to drive the analog outputs When using the Scale Block select the Scale block Out Hi and Out Lo parameters are not used Testpoint 1 Data iir os 235 476 ni Scale 1 ou 478 In Lo Out Lo Example Analog Output 2 set for 0 10V DC for Heat Sink Temp 0 100 Degrees C using Scale Block 1 Setup e Link Scalel In Value parameter 476 to Testpoint 1 Data param 235 e Testpoint 1 Sel parameter 234 2 Heat Sink Temp e Analog Out2 Sel parameter 345 20 Scale Block 1 e Analog Out2 Hi parameter 346 10 000 Volts e Analog Out2 Lo parameter 347 0 000 Volts e Scalel In Hi parameter 477 100 e Scalel In Lo parameter 478 0 2 26 Analog Outputs Parameter Controlled Analog Output Enables the analog outputs to be controlled by Datalinks to the drive 377 Anlg1 Out Setpt Default 20 000 mA 10
181. amp 5 control direction Refer to the Logic Command Word information in Appendix A of the PowerFlex 70 or 700 User Manual 4 The sign of a bipolar analog input Direction commands by various devices can be controlled using the Direction Mask See page 2 114 for details on masks Refer to Digital Inputs on page 2 61 and Analog Inputs on page 2 9 for more detail on the configuration and operating rules for direction control DPI DPI 2 83 Drive Peripheral Interface DPI is an enhancement to SCANport that provides more functions and better performance SCANport was a CAN based Master Slave protocol created to provide a standard way of connecting motor control products and optional peripheral devices together It allows multiple up to 6 devices to communicate with a motor control product without requiring configuration of the peripheral SCANport and DPI both provide two basic message types called Client Server C S and Producer Consumer P C Client Server messages are used to transfer parameter and configuration information in the background relative to other message types Producer Consumer messages are used for control and status information DPI adds a higher baud rate brand specific enabling Peer to Peer P P communication and Flash Memory programming support PowerFlex 70 amp 700 support the existing SCANport and DPI communication protocols Multiple devices of each type SCANport or DPI can be attached to and
182. an be preloaded from the auto source by enabling the Man Ref Preload parameter With the preload function enabled when the HIM requests Manual control the current value of the auto source is loaded into the HIM reference before manual control is granted This allows the manual control to begin at the same speed as the auto source creating a smooth transition If the preload function is disabled the speed will ramp to whatever manual reference was present in the HIM at the time manual control was granted e Digital Input By toggling the digital input programmed as Auto Manual the user can switch the speed reference back and forth between the active Auto source per drive programming and inputs and the designated Terminal Block manual reference When this digital input is asserted the TB will attempt to gain exclusive control Manual of the reference If granted control of the reference the specific source for the reference is determined by the parameter TB manual reference select The TB manual reference is selected in TB Man Ref Sel The choices for this parameter are Analog Input 1 Analog Input 2 MOP Level Analog Input 3 PF700 Only Pulse Input PF700 Only Encoder input PF700 Only Releasing this input sends the control back to the Auto source General Rules The following rules apply to the granting and releasing of Manual control 1 Manual control is requested through a one time r
183. and minimum input 0 Volts represents 60 Hz Analog Inputs 2 15 Input Volts Output Hertz Analog Scaling Speed Reference A Sel Analog In 1 Analog In 1 Hi Speed Ref A Hi 10V 0 Hz Analog In 1 Lo Speed Ref A Lo ov 60 Hz Configuration 5 e Anlg In Config bit 0 0 Voltage e Speed Ref A Sel Analog In 1 e Speed Ref A Hi 60 Hz e Speed Ref A Lo 0 Hz e Analog In I Hi 2 SV e Analog In 1 Lo OV This configuration is used when the input signal is 0 5 volts Here minimum input 0 Volts represents 0 Hz and maximum input 5 Volts represents 60 Hz This allows full scale operation from a 0 5 volt source Input Volts Output Hertz Analog Scaling Speed Reference A Sel Analog In 1 Analog In 1 Hi Speed Ref A Hi 5V 60 Hz Analog In 1 Lo Speed Ref A Lo ov 0Hz 2 16 Analog Inputs Configuration 6 Torque Ref e Anlg In Config bit 0 0 Voltage e Torque Ref A Sel Analog In 1 e Torque Ref A Hi 200 e Torque Ref A Lo 0 e Torque Ref A Div 1 This configuration is used when the input signal is 0 10 volts The minimum input of 0 volts represents a torque reference of 0 and maximum input of 10 volts represents a torque reference of 200 Input Volts 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Torque Ref Analog Scaling Torque Ref A Sel Analog In 1 Analog In 1 Hi T
184. anual 2 27 2 171 Auto Restart 2 29 Auto Rstrt Delay 2 29 Auto Rstrt Tries 2 29 Auto Economizer 2 91 Autotune 2 31 B Block Diagrams 2 34 Bottom View Dimensions 1 17 Bus Memory 2 60 Bus Reg Gain 2 46 Bus Reg Mode A B 2 46 Bus Regulation 2 46 Bypass Contactor 2 121 C Cable I O Analog 2 18 1 0 Digital 2 61 Index Motor Length 2 51 Cable Termination 2 124 Cable Trays 2 51 Carrier PWM Frequency 2 52 CE Conformity 2 53 Requirements 2 53 Circuit Breakers 2 100 Clear Fault Owner 2 127 Coast 2 201 Compensation 2 152 Conduit 2 51 Contactor Output 2 124 Contactors Bypass 2 121 Input 2 121 Output 2 121 Copy Cat 2 55 Current Limit 2 56 Current Lmt Gain 2 56 Current Lmt Sel 2 9 2 56 2 160 Current Lmt Val 2 56 D Datalinks 2 58 DC Brake Level 2 201 DC Brake Lvl Sel 2 201 DC Brake Time 2 201 DC Braking 2 201 DC Bus Voltage 2 60 Decel Mask 2 114 Decel Owner 2 127 Decel Time 2 60 Decel Time 1 2 2 60 Derating Guidelines 1 3 Dig Out Setpt 2 82 Dig Outx Level 2 80 Dig Outx OffTime 2 81 Dig Outx OnTime 2 81 Digital Input Conflicts 2 75 Digital Inputs 2 61 Digital Inputs Group 2 62 2 63 Digital Inx Sel 2 62 2 63 Digital Output Timers 2 81 Digital Outputs 2 78 Digital Outputs Group 2 62 2 79 Digital Outx Sel 2 8 2 78 2 79 Dimensions Index 2 Bottom View 1 17 Mounting PowerFlex 700 1 13 1 15 PowerFlex 70 Bottom View 1 8 Mounting 1 7 Dir
185. applied to the motor Digital Input Configuration Inputs are configured for the required function by setting a Digital Inx Sel parameter one for each input These parameters cannot be changed while the drive is running 2 62 Digital Inputs PowerFlex 700 Digital Input Selection 7 E a e og mn E a 361 362 363 364 365 366 Digital In1 Sel Default 4 Stop CF Digital In2 Sel Default 5 Start Digital In3 Sel Default 18 Auto Manual Digital In4 Sel Default 15 Speed Sel 1 Digital In5 Sel Default 16 Speed Sel 2 Digital In6 Sel 11 Default 17 Speed Sel 3 Selects the function for the digital inputs Options 0 Not ccm 1 1 Enable 1 Speed Select Inputs 2 Clear Faults CF 3 2 1 AutoReference Source 3 Aux Fault 0 o 0 Reference A 4 Stop CF 10 0 0 1 BERG E 5 Start 5 9 0 0 reset Speed 2 0 1 1 Preset Speed 3 e ao 1 0 0 Preset Speed 4 1 0 1 Preset Speed 5 8 Run Forward 6 1 11 0 PresetSpeed6 9 Run Reverse 6 1 1 1 Preset Speed 7 10 Jog Jog 2 5 To access Preset Speed 1 set Speed 11 Jog Forward 8 Ref x Sel to Preset Speed 1 12 Jog Reverse 6 Type 2 Alarms Some digital input 13 Stop Mode B programming may cause conflicts 14 Bus Reg Md B that will result in a Type 2 alarm 1517 Speed Sel 1 3 1 Example Digital Inf Sel set to 5
186. at the unconfigured inputs as if they are permanently open As an example the table below describes what reference selections can be made if Speed Select 1 is the only configured input function This 2 70 Digital Inputs configuration allows a single input to choose between Speed Ref A Sel and Speed Ref B Sel Speed Select 1 Selected Parameter that determines Reference Open Speed Ref A Sel Closed Speed Ref B Sel As another example describes what reference selections can be made if the Speed Select 3 and Speed Select 2 input functions are configured but Speed Select 1 is not Speed Select 3 Speed Select2 Selected Parameter that determines reference Open Open Speed Ref A Sel Open Closed Preset Speed 2 Closed Open Preset Speed 4 Closed Closed Preset Speed 6 Auto Manual The Auto Manual facility is essentially a higher priority reference select It allows a single control device to assume exclusive control of reference select irrespective of the reference select digital inputs reference select DPI commands the reference mask and the reference owner If the Auto Manual input function is closed then the drive will use one of the analog inputs defined by TB Man Ref Sel as the reference ignoring the normal reference selection mechanisms This mode of reference selection is called Terminal Block Manual Reference Selection Mode If this input func
187. ated by the MUT however 2 86 Drive Overload Drive Overload The drive thermal overload has two primary functions The first requirement is to make sure the drive is not damaged by abuse The second is to perform the first in a manor that does not degrade the performance as long the drive temperature and current ratings are not exceeded The purpose of is to protect the power structure from abuse Any protection for the motor and associated wiring is provided by a Motor Thermal Overload feature The drive will monitor the temperature of the power module based on a measured temperature and a thermal model of the IGBT As the temperature rises the drive may lower the PWM frequency to decrease the switching losses in the IGBT If the temperature continues to rise the drive may reduce current limit to try to decrease the load on the drive If the drive temperature becomes critical the drive will generate a fault If the drive is operated in a low ambient condition the drive may exceed rated levels of current before the monitored temperature becomes critical To guard against this situation the drive thermal overload also includes an inverse time algorithm When this scheme detects operation beyond rated levels current limit may be reduced or a fault may be generated Operation The drive thermal overload has two separate protection schemes an overall RMS protection based on current over time and an IGBT junction thermal manager based o
188. cale Block2 Out Note that when PI Reference Sel and PI Feedback Sel are set to use the scale blocks the Scale x Out Hi and Scale x Out Lo parameters are not active Instead PI Reference Hi and PI Reference Lo or PI Feedback Hi and PI Feedback Lo determine the scaling for the output of the scale block See Example Configuration 3 Example Configuration 1 Use the scale blocks to add a speed trim as a percentage of the speed reference instead of as a percent of full speed Analog In 2 will be used to provide a 0 10V DC trim signal For example when the commanded speed is 800 RPM the maximum trim with 10V DC at Analog In 2 will be 80 RPM If the commanded speed is 1800 RPM the maximum trim will be 180 RPM Scale1 In Value Analog In2 Val Volts 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 180 Preset Speed 1 RPM Parameter Settings Parameter Value Description Trim In Select 11 Preset 1 Preset 1 becomes the trim speed Scale1 In Hi 10 0 V Hi value of Analog In 2 Scale1 In Lo OV Lo value of Analog In 2 Scale1 Out Lo 0 RPM Lo value of desired Trim Scale2 In Hi 1800 RPM Hi value of Commanded Speed Max Speed Scale2 In Lo 0 RPM Lo value of Commanded Speed Scale2 Out Hi 180 RPM 1096 of Max Speed Scale2 Out Lo 0 RPM Corresponds to lo value of Commanded Speed Parameter Links Destination Parameter Scale1 In Value Source Parameter Analog In2 Value Description We are scaling Analog
189. can be left at factory default 50 When using dynamic braking or a regenerative supply Regen Power Lim can be set to the most negative limit possible 800 When the user has dynamic braking or regenerative supply but wishes to limit the power to the dynamic brake or regenerative supply Regen Power Lim can be set to a level specified by the user The Elapsed kW Hour meter and or Elapsed Time meter parameters are reset when parameter 200 is set to a value not equal to zero After the reset has occurred this parameter automatically returns to a value of zero 200 Reset Meters Ready Resets selected meters to zero Elapsed Time 0 Ready 1 Reset kW Hour Meter 2 Reset Elapsed Time Meter Refer to Auto Restart Reset Run on page 2 29 Refer to Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INO01 The S Curve function of the PowerFlex family of drives allows control of the jerk component of acceleration and deceleration through user adjustment of the S Curve parameter Jerk is the rate of change of acceleration and controls the transition from steady state speed to acceleration or deceleration and vice versa By adjusting the percentage of S Curve applied to the normal accel decel ramps the ramp takes the shape of an S This allows a smoother transition that produces less mechanical stress and smoother control for light loads Linear Accel amp Decel Acceleratio
190. can be used in the equations Total Inertia J 6 2 Ib ft 0 261 kg m This value can be in 1b ft or Wk but must be converted into kg m before it can be used in the equations Deceleration Time t t 15 seconds Period of Cycle t 40 seconds 2 10 Determining Dynamic Brake Requirements Va 790 Volts This was known because the drive is rated at 480 Volts rms If the drive were rated 230 Volts rms then Vg 395 Volts All of the preceding data and calculations were made from knowledge of the application under consideration The total inertia was given and did not need further calculations as outlined in Step 2 J Peak Braking Power P M 3 l p 0261 186 92 186 92 0 _ p gt tt 15 608 6 watts Note that this is 8 1 of rated power and is less than the maximum drive limit of 150 current limit This calculation is the result of Step 3 and determines the peak power that must be dissipated by the Dynamic Brake Resistor t t P r O 0 Average Braking Power P AS ty 2 Op EE 20 18892 0 114 1 watts This is the result of calculating the average power dissipation as outlined in Step 5 Verify that the sum of the power ratings of the Dynamic Brake Resistors chosen in Step 4 is greater than the value calculated in Step 5 For an internal resistor refer to Table A A to determine the continuous power rating of the resistor in the given drive you are using Skip this cal
191. cess energy to the Dynamic Brake Resistor A Chopper contains three significant power components The Chopper Transistor is an Isolated Gate Bipolar Transistor IGBT The Chopper Transistor is either ON or OFF connecting the Dynamic Brake Resistor to the DC bus and dissipating power or isolating the resistor from the DC bus The most important rating is the collector current rating of the Chopper Transistor that helps to determine the minimum resistance value used for the Dynamic Brake Resistor Understanding How Dynamic Braking Works 1 3 Chopper Transistor Voltage Control regulates the voltage of the DC bus during regeneration The average values of DC bus voltages are Transistor Turn On Maximum Power Calculation Drive Input Voltage Voltage Voltage 208 375V DC 395V DC 240 375V DC 395V DC 400 750V DC 790V DC 480 750V DC 790V DC 575 937 5V DC 987V DC 600 937 5V DC 987V DC 600 Frame 5 amp 6 1076V DC 1135V DC 690 1076V DC 1135V DC Voltage dividers reduce the DC bus voltage to a value that is usable in signal circuit isolation and control The DC bus feedback voltage from the voltage dividers is compared to a reference voltage to actuate the Chopper Transistor The Freewheel Diode FWD in parallel with the Dynamic Brake Resistor allows any magnetic energy stored in the parasitic inductance of that circuit to be safely dissipated during turn off of the Chopper Transistor Resistor The Resistor d
192. ch adapters can control the drive If the bit for an adapter is set to thru 297 0 the adapter will have no control functions except for stop a 05 0 DN IAS SESEES xIxixlxlxixixixixlxl11117141 1 1 1 Control Permitted ris 1413 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 Control Masked Bit Factory Default Bit Values 277 Start Mask See Logic Mask 288 ES Controls which adapters can issue start HE commands 3 278 Jog Mask See Logic Mask 288 Controls which adapters can issue jog thru 297 commands 9 279 Direction Mask See Logic Mask 288 9 Controls which adapters can issue thru SE forward reverse direction commands 297 E 280 Reference Mask See Logic Mask 288 2 gt Controls which adapters can select an he 2 o alternate reference Speed Ref A B Sel 9 5 E or Preset Speed 1 7 fa 231 Accel Mask See Logic Mask 288 Controls which adapters can select thru Accel Time 1 2 297 l 282 Decel Mask See Logic Mask 288 Controls which adapters can select thru Decel Time 1 2 297 283 Fault Clr Mask See Logic Mask 288 Controls which adapters can clear a fault ae 284 MOP Mask See Logic Mask 288 Controls which adapters can issue MOP a commands to the drive 285 Local Mask See Logic Mask 288 thru ES Controls which adapters are allowed to 297 take exclusive control of drive logic commands except stop Exclusive local control can only be taken while the drive is
193. coho PERPE eR Read Ry ege UE 2 107 Input DEVICES DTE 2 108 Input Modes L se eerte eg ees WR RS Kk Wana A gly C A a doge E ek gis dk s eue eq 2 109 Input Power Conditioning sess 0 einkun nenni E iE Enea e i eee eee 2 110 JOZ m 2 110 AN GUAGE REP seating E eng RA A AE A sae aes 2 111 Lanking Parameters eel ohana C EXER ERE p dE TR ee oe RES UE e EST UN WR AE 2 112 MASKS PEEL LCD 2 114 Table of Contents Motor Control sac cw ws stein e babe Geeta Ria ebd C HUE EF RR EAE 2 116 Motor Namepl te segs nr Pu AA e S EE 2 117 Motor Overload 4 232v keV Ra tussle dee Ke I px UDUPE ESSE PH CY DEBERE DS I 2 118 Motor Start Stop Precautions 1 2 0 00 me 2 121 MOI rr QUARE SEG aat OIG ses eed Bh RETIA See Ra 2 122 Notch Filter ussresorestrdst ikka akser EE eee see serene hee ER oa 2 122 Output CUTE usse egent s tc eg Rp eet hse Ia le e Mena bse te Cece ia e ee are 2 124 Output DEVICES acii Coen t e A E ue REIR TRU Cp eee coe Side Pap EP ns Ola nants AR 2 124 Output Frequency i ee A e t eee ee IA E RO NE o IR HR RR e RAE 2 125 Output Power tas Lauget ert ad bue Sp M CY eden Re afe je 2 125 Output Voltage ur os Shale rete ph deles dt ke edda Sh see Aes 2 125 Overspeed Limit spor do dee e e ar eR ROS ER edda Oa ad Bo vata 2 126 OWBCES aS Ee Lens eas e aoc aed ee Ke da eine Sh seh aes 2 127 Parameter Access Level eeu ek Mad ema ei Re eanet ba de Slots Se 2 129 PET tele oto eee tia pta e et E cea ip e quf rea dra YE seda Se S See 2 129 POWE
194. commended types listed below If available amp ratings do not match the tables provided the closest fuse rating that exceeds the drive rating should be chosen e IEC BS88 British Standard Parts 1 amp 21 EN60269 1 Parts 1 amp 2 type gG or equivalent should be used e UL UL Class CC T RK1 or J must be used Circuit Breakers The non fuse listings in the following tables include both circuit breakers inverse time or instantaneous trip and 140M Self Protecting Motor Starters If one of these is chosen as the desired protection method the following requirements apply e EC and UL Both types of devices are acceptable for IEC and UL installations 1 Typical designations include but may not be limited to the following Parts 1 amp 2 AC AD BC BD CD DD ED EFS EF FF FG GF GG GH Fuses and Circuit Breakers 2 101 Table 2 M PF70 208 240 Volt AC Input Recommended Protection Devices Dual Circuit Motor Drive 3 HP Input Element Time Non Time Breaker Circuit Catalog E Rating Ratings Output Amps Delay Fuse Delay Fuse 4 Protector 8 140M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Range 71 8 Number E ND HD Amps kVA Cont 1 Min 3 Sec Min 2 Max 9 Min Max Max 9 Max Available Catalog Numbers 9 208 Volt
195. culation if an external dynamic brake resistor will be used In this case a 10 HP PowerFlex 70 drive has an internal resistor rated for 40 continuous watts Because P4 114 1 watts and is greater than the resistor s continuous watts rating the drive will eventually trip on a Resistor Over Heated fault Calculate the minimum cycle time in seconds using the formula in Section 3 number 2 B CE 114 1 seconds 40 Recalculate the average power dissipation Par Grae FE Freese 0 vats Determining Dynamic Brake Requirements 2 11 If the cycle cannot be adjusted the decel time must be extended or the system inertia lowered to reduce the average load on the resistor Another option is to use an external resistor Calculate the Percent Average Load You will need this number to calculate the Percent Peak Load P Percent Average Load AL 100 x B db 40 AL 100 x Y 100 10 Important The value of AL should not exceed 100 This is the result of the calculation outlined in Step 6 Record this value on page 3 1 P Percent Peak Load PL 100x 2 Pa 6086 n1o PL 100x gt 1521 This is the result of the calculation outlined in Step 6 Record this value on page 3 1 Now that the values of AL and PL have been calculated they can be used to determine whether an internal or external resistor can be used Since the internal resistor package offers significant cost and space advantages it wil
196. d automatically if the user enters the motor nameplate data through the Start up menu of an LCD HIM The number of motor poles is defined by 120f where P Ag P motor poles f base motor frequency Hz N base motor speed RPM P is rounded up to the nearest whole even number 2 118 Motor Overload Motor Overload The motor thermal overload uses an IT algorithm to model the temperature of the motor The curve is modeled after a Class 10 protection thermal overload relay that produces a theoretical trip at 600 motor current in ten 10 seconds and continuously operates at full motor current Motor Overload Curve 100000 2 1000 S Cold E p ws Hot 2 100 10 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 Full Load Amps Motor nameplate FLA programming is used to set the overload feature This parameter which is set in the start up procedure is adjustable from 0 200 of drive rating and should be set for the actual motor FLA rating Setting the correct bit in Fault Config x to zero disables the motor thermal overload Most multimotor applications using one drive and more than one motor will require the MTO to be disabled since the drive would be unable to distinguish each individual motor s current and provide protection Operation of the overload is based on three parameters Motor NP FLA Motor OL Factor and Motor OL Hertz
197. d Desired BW Speed Desired BW sets the speed loop bandwidth and determines the dynamic behavior of the speed loop As bandwidth increases the speed loop becomes more responsive and can track a faster changing speed reference Adjusting this parameter will cause the drive to calculate and change Ki Speed Loop and Kp Speed Loop gains Total Inertia Total Inertia represents the time in seconds for a motor coupled to a load to accelerate from zero to base speed at rated motor torque The drive calculates Total Inertia during the autotune inertia procedure Adjusting this parameter will cause the drive to calculate and change Ki Speed Loop and Kp Speed Loop gains Speed Torque Select 2 177 Speed T orque Select Speed Torque Mod is used to choose the operating mode for the drive The drive can be programmed to operate as a velocity regulator a torque regulator or a combination of the two Refer to 2 36 Figure 2 36 Speed Torque Mod 0 0 Spd Reg PI Out 1 1 Scale Ref A Hi Min LE Torque Ref A Sel H 3 G2 Ref A Lo T Max 4 Torq Ref A Div 430 Toa 5 Scale 432 Ref B Hi U 5 Torque Ref B Sel LO X T 433 Ref B Lo abs Min Torq Ref B Mult 434 As shown Speed Torque Mod parameter 88 is used to select the mode of operation Zero torque current is allowed w
198. d Flux Vector Custom V Hz SVC with SVC with without Flux Vector Torque Mode with Slip Comp Slip Comp Feedback Feedback with Feedback Speed Regulation 0 5 0 5 0 1 0 1 0 001 of base speed Operating Speed Range 40 1 80 1 80 1 120 1 1000 1 Speed Bandwidth 10 rad sec 20 rad sec 20 rad sec 50 rad sec 250 rad sec Volts Hertz Volts Hertz operation creates a fixed relationship between output voltage and output frequency The relationship can be defined in two ways 1 Fan Pump When this option is chosen the relationship is 1 X2 Therefore for full frequency full voltage is supplied and for 21 2 rated frequency 1 4 voltage is applied etc This pattern closely matches the torque requirement of a variable torque load centrifugal fan or pump load increases as speed increases and offers the best energy savings for these applications A Maximum Voltage 4 5 E Base Voltage Nameplate Run Boost or Base Frequency Maximum Nameplate Frequency 2 Custom Custom Volts Hertz allows a wide variety of patterns using linear segments The default configuration is a straight line from zero to rated voltage and frequency This is the same volts hertz ratio that the motor 2 206 Torque Performance Modes would see if it were started across the line As seen in the diagram below the volts hertz ratio can be changed to provide increased t
199. d and the sum of the two Speed Limit limits is output This sum Speed Limit is compared to Maximum Frequency and an alarm is initiated which prevents operation if the Speed Limit exceeds Maximum Frequency Figure 2 27 Typical V Hz Curve for Full Custom with Speed Frequency Limits Allowable Output Frequency Range Bus Regulation or Current Limit aad lt Allowable Output Frequency Range Normal Operation gt Allowable Speed Reference Range I I I I I I i i I 1 Maximum 4 Voltage T Motor NP JJ JA I ER ke Frequency Trim l i o due to Speed 6 d Ej 1 Control Mode OGGE a S lr ul Limit i Break I a Voltage 1 gt gt E I I i Start i Boost Run 1 Boost 0 Minimum Break Motor NP Hz Maximum Output Maximum Speed Frequency Speed Frequency Frequency Frequency Limit Note 1 The lower limit on this range can be 0 depending on the value of Speed Adder Owners Owners 2 127 An owner is a parameter that contains one bit for each of the possible DPI or SCANport adapters The bits are set high value of 1 when its adapter is currently issuing that command and set low when its adapter is not issuing that command Ownership falls into two categories Exclusive Only one adapter at a time can issue the command and only one bit in the parameter will be high For example it is not a
200. ded by Torq Ref A Div Torque Ref B Sel parameter 431 is scaled by Torque Ref B Hi and Torque Ref B Lo Then multiplied by Torq Ref B Mult The final torque reference in the Torque Mode is the sum of scaled Torque Ref A and scaled Torque Ref B Torque Ref B Sel Min Mode Max Mode This operating mode compares the speed and torque commands The algebraically minimum value is used This mode can be thought of as a Speed Limited Adjustable Torque operation Instead of operating the drive as a pure torque regulator the runaway condition can be avoided by limiting the speed A winder is a good example for the application of the Min Spd Trq operating mode Max mode would be used if both speed and torque are negative Figure 2 38 illustrates how min mode operates The drive starts out operating as a torque regulator The torque reference causes the motor to operate at 308rpm The speed reference is 468rpm so the minimum is to operate as a torque regulator While operating in torque regulation the load decreases and the motor speeds up Notice the torque command has not changed When the speed regulator comes out of saturation it clamps the speed and now the drive operates as a speed regulator The At Speed Relay then closes Speed Torque Select 2 179 Figure 2 38 Internal Torque Command Speed Feedback pope pe huic 308 RPM a Sum Mode Confi
201. des the ability for the drive to automatically perform a fault reset followed by a start attempt without user or application intervention This allows remote or unattended operation Only certain faults are allowed to be reset Certain faults Type 2 that indicate possible drive component malfunction are not resettable Caution should be used when enabling this feature since the drive will attempt to issue its own start command based on user selected programming Configuration This feature is configured through two user parameters 174 Auto Rstrt Tries Default 0 175 Sets the maximum number of times the Min Max 0 9 drive attempts to reset a fault and restart Display 1 ATTENTION Equipment damage and or personal injury may result A if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application Do Not use this function without considering applicable local national and international codes standards regulations or industry guidelines 17 ol Auto Rstrt Delay Default 1 0 Secs 174 Sets the time between restart attempts Min Max 0 5 30 0 Secs when Auto Rstrt Tries is set to a value Display 0 1 Secs other than zero Setting Auto Rstrt Tries to a value greater than zero will enable the Auto Restart feature Setting the number of tries equal to zero will disable the feature The Auto Rstrt Delay parameter sets the time in seconds between each reset run attempt The
202. e des Enable Digital Out1 Sel becomes 19 Motor Overld 048 the brake control and any other 20 Power Loss selection will be ignored 2126 Input 1 6 Link 8 184 6 Refer to Option Definitions in User 27 Pl Enable Manual 28 PI Hold 29 Drive Overload 30 Param Cntr 4 6 979 Digital Outputs 2 79 PowerFlex 70 Digital Output Selection 380 Digital Out1 Sel Default 1 Fault 381 384 Digital Out2 Sel 4 Run 385 Selects the drive status that will energize Options 1 Fault 389 a CRx output relay 2 Alarm 382 3 Ready ane Dim 390 1 Contacts shown on page 1 14 of the 4 Run 383 User Manual are in drive powered S Forward Run state with condition not present For 6 Reverse Run functions such as Fault and Alarm 7 Auto Restart 2 the normal relay state is energized and 8 Powerup Run N O N C contact wiring may have to um EA 47 SE ne reversed 11 At Current 002 E EK 12 At Torque 001 3 13 At Temp 003 Lo 14 At Bus Volts 004 tg 15 At PI Error 218 Ex 16 DC Braking 012 Z 17 Curr Limit 137 18 Economize 157 19 Motor Overld 147 20 Power Loss 053 21 Input 1 Link 048 22 Input 2 Link 184 23 Input 3 Link 24 Input 4 Link 25 Input 5 Link 26 Input 6 Link The selections can be divided into three types of annunciation 1 The relay changes state due to a part
203. e l 6 26 Start Up aD Ind Start Up Easy Configure More A Dig Inputs pas iins NS A Dig Inputs info Easy Configure te d Enter choice for i Digital In 6 i des asks questions 7 Done Digital In4 i Digital In3 Sel before writing an cds MOF to digital ins 6 23 nc Dec 7 Custom Configure Done j Start Up allows you to Digital In5 Yes No program each i a Dig Mas ise nter choice for 6 3 n 6 4 B digital input s Go to 6 1 B Dig Digital In4 Sel Start Up Start Up Outputs 6 24 A Dig Inputs A Dig Inputs Digital In6 Digital Inputs Digital Inputs Start Up 1 4 will be set 1 6 will be set A Dig Inputs to defaults to defaults B Enter choice for 6 5 Digital In5 Sel Start Up Y A Dig Inputs 6 25 Is REVERSE P required from Start Up digital inputs A Dig Inputs Backup Yes Enter choice for No Digital In6 Sel I 1 No Backup B 66 B 67 Start Up Start Up A Dig Inputs A Dig Inputs 2 wire control 2 wire control uses a contact Yes uses a contact that acts as that acts as both STOP Open both STOP Open amp Run Closed amp Run Closed 3 wire control 3 wire control uses 2 contacts uses 2 contacts one for START one for START amp one for STOP amp one for STOP 6 8 B Y Start Up 6 13 v B A Dig Inputs Start Up Enter choice for More A Dig Inputs More B 6 16 Control Method info Enter choice for Info lt 3 wire gt 7 Control Method Start Up 2 wire 3 wire A Dig Input
204. e through the pulse input because of its high speed capability Normally this hardware power loss input will provide a power loss signal before the bus drops to less than Vopen The drive determine a power loss has occurred if the pulse input is de energized or the bus voltage drops below Vopen If the drive is running the inertia ride through function is activated The load is decelerated at just the correct rate so that the energy absorbed from the mechanical load balances the losses and bus voltage is regulated to the value Vmem If the output frequency drops to zero or if the bus voltage drops below Vopen or if any of the run permit inputs are de energized the inverter output is disabled and the motor coasts The power loss alarm in Drive Alarm 1 is set and the power loss timer starts The Alarm bit in Drive Status 1 is set if the Power Loss bit in Alarm Config 1 is set The drive faults with a F003 Power Loss fault if the power loss timer exceeds Power Loss Time and the Power Loss bit in E238 Fault Config 1 is set The drive faults with a F004 UnderVoltage fault if the bus voltage falls below Vmin and the UnderVoltage bit in Fault Config 1 is set The pre charge relay opens if the bus voltage drops below Vopen and closes if the bus voltage rises above Vclose Preset Frequency Process PI Loop Preset Frequency 2 137 If power recovers while the drive is still in inertia ride through the
205. e Voltage Drive Frame s Figure Number 240 AandB 31 240 C 33 240 D 34 400 480 A and B 35 400 480 C 3 6 400 480 D 37 OR Power Curves for PowerFlex 700 Internal DB Resistors Drive Voltage Drive Frame Figure Number 400 480 0 3 13 400 480 1 3 14 400 480 2 3 15 400 480 3 Uses external DB resistors only Refer to Section 4 4 Plot the point where the value of AL calculated in Step 5 of Section 2 and the desired deceleration time tz t intersect 5 Plot the value of PL calculated in Step 6 of Section 2 on the vertical axis 0 seconds 6 Connect AL at tz t2 and PL at O seconds with a straight line This line is the power curve described by the motor as it decelerates to minimum speed Evaluating the Internal Resistor 3 3 If the line connecting AL and PL lies entirely to the left of the Power Curve then the capability of the internal resistor is sufficient for the proposed application Figure 3 1 Example of an Acceptable Resistor Power Curve 3000 2800 480V Frame C 2600 2400 2200 2000 9 1800 amp 1600 3 uoo PL Peak Percent Load 152196 BS e 1200 1000 800 Tue 600 400 o S AL Average Percent Load 100 200 BEL LIE y Decel Time 15 0 Seconds 0 A 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
206. e are updated with the value from the data table Accel Time P140 10 0 seconds value from output image table Word 3 Decel Time P142 13 3 seconds value from output image table Word 4 Any time these values need to be changed the new values are entered into the data table and the parameters are updated on the next PLC I O scan Datalinks 2 59 Rules for Using Datalinks 1 1 A Datalink consists of 4 words 2 for Datalink x IN and 2 for Datalink x Out They cannot be separated or turned on individually 2 Only one communications adapter can use each set of Datalink parameters in a PowerFlex drive If more than one communications adapter is connected to a single drive multiple adapters must not try to use the same Datalink 3 Parameter settings in the drive determine the data passed through the Datalink mechanism 4 When you use a Datalink to change a value the value is not written to the Non Volatile Storage EEprom memory The value is stored in volatile memory RAM and lost when the drive loses power 32 Bit Parameters using 16 Bit Datalinks To read and or write a 32 bit parameter using 16 bit Datalinks typically both Datalinks A B C D are set to the 32 bit parameter For example to read Parameter 09 Elapsed MWh both Datalink A1 and A2 are set to 9 Datalink A1 will contain the least significant word LSW and Datalink A2 the most significant word MSW In this example the parameter 9 value of 5 8MWh
207. e capable of communicating in 7 languages English Spanish German Italian French Portuguese and Dutch All drive functions and information displayed on an LCD HIM are shown in the selected language The desired language can be selected several different ways e On initial drive power up a language choice screen appears e The language choice screen can also be recalled at any time to change to a new language This is accomplished by pressing the Alt key followed by the Lang key e The language can also be changed by selecting the Language parameter 201 Note that this parameter is not functional when using an LED HIM 2 112 Linking Parameters Linking Parameters Vector Control Option Only Most parameter values are entered directly by the user However certain parameters can be linked so the value of one parameter becomes the value of another For Example the value of an analog input can be linked to Accel Time 2 Rather than entering an acceleration time directly via HIM the link allows the value to change by varying the analog signal This can provide additional flexibility for advanced applications Each link has 2 components e Source parameter sender of information e Destination parameter receiver of information Most parameters can be a source of data for a link except parameter values that contain an integer representing an ENUM text choice These are not allowed since the inte
208. e currents will be generated An overcurrent trip may result if the current limiter cannot react quickly enough The likelihood of an overcurrent trip is further increased if there is a residual flux back emf on the spinning motor when the drive starts Even if the current limiter is fast enough to prevent an overcurrent trip it will take an unacceptable amount of time for synchronization to occur and for the motor to reach its desired frequency In addition larger mechanical stress is placed on the application increasing downtime and repair costs while decreasing productivity In Flying Start mode the drive s response to a start command will be to identify the motor s speed and apply a voltage that is synchronized in frequency amplitude and phase to the back emf of the spinning motor The motor will then accelerate to the desired frequency This process will prevent an overcurrent trip and significantly reduce the time for the motor to reach its desired frequency Since the motor is picked up smoothly at its rotating speed and ramped to the proper speed little or no mechanical stress is present Configuration Flying Start is activated by setting the Flying Start En parameter to Enable 169 Flying Start En Default 0 Disabled Enables disables the function which Options 0 Disabled reconnects to a spinning motor at actual 1 Enabled RPM when a start command is issued The gain can be adjusted
209. e exception is the stop condition which can always be asserted from any connected control device The drive must be stopped in order for the terminal block to gain complete local control Important Local Control is an Exclusive Ownership function see Owners This means that only one control device terminal block DPI device HIM etc at a time 1s allowed take local control If another device is not currently the local owner as indicated by Local Owner and the terminal block bit is set in the Local Mask and Logic Mask parameters the terminal block becomes local owner as soon as the Local Control input function is closed e Clear Faults The Clear Faults digital input function allows an external device to reset drive faults through the terminal block An open to closed transition on this input will cause the current fault if any to be reset If this input is configured at the same time as Stop Clear Faults then only the Clear Faults input can actually cause faults to be reset The terminal block bit must be set in the Fault Mask and Logic Mask parameters in order for faults to be reset from the terminal block e Enable If this input is closed then the drive can run start permissive If open the drive will not start If the drive is already running when this input is opened the drive will coast and indicate not enabled on the HIM if present This is not considered a fault condition
210. e positive torque limit from the power limit section and Pos Torque Limit The drive s torque reference is also limited by the maximum value closest to zero of the negative torque limit from the power limit section and Neg Torque Limit from Torque Notch Filter Motor Torque Ref Toe 440 4 7 Limi Control Status Torque Pos Limit 435 Speed Feedback 25 Rated Volts 27 mm DC Bus Memory 13 Bus Min Bus Reg Mode A 161 Voltage Bus Reg Mode B C Regulator i DC Bus Voltage 12 Regen Power Lim 153 Max Torque Neg Limit 436 24 Torque Performance Modes Torque Performance Modes 2 205 Torque Perf Mode or Motor Cntl Sel Vector selects the output mode of the drive The choices are e Custom Volts Hertz Used in multi motor or synchronous motor applications e Fan Pump Volts Hertz Used for centrifugal fan pump variable torque installations for additional energy savings e Sensorless Vector Used for most general constant torque applications Provides excellent starting acceleration and running torque e Sensorless Vector w Economizer Used in constant torque applications that have significant idle time time spent at greatly reduced load to offer additional energy conservation The following table shows the performance differences between V Hz and Sensorless Vector Fan Pump an
211. e responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss gt Important Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you e identify a hazard e avoid the hazard e recognize the consequences Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the drive to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present Burn Hazard labels may be located on or inside the drive to alert people that surfaces may be at dangerous temperatures SIENCECM Indicates that the information presented is specific to the Standard Control Option i pb amp Vector This information only applies to PowerFlex 700 drives with the Vector Control option Appli
212. e the MOP mask asserted and the logic mask asserted In the case of the terminal block if the MOP increment or MOP decrement function is assigned to a digital input then the act of asserting either of those inputs will cause the TB to try and gain ownership of the MOP inc dec reference change Ownership of the MOP function can be obtained even if the MOP reference is not being used to control the drive If ownership is granted the owner has the right to inc dec the MOP reference Whether this reference is the active speed reference for the drive is separately selected via TB reference select or Ref A B select through DPI The MOP Frequency parameter is an output which shows the active value of the MOP reference in Hz x 10 MOP handling with Direction Mode If the Direction Mode is configured for Unipolar then the MOP decrement will clamp at zero not allowing the user to generate a negative MOP reference that is clamped off by the reference generation When Direction Mode Bipolar the MOP reference will permit the decrement function to produce negative values If the drive is configured for Direction Mode Bipolar and then is changed to Unipolar the MOP reference will also be clamped at zero if it was less than zero See Torque Performance Modes on page 2 205 Motor Nameplate Motor Nameplate 2 117 Motor NP Volts The motor nameplate base voltage defines the output voltage when operating at rated cur
213. e volts hertz ratio 5 Hz x 0 2 Volts Hz 1 Volt 15 Hz x 0 2 Volts Hz 3 Volts Here the deadband is shifted due to the 50 Hz limitation The command frequency from 0 to 3 volts on the analog input will be 15 Hz After 3 volts the frequency will increase at a rate of 0 2 volts per hertz up to 9 volts After 9 volts on the analog input the frequency command will remain at 45 Hz Analog Outputs Analog Outputs 2 21 Explanation Each drive has one or more analog outputs that can be used to annunciate a wide variety of drive operating conditions and values The user selects the analog output source by setting Analog Out Sel 342 Analog Outi Sel Default O Output Freq 001 345 Analog Out2 Sel Options See Table 002 Selects the source of the value that drives the analog output 005 Analog Out1 Lo Value d Options Param 341 Signed Param 341 Absolute Analog Out Hi Value 012 0 Output Freq Maximum Speed 0 Hz Maximum Speed 135 1 Command Freq Maximum Speed 0 Hz Maximum Speed 1 Command Spd Maximum Speed 0 Hz RPM Maximum Speed 196 2 Output Amps 0 Amps 0 Amps 200 Rated 137 eo 3 Torque Amps 200 Rated 0 Amps 200 Rated 138 5 4 Flux Amps 0 Amps 0 Amps 200 Rated 220 a a 5 Output Power 0 kW 0 kW 200 Rated 219 gt 5 6 Output Volts 0 Volts 0 Volts 120 Rated Input Volts e gt 7 DC Bus Volts 0 Volts 0 Volts 200 Ra
214. econd increments from 0 0 seconds to 3600 0 seconds In its factory default condition when no decel select inputs are closed and no time bits are 1 the default deceleration time is Decel Time 1 and the rate is determined as above Digital Inputs Digital Inputs 2 61 Cable Selection Refer to Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INOOI for detailed information on Cable Selection for Digital Inputs Wiring Examples Refer to the appropriate PowerFlex user manual for wiring diagrams PowerFlex 70 Each digital input has a maximum response pass through function execution time of 25ms For example no more than 25ms should elapse from the time the level changes at the Start input to the time voltage is applied to the motor There is both hardware and software filtering on these inputs The hardware provides an average delay of 12ms from the time the level changes at the input to the earliest time that the software can detect the change The actual time can vary between boards from 7 to 17ms but any particular board should be consistent to within 1 of its average value The amount of software filtering is not alterable by the user PowerFlex 700 Each digital input has a maximum response pass through function execution time of 25ms This means that for example no more than 25ms should elapse from the time the level changes at the Start input to the time voltage is
215. ect Value gt lt I CD Provides additional information pe z swesbeig 190 8 PowerFlex 700VC Block Diagrams Speed Control Reference 2 0ms 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Speed Control Regulator 1 0ms Trim In Select Commanded Speed Speed Ref peed Reference Speed Ref A Sel Jog Speed 1 ER ommended Fed peed Re el Coo gt log Spee EN 1 lt 23 Drive Ref Rslt Speed Ref BSel 93 Jog Speed 2 Cos gt PI Regulator gt Ramped Speed y Analog 1 2 E 5y gt J Spd Ref A 39 273 gt Drive Ramp Rslt Limit Enc Pulse Speed Feedback 1 10 From Encoder MOP Ti gt 0 uc l N 0 1 Min Max Kp Speed Loop EY 1 5 Rated Slip I Spd Ref B gt Logic Limits Ki Speed Loop Y I DPI Port 1 6 l Kf Speed Loop CD Speed Ref Selection ySpeed Desired BW 449 5 PI Excl Mode AMARA Encoder Slip Comp Open Loop Process Control 2ms PI Output Meter l l lt 138 gt Feedback Select i I PI Reference i po PI Regulator i p Ho PI Feedback I Limit Logic Y Speed Reference Output Freq V Hz lt gt P Current I Proc
216. ection Control 2 82 Direction Mask 2 114 Direction Owner 2 127 DPI 2 83 Drive Output Contactor 2 124 Drive Overload 2 86 Drive Ratings 2 90 Drive Thermal Manager Protection 2 88 Droop 2 90 Dynamic Braking 2 201 A 1 E Economizer 2 91 Efficiency Derates 1 3 2 91 EMC Directive 2 53 EMC Instructions 2 53 Encoder 2 169 Exclusive Ownership 2 127 F Fan Curve 2 92 Fault Clr Mask 2 114 Fault Configuration 2 95 2 160 Fault Queue 2 93 Faults 2 93 Feedback Select 2 166 Flux Up 2 97 Flux Up Mode 2 97 Flying Start En 2 98 Flying Start Gain 2 98 Flying StartGain 2 98 Fuses 2 100 G Group Digital Inputs 2 62 2 63 Digital Outputs 2 62 2 79 Power Loss 2 132 Speed References 2 7 H HIM Memory 2 107 HIM Operations 2 107 Human Interface Module Language 2 107 Password 2 107 User Display 2 108 l I O Wiring Analog 2 18 Digital 2 61 Input Contactor Start Stop 2 121 Input Devices 2 108 Input Modes 2 109 Input Power Conditioning 2 110 Input Output Ratings 1 3 J Jog 2 110 Jog Mask 2 114 Jog Owner 2 127 L Language 2 111 Language Parameter 2 111 Language Select HIM 2 107 Linking Parameters 2 112 Local Mask 2 114 Local Owner 2 127 Logic Mask 2 114 Low Voltage Directive 2 53 M Manual Preload 2 27 Masks 2 114 Max Speed 2 175 Maximum frequency 2 175 Min Mode Max Mode 2 178 MOP Mask 2 114 MOP Owner 2 127 Motor Cable Lengths 2 51 Motor Nameplate 2 11
217. ection information Manufacturer Deltron Schaffner Copy Cat Copy Cat 2 55 Table 2 H Recommended Filters Class Class Manufacturer A B Manufacturer A B Frame Part Number Meters Meters Part Number Meters Meters A KMF306A 25 25 B w o Filter KMF310A 50 25 B w Filter KMF306A 100 50 MIF306 100 C KMF318A 150 x D KMF336A 150 5 MIF330 150 D w o DC CM Capacitor KMF336A 50 E MIF3100 30 PowerFlex 700 0 KMF318A 100 MIF316 150 1 KMF325A 150 2 KMF350A 200 150 2 w o DC CM Capacitor KMF350A 176 150 B i 3 KMF370A 150 100 3 w o DC CM Capacitor KMF370A 150 100 A FN3258 7 45 50 B w o Filter FN3258 7 45 100 50 B w Filter FN3258 7 45 100 C FN3258 16 45 150 D FN3258 30 47 0 0 FN258 30 07 150 D w o DC CM Capacitor FN3258 30 47 150 PowerFlex 700 0 FN3258 16 45 150 1 FN3258 30 47 150 2 FN3258 42 47 50 50 2 w o DC CM Capacitor FN3258 42 47 150 150 3 FN3258 75 52 100 100 3 w o DC CM Capacitor FN3258 75 52 150 150 1 Use of these filters assumes that the drive is mounted in an EMC enclosure Some PowerFlex drives have a feature called Copy Cat which allows the user to upload a complete set of parameters to the LCD HIM This informat
218. ed Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you e identify a hazard e avoid the hazard e recognize the consequences Important Identifies information that is especially important for successful application and understanding of the product Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the drive to alert h people that dangerous voltage may be present DriveExplorer DriveTools32 and SCANport are trademarks of Rockwell Automation PLC is a registered trademark of Rockwell Automation ControlNet is a trademark of ControlNet International Ltd DeviceNet is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4 Appendix A Table of Contents Understanding How Dynamic Braking Works This section provides an overview of the components required to do Dynamic Braking and their functionality How Dynamic Braking Works 0 00000 000 1 1 Dynamic Brake Components 0 0000005 1 2 Determining Dynamic Brake Requirements This section steps you through the calculations necessary to determine the amount of Dynamic Braking required for your application How to Determine Dynamic Brake Requirements 2 1 Determine Values of Equation Variables
219. ed Ref A or Speed Ref B e Provide a trim signal to Speed Ref A or Speed Ref B e Provide a reference when the terminal block has assumed manual control of the reference e Provide the reference and feedback for the PI loop See Process PI Loop on page 2 137 e Provide an external and adjustable value for the current limit and DC braking level e Enter and exit sleep mode e Provide a value to Torque Ref A or Torque Ref B Analog Input Configuration Anlg In Config Current Lmt Sel allows an analog input to control the set point while DC Brk Levl Sel allows an analog input to define the DC hold level used when Ramp to Stop Ramp to Hold or Brake to Stop is active To provide local adjustment of a master command signal or to provide improved resolution the input to analog channel 1 or 2 can be defined as a trim input Setting Trim In Select allows the selected channel to modify the commanded frequency by 1046 The speed command will be reduced by 10 when the input level is at Anlg In x Lo with it linearly increasing to 10 above command at Anlg In xHi Feedback can be used to control an operation using the Process PI proportional integral feature of the control In this case one signal defined using PI Reference Sel provides a reference command and a second defined using PI Feedback Sel provides a feedback signal for frequency compensation Please refer to the Process PI Loop on page 2 137 for d
220. ed into non volatile drive memory Status 1 Fault drive condition at the time of the fault Status 2 Fault drive condition at the time of the fault Alarm 1 Fault alarm condition at the time of the fault Alarm 2 Fault alarm conditions at the time of the fault Fault Motor Amps motor amps at time of fault Fault Bus Volts unfiltered DC Bus volts at time of fault Fault Frequency Standard Control Fault Speed Vector Control drive output frequency or speed at time of fault Fault Queue Faults are also logged into a fault queue such that a history of the most recent fault events is retained Each recorded event includes a fault code with associated text and a fault time of occurrence The PowerFlex 70 drive has a four event queue and the PowerFlex 700 has an eight event queue 2 94 Faults A fault queue will record the occurrence of each fault event that occurs while no other fault is latched Each fault queue entry will include a fault code and a time stamp value A new fault event will not be logged to the fault queue if a previous fault has already occurred but has not yet been reset Only faults that actually trip the drive will be logged No fault that occurs while the drive is already faulted will be logged The fault queue will be a first in first out FIFO queue Fault queue entry 1 will always be the most recent entry newest Entry 4 8
221. eed reference See also Speed Reference on page 2 171 e Trim In Select e Trim Out Select e Trim Hi e Trim Lo Value Display Parameters are available in the Monitoring Group to view the actual value of an analog input regardless of its use in the application Whether it is a current limit adjustment speed reference or trim function the incoming value can be read via these parameters The value displayed includes the input value plus any factory hardware calibration value but does not include scaling information programmed by the user i e Analog In 1 Hi Lo The units displayed are determined by the associated configuration bit Volts or mA 016 Analog In1 Value Read Only 017 Analog In2 Value 0 000 20 000 mA Value of the signal at the analog inputs 410 000V 0 001 mA 0 001 Volt Cable Selection Refer to Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INOOI for detailed information on Cable Selection Terminal Designations amp Wiring Examples Refer to the appropriate PowerFlex User Manual or Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INOOI for I O terminal designations and wiring examples Analog Inputs 2 19 How Analog Inx Hi Lo amp Speed Ref A Hi Lo Scales the Frequency Command Slope with Minimum Maximum Speed Example 1 Consider the following setup e Anlg In Config bi
222. een Accel Time 1 and Accel Time 2 and another input function called Decel 2 selects between Decel Time 1 and Decel Time 2 The open state of the function selects Accel Time 1 or Decel Time 1 and the closed state selects Accel Time 2 or Decel Time 2 Important Acc Dec Control is an Exclusive Ownership function see Owners This means that only one control device terminal block DPI device HIM etc at a time is allowed to select the Acc Dec rates The terminal block must become Acc Dec owner before it can be used to control ramp rates If another device is currently the reference owner as indicated by Reference Owner it will not be possible to select the reference by using the terminal block digital inputs and the Speed Select Inputs will have no effect on which reference the drive is currently using Because any combination of open closed conditions or unwired condition commands a reference source the terminal block seeks accel ownership as soon as the Accel 2 input function is configured which may happen at power up In order for the terminal block to actually gain ownership the masks must be set up correctly see above and no other device can currently have accel ownership Once the terminal block gains accel ownership it will retain it until shutdown until the Accel Mask or Logic Mask bits for the terminal block are cleared or until Accel 2 is unconfigured For the Decel 2
223. efault Certain quantities used to drive the analog output are signed i e the quantity can be both positive and negative The user has the option of having the absolute value value without sign of these quantities taken before the scaling occurs Absolute value is enabled separately for each analog output via the bitmapped parameter Anlg Out Absolut 2 22 Analog Outputs Important If absolute value is enabled but the quantity selected for output is not a signed quantity then the absolute value operation will have no effect Scaling Blocks The user defines the scaling for the analog output by entering analog output voltages into two parameters Analog Out1 Lo and Analog Out Hi These two output voltages correspond to the bottom and top of the possible range covered by the quantity being output The output voltage will vary linearly with the quantity being output The analog output voltage will not go outside the range defined by Analog Out1 Lo and Analog Out1 Hi Analog Output Configuration Examples This section gives a few examples of valid analog output configurations and describes the behavior of the output in each case Example 1 Unsigned Output Quantity e Analog Outl Sel Output Current e Analog Outl Lo 1 volt e Analog Outl Hi 9 volts 10V Analog Out1 Hi Output Current vs Analog Output Voltage Analog Output Voltage Marker Lines Analog Out Lo ov 0 200 O
224. efault z vc nits efault z vc nits efault uc nits efault ojc z nits efault ojc z cz nits Default Min Max Units in Max in Max in Max in Max in Max in Max in Max in Max in Max in Max 1000 1 30000 0 7432 1 0A 1 0 0 7432 1 10 0 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 1 1 32 0 32767 1 128 0 32767 1 1 0 0 5 1 5 0 1 0A 1 256 0 32767 1 64 0 32767 1 1 0A 1 64 0 32767 1 32 0 32767 1 450 0 32767 1 Related Alarms Alarms 2 5 Do 2 Ss Parameter Name amp Description Values E 0 Freq Reg Kp Default 2000 Proportional gain for the Frequency Min Max 0 32767 Regulator Units 1 1 Encdlss Ang Comp Default 0 TBD Min Max 1023 1023 Units 1 gt 542 Encdlss Vit Comp Default 6 1 TBD Min Max 0 115 Units 1 4 Excitation Kp Default 1800 TBD Min Max 0 32767 Units 1 Alarms are indications of situations that are occurring within the drive or application that should be annunciated to the user These situations may affect the drive operation or application performance Conditions such as Power Loss or Analog input signal loss can be detected and displayed to the user for drive or operator action There are two types of alarms e Type 1 Alarms are conditions that occur in the drive or application that may require alerting the operator These c
225. elect 1 Digital In5 Speed Select 1 Digital In6 Enable Digital In6 Enable 24V Common 24V Common Digital In Common Digital In Common 24V E 24V 24V Common Figure 2 17 represents a typical digital input configuration that includes 2 wire start The digital input configuration parameters should be set up as shown Figure 2 17 Typical digital input configuration with Run Fwd Rev start Internal Power Source External Power Source Digital Inf Run Digital In1 Run 2 Digital In2 Clear Faults Digital In2 Clear Faults Digital In3 Forward Reverse Digital In3 Forward Reverse 2 Digital In4 Jog Digital In4 Jog _ Digital In5 Auxiliary Fault Digital In5 Auxiliary Fault 2 Digital In6 Enable Digital In6 Enable 2 24V Common 24V Common Digital In Common Digital In Common 24V 24V 2 78 Digital Outputs Digital Outputs Each drive provides digital relay outputs for external annunciation of a variety of drive conditions Each relay is a Form C 1 N O 1 N C with shared common device whose contacts and associated terminals are rated for a maximum of 250V AC or 220V DC The table below shows specifications and limits for each relay contact PowerFlex 70 PowerFlex 700 Resistive Load Inductive Load Resistive Load Inductive Load Rated Voltage 250V AC 250V AC 240V AC 240V AC 220V DC 220V DC 30V DC 30V DC Maximum Current 3A 15A 5A 3
226. elected as percent of the Speed Reference This works in Speed trim mode only not in Torque Trim or Exclusive Mode Example of Ref selected Speed Reference 43 Hz PID Output 10 Maximum Frequency 130 Hz 4 3 Hz will be added to the final speed reference of Ref not selected Speed Reference 43 Hz PID Output 10 Maximum Frequency 130 Hz 13 0 Hz will be added to the final speed reference Scale Blocks with PID Scale Blocks are now included in the Reference and Feedback selections of the Process PID controller This selects the output of the scale block for use as Reference or Feedback to the Process PID 126 PI Reference Sel Default 0 Pl Setpoint 024 O Selects the source of the Pl reference Options 0 PI Setpoint 124 j 1 Analog In 1 thru 1 Vector firmware 3 001 and later 9 138 2 Analog In 2 3 6 Reserved 7 Pulse In O 8 Encoder 9 MOP Level 10 Master Ref 11 17 Preset Spd1 7 1822 DPI Port 1 5 2324 Reserved 25 Scale Block 1 26 Scale Block 2 1 27 Scale Block 3 28 Scale Block 4 Trim of Reference The Trim function of the drive can be selected as of Reference or of Maximum Frequency 118 Trim Out Select 117 9 Specifies which speed references are to be trimmed n MAZA Y PEPE AERO DD eu pus 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 413 2 1 0 Res
227. ensation the correct amount of slip compensation is added to the drive output frequency based on motor load Thus the rotor speed returns to the original speed Conversely when the load is removed the rotor speed increases momentarily until the slip compensation decays to Zero Motor nameplate data must be entered by the user in order for the drive to correctly calculate the proper amount of slip compensation The motor nameplate reflects slip in the rated speed value at rated load The user can enter the Motor Nameplate RPM Motor Nameplate Frequency the Motor Nameplate Current Motor Nameplate Voltage and Motor Nameplate HP kW and during commissioning the drive calculates the motor rated slip frequency and displays it in Slip RPM FLA The user can adjust the slip compensation for more accurate speed regulation by increasing or decreasing Slip RPM FLA value 2 168 Speed Control Mode Regulation 4 Vector Speed Feedback Internally the drive converts the rated slip in RPM to rated slip in frequency To more accurately determine the rated slip frequency in hertz an estimate of flux current is necessary This parameter is either a default value based on motor nameplate data or the auto tune value The drive scales the amount of slip compensation to the motor rated current The amount of slip frequency added to the frequency command is then scaled by the sensed torque current indirect measurement of the load and displayed Sli
228. entered in the PI Reference Select parameter The selection of the source for the feedback signal is selected in the PI Feedback Select parameter The reference and feedback have the same limit of possible options PowerFlex 70 options include DPI adapter ports MOP preset speeds analog inputs and PI setpoint parameter In the PowerFlex 700 options are expanded to also include additional analog inputs pulse input and encoder input The value used for reference is displayed in PI Reference as a read only parameter The value used for feedback is displayed in PI Feedback as a read only parameter These displays are active independent of PI Enabled Full scale is displayed as 100 00 Refer to Analog Input Configuration on page 2 9 PI Reference Scaling The PI reference can be scaled by using PI Reference Hi and PI Reference Lo PI Refence Hi determines the high value in percent for the PI reference PI Reference Lo determines the low value in percent for the PI reference The PI feedback can be scaled by using PI Feedback Hi and PI Feedback Lo PI Feedback Hi determines the high value in percent for the PI feedback PI Feedback Lo determines the low value in percent for the PI feedback Process PlLoop 2 147 Configuration Example The PI reference meter and PI feedback meter should be displayed as positive and negative values Feedback from our dancer comes into Analog Input 2 as a 0 10V DC signal
229. eque m deep d Mie oe ete tee 2 201 Test Points ote A dte E een T Ven oce b ved ese ent aoe 2 204 Thermal Regulatot 2 9 AA e Ee ai oes eH en ete i 2 204 Torque AMES oo eim Soo abe ot Rated aM re 2 204 Torque Performance Modes 1 0 0 0 men 2 205 Torque Reference mur ero tee eer eua e m ola este ete eeu Pa E RR test cose 2 208 Troubleshooting ene A VT bogota ke ete e ba ee ORI E 2 209 Unbalanced or Ungrounded Distribution Systems 00 0 eee eee 2 210 User Sets s roseus nere Ds ah A dug P be ER Du S hile ene bi 2 210 Voltage Class S sees ear ak oC xS RE RO ee NP ae Ors 2 211 Voltage Tolerances zs A A DEUS ROGA SEE PET Aiea aces 2 212 NES PEE 2 213 Appendix A Index Table of Contents iii Dynamic Brake Selection Guide Table of Contents Section 1 Understanding How Dynamic Braking Works 0 0 c cece ccc eee eee 1 1 Dynamic Brake Components eesriie a hemos ae reed eR ere ling Sa Ree e ed vn e 1 2 Section 2 Determining Dynamic Brake Requirements 0 0 cece eee eee nent nen eae 2 1 How to Determine Dynamic Brake Requirements 0 0 cece eee eee eee eens 2 1 Determine Values of Equation Variables llle 2 4 Example Calculation T 2 9 Section 3 Evaluating the Internal Resistor 1 0 Is 3 1 Evaluating the Capability of the Internal Dynamic Brake Resistor 000000000 3 1 PowerFlex 70 Power Curves ses detta ERE REC CHR KHEN Fade S RR RETE IUE EY
230. equest Auto Man toggle not continuously asserted Once granted the terminal holds Manual control until the Auto Man button is pressed again which releases Manual control i e back to Auto mode 2 28 Auto Manual Manual control can only be granted to the TB or to a programming terminal e g HIM if Manual control is not already being exercised by the TB or another programming terminal at the time Manual control can only be granted to a terminal if no other device has Local control already asserted i e no other device has ownership of the Local control function A HIM or TB with Manual control active can have it taken away if another DPI port requests and is granted Local control In this case when Local control is released the drive will not go back to Manual control Manual control must be again requested edge based request see 1 above This is true for both the HIM and the TB i e if the TB switch was in the Manual position it must be switched to Auto and back to Manual to get Manual control again The status indicator point LED on LED HIM amp Text on LCD HIM will indicate when that particular terminal has been granted Manual control not the fact any terminal connected has Manual control and not the fact that the particular terminal has simply asked for Manual control When Manual control is granted the drive will latch and save the current reference value prior to entering Manual When Manua
231. er 1 14 present present Yes Yes Start Up No No Frequency V Hz V Hz Select Motor Custom Multi YES Speed path Control Mode Motor Sei Torque lt V Hz Fan Pump gt 191 Torque No Yes 1 12 Set 88 to 1 VIHz Custom param 58 t 2 1 3 14 y V Hz Multi Motor 9 Start Up Srii Sar uR NO SV No regulation 1 15 y art Up eed SVi F Torque FOC Speed SVC Control selected She Custom An Encoder is Enter value for is FOC Speed V Hz Frequency V Hz required for the Encoder PPR Regulate 1 13 EL Select V Hz 1 19 Torque Control 1024 Parameters option Select Start Up Standard V Hz gt Start Up another Motor Ton Frequency V Hz Custom V Hz Frequency V Hz A que path Control option 1 5 Select Motor Sensorless Enter value for or install an Control Mode Vector set param 53 Run Boost encoder Start Up SVC common to 0 amp 80 to 0 10V Torque FOC V Hz XXX lt yyy Select Torque More info Fan Pump Regulate option Set param i 1 20 lt Torque Regulate gt 53 to 3 amp Min Torque Speed 80 to 0 Start Up Min Torque Max Torque Speed Frequency V Hz Speed Sum Torque Speed 1 16 Enter value for 1 6 Set 88 to3 Absolute v Start Boost Absolute 1 10 Start Up 10 0 V Start Up Set 88 Frequency V Hz X XXXX lt y yyyy Torque FOC to6 Start Up Somo se EY 1 21 Control selected Max Sum Tro Speed u Torque FOC Is lic Con is Torque FOC Tro Speed Set 88 to 5 Control selected no Slip Lomp Standard Start Up Min Torque Speed Set 88 to 4 is
232. er Loss 2 135 The pre charge relay opens if the bus voltage drops below Vopen Vmin and closes if the bus voltage rises above Vclose The power loss alarm in Drive Alarm 1 is set and the power loss timer starts The Alarm bit in Drive Status 1 is set if the Power Loss bit in Alarm Config 1 is set The drive faults with a F003 Power Loss fault if the power loss timer exceeds Power Loss Time and the Power Loss bit in Fault Config 1 is set The drive faults with a F004 Under Voltage fault if the bus voltage falls below Vmin and the UnderVoltage bit in Fault Config 1 is set If the bus voltage rises above Vrecover for 20mS the drive determines the power loss is over The power loss alarm is cleared If the drive is coasting and if it is in a run permit state the reconnect algorithm is run to match the speed of the motor The drive then accelerates at the programmed rate to the set speed 680V 620V 560V Bus Voltage 365V 305V Motor Speed n Power Loss Output Enable Pre Charge Drive Fault 480V example shown see Table 2 7 for further information Coast Input PowerFlex700 Only This mode can provide additional ride through time by sensing the power loss via an external device that monitors the power line and provides a hardware power loss signal This signal is then connected to the drive through the pulse input because of its high speed capability Normally
233. er or cable terminator A filter or termi nator will help limit reflection to the motor to levels which are less than the motor insulation rating Cable length restrictions for unterminated cables are discussed on page 2 51 Remember that the voltage doubling phenomenon occurs at dif ferent lengths for different drive ratings If your installation requires longer motor cable lengths a reactor or cable terminator is recommended Optional Output Reactor Bulletin 1321 Reactors can be used for drive input and output These reactors are specifically constructed to accommodate IGBT inverter appli cations with switching frequencies up to 20 kHz They have a UL approved dielectric strength of 4000 volts opposed to a normal rating of 2500 volts The first two and last two turns of each coil are triple insulated to guard Output Frequency Output Power Output Voltage Output Frequency 2 125 against insulation breakdown resulting from high dv dt When using motor line reactors it is recommended that the drive PWM frequency be set to its lowest value to minimize losses in the reactors By using an output reactor the effective motor voltage will be lower because of the voltage drop across the reactor this may also mean a reduction of motor torque Output Frequency This parameter displays the actual output frequency of the drive The output frequency is created by a summation of commanded frequency and any active speed regulator such
234. erved Bit Vector firmware 3 001 amp later Factory Default Bit Values 2 152 Reflected Wave Reflected Wave For example selected Max Frequency 130 Speed Reference 22 Hz Trim Reference 20 4 4 Hz will be added to the Speed Reference not selected Max Frequency 130 Speed Reference 22 Hz Trim Reference 20 26 Hz will be added to the Speed Reference Compensation The pulses from a Pulse Width Modulation PWM inverter using IGBTs are very short in duration 50 nanoseconds to 1 millisecond These short pulse times combined with the fast rise times 50 to 400 nanoseconds of the IGBT will result in excessive over voltage transients at the motor Voltages in excess of twice the DC bus voltage 650V DC nominal at 480V input will occur at the motor and can cause motor winding failure The patented reflected wave correction software in the PowerFlex 70 700 will reduce these over voltage transients from a VED to the motor The correction software modifies the PWM modulator to prevent PWM pulses less than a minimum time from being applied to the motor The minimum time between PWM pulses is 10 microseconds The modifications to the PWM modulator limit the over voltage transient to 2 25 per unit volts line to line peak at 600 feet of cable 400 V Line 540V DC bus x 2 25 1215V 480 V Line 650V DC bus x 2 25 1463V 600 V Line 810V DC bus x 2 25 1823 V The software is standard and requires
235. es to PowerFlex 700 drives with Motor Cntl Sel set to FVC Vector Indicates that the information presented is specific to the PowerFlex 70 Enhanced Control Option DriveExplorer DriveExecutive and SCANport are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc PowerFlex and PLC are registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc ControlNet is a trademark of ControlNet International Ltd DeviceNet is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Summary of Changes The information below summarizes the changes to the PowerFlex 70 700 Reference Manual publication PFLEX RMO01 since the last release Change Page PowerFlex 700 60 HP 600V Derate added 1 6 PowerFlex 70 dimensions updated 1 7 PowerFlex 700 Frame 4 dimensions updated 1 14 Analog Input Cable Selection updated 2 18 PowerFlex 700 Analog Output info added for firmware 3 001 amp later 2 24 Bus Regulation section updated 2 49 2 51 Digital Input Cable Selection updated 2 61 PowerFlex 700 Digital Output info added for firmware 3 001 amp later 2 82 Fuse amp Circuit Breaker tables updated 2 101 2 106 Bypass Contactor Attention statement added 2 121 PowerFlex 700 Process PI info added for firmware 3 001 amp later 2 150 Scale Blocks sections added 2 157 PowerFlex 700 Torque Reference info added for firmware 3 001 amp later 2 209 Dynamic Brake Selection Guide updated A 1 ii Summary of Changes Notes Chapter 1 Chapter
236. esently clearing a fault Je 296 MOP Owner See Stop Owner 276 Adapters that are currently issuing Am increases or decreases in MOP 85 command frequency 297 Local Owner See Stop Owner 276 Adapter that has requested exclusive thru control of all drive logic functions If an 285 adapter is in local lockout all other functions except stop on all other adapters are locked out and non functional Local control can only be obtained when the drive is not running 2 128 Owners Conversely any number of adapters can simultaneously issue Stop Commands Therefore Stop Ownership is not exclusive Example The operator presses the Stop button on the Local HIM to stop the drive When the operator attempts to restart the drive by pressing the HIM Start button the drive does not restart The operator needs to determine why the drive will not restart The operator first views the Start owner to be certain that the Start button on the HIM is issuing a command Start Owner o o oc gt o gt gt o w gt o nm o o gt o 0 0 X 1 When the local Start button is pressed the display indicates that the command is coming from the HIM Adapter Start Owner o Sp o oc 9o o gt SP o w gt o nm o The Start Owner indicates that there is not any maintained Start commands causing the drive to run t SP o o o Adap
237. essing Read Write Parameter V Hz Mode with Speed Control lt it Read Write Parameter with Bit Enumeration CE Read Testpoint with Data Select Value CD Provides additional information lt gt Read Only Parameter Motor c surebeiq 49018 DA00Z Xe 31eMog 77 N swesbeiq 190 8 GET Trim In Select CD Speed Control Reference Speed Ref A Sel es Drive Logic Rslt 2 10 m s Speed Ref B Sel awe 0 m 14 13 12 E Annie indies l l PI Configuration rom Analog In 1 Rel Ti j 10D2 Analogiin1 it o 0 on Excl Mode Ref A Auto e 1 Qnm y 00 From Analog In 2 Ref edge 2 l 411 nalog In 0 1005 f l Ref B Auto 1 1 ur o From Pulse Output Ref 711 Speed Ref A l Pulse 2 l I Preset Speed 2 Preset 2 Auto le Internal HIM TB From PI Output 1 From Encoder Output Ref p Encoder 8 H4 Auto Manual 7H4 l Preset Speed 3 Preset 3 Auto iy l Trim Out Sel l From MOP Output Ref MOE Raval ey rim Out Select pie AGHA A i Analog Loss Detection rive Alarm 8F3 T
238. etails on this mode of operation Analog In 1 Lo C Input Output Analog In 1 Hi Pee Vh n nalog Inpu olts or m Parameter 1 Scale Cal Analog 1 Analog In 2 Lo Processing Analog In 2 Hi FE i dr a Analog Input Volts or mA Calanaoo2 I A Seed 2 Scale 9 Speed Ref A Sel Speed Ref B Sel Trim In Select TB Man Ref Sel PI Reference Sel PI Feedback Sel Current Lmt Sel DC Brk Levi Sel Sleep Wake Ref Torque Ref A Sel Torque Ref B Sel ES E Gp wd TT NNN NN DEEE ME a cre cT EST LT EN ET T tT CI EN pese Speed Ref A Lo Speed Ref A Hi v Speed Ref B Lo Y Sleep Level Torque Ref A Lo Torque Ref B Lo Ref A Brake Scale Limit Speed Ref B Hi Scale Wake Level Torque Ref A Hi Torque Ref B Hi Trim Lo Y Ref B Sleep Level Torque Ref A Torque Ref B Scale Limit Trim Hi Compare Div Mult v TB Manual Scale Limit PI Reference Scale Limit PI Feedback Scale Limit mr Current Limit Scale Limit o Rated Rated Sleep is E is Current Current Wake v Y Reference A Reference B v C TB Manual G Reference G Feedback Y v Current Limi C DC Brake
239. eters Number Parameter 54 Maximum Voltage 56 Compensation 57 Flux Up Mode 58 Flux Up Time 59 SV Boost Filter 62 IR Voltage Drop 63 Flux Current Ref 69 Start Acc Boost 70 Run Boost 71 Break Voltage 72 Break Frequency 84 Skip Frequency 1 85 Skip Frequency 2 86 Skip Frequency 3 87 Skip Freq Band 91 Speed Ref A Hi 92 Speed Ref A Lo 94 Speed Ref B Hi 95 Speed Ref B Lo 97 TB Man Ref Hi 98 TB Man Ref Lo 100 Jog Speed 101 Preset Speed 1 102 Preset Speed 2 103 Preset Speed 3 104 Preset Speed 4 105 Preset Speed 5 106 Preset Speed 6 107 Preset Speed 7 119 Trim Hi 120 Trim Lo 121 Slip RPM FLA 122 Slip Comp Gain 123 Slip RPM Meter 127 PI Setpoint 129 PI Integral Time 130 PI Prop Gain 131 PI Lower Limit 132 PI Upper Limit 133 PI Preload 140 Accel Time 1 141 Accel Time 2 142 Decel Time 1 143 Decel Time 2 146 S Curve 148 Current Lmt Val 149 Current Lmt Gain 151 PWM Frequency 152 Droop RPM FLA 153 Regen Power Limit 154 Current Rate Limit 158 DC Brake Level 159 DC Brake Time Linking Parameters 2 113 Number Parameter 160 Bus Reg Ki 164 Bus Reg Kp 165 Bus Reg Kd 170 Flying StartGain
240. f this input function is open the integrator for the Process PI loop will be allowed to increase See Process PI Loop on page 2 137 PI Reset If this input function is closed the integrator for the Process PI loop will be reset to 0 If this input function is open the integrator for the Process PI loop will integrate normally See Process PI Loop on page 2 137 Digital Inputs 2 73 e Auxiliary Fault The Aux Fault input function allows external equipment to fault the drive Typically one or more machine inputs limit switches pushbuttons etc will be connected in series and then connected to this input If the input function is open the software detects the change of state then the drive will fault with the Auxiliary Input F2 fault code If the Aux Fault input function is assigned to a physical digital input that input will be active regardless of any drive control masks Also the input will be active even if a device other than the terminal block gains complete local control of drive logic See Local Control If this input function is not configured then the fault will not occur e Local Control The Local Control input function allows exclusive control of all drive logic functions from the terminal block If this input function is closed the terminal block has exclusive control disabling all the DPI devices of drive logic including start reference selection acceleration rate selection etc Th
241. fied in Analog In x Lo 2 174 Speed Reference For example if the following parameters are set Analog In x Hi 10 V Analog In x Lo 0 V Speed Ref A Hi 45 Hz Speed Ref x Lo 5 Hz then the speed command for the drive will be linearly scaled between 45 Hz at maximum analog signal and 5 Hz at minimum analog signal See additional examples under Analog Inputs on page 2 12 Polarity The reference can be selected as either unipolar or bipolar Unipolar is limited to positive values and supplies only the speed reference Bipolar supplies both the speed reference AND the direction command signals forward direction and signals reverse direction Trim If the speed reference is coming from the source specified in Speed Ref A Sel or Speed Ref B Sel the a trim signal can be applied to adjust the speed reference by a programmable amount The source of the trim signal is made via Trim In Sel parameter 117 and can be any of the sources that are also used as references Trim Out Select parameter 118 selects which of the references A B will be trimmed If the trim source is an analog input two additional scale parameters are provide to scale the trim signal Figure 2 35 Trim Trim Enable Select Trim Reference A i J 5 Trimmed Reference A Reference B gt k Trimmed Reference B Speed Reference 2 175 Min Max Speed Max Speed Maximum and minimum speed limits
242. ger is not actual data it represents a value Table 2 X lists the parameters that can be destinations All links must be established between equal data types parameter value formatted in floating point can only source data to a destination parameter value that is also floating point Establishing A Link Step Key s 1 Select a valid destination parameter see Table 2 X to be linked The parameter value screen will appear Example Displays FG Parameter Accel Time 1 Accel Time 2 2 Press Enter to edit the parameter The cursor egne will move to the value line Min 0 1 Secs D qc Max 3600 0 Secs Dflt 10 0 Secs or ea Present Value 3 Press ALT and then View Sel Next press the Up or Down Arrow to change Present Value to Define Link Press Enter 4 Enter the Source Parameter Number and press Enter The linked parameter can now be viewed two e Define Link different ways by repeating steps 1 4 and selecting Present Value or Define Link If Parameter 141 an attempt is made to edit the value of a Accel Time 2 linked parameter Parameter is Linked will Link 017 be displayed indicating that the value is Analog In1 Value coming from a source parameter and can not be edited 5 To remove a link repeat steps 1 5 and change the source parameter number to zero 0 6 Press Esc to return to the group list c Table 2 X Linkable Param
243. guring the drive in this mode allows an external torque input to be summed with the torque command generated by the speed regulator The drive requires both a speed reference and a torque reference to be linked This mode can be used for applications that have precise speed changes with critical time constraints If the torque requirement and timing is known for a given speed change then the external torque input can be used to preload the integrator The timing of the speed change and the application of an external torque command change must be coordinated for this mode to be useful The sum mode will then work as a feed forward to the torque regulator Zero Torque Mode Operation in zero torque mode allows the motor to be fully fluxed and ready to rotate when a speed command or torque command is given For a cyclical application where through put is a high priority this mode can be used The control logic can select zero torque during the rest portion of a machine cycle instead of stopping the drive When the cycle start occurs instead of issuing a start to the drive a speed regulate mode can be selected The drive will then immediately accelerate the motor without the need for flux up time Important Zero Torque may excessively heat the motor if operated in this mode for extended periods of time No load or flux current is still present when the drive is operating in zero torque mode A motor with an extended speed range
244. hange of state in any attached DPI peripheral Change of state is a button being pressed or error detected by a DPI peripheral SCANport devices are slightly different in that those peripherals transmit command messages upon reception of a drive status 2 84 DPI message rather than on detection of a change of state Producer Consumer messages are of fixed size so support of message fragmentation is not required The following types of messaging are covered e Drive status running faulted etc e Drive commands start stop etc e Control logic parsing operations e g mask and owner parameters e Entering Flash programming mode e Soft login and logout of peripheral devices enabling disabling of peripheral control Peer to Peer operation Peer to Peer messaging allows two devices to communicate directly rather than through the master or host i e drive They are the same priority as C S messages and will occur in the background In the PowerFlex 70 drive the only Peer to Peer functionality supports proxy operations for the LED HIM Since the PowerFlex 700 drive does not support an LED HIM it will not support Peer to Peer proxy operations The Peer to Peer proxy operation is only used so that the LED HIM can access parameters that are not directly part of the regulator board e g DeviceNet baud rate etc The LED HIM is not attached to a drive through a CAN connection as normal DPI or SCANport devices are so a proxy fu
245. hannel 8 15V DC output single ended or differential and capable of supplying a minimum of 10 mA per channel Maximum input frequency is 250 kHz The Encoder Interface Board accepts 12V DC square wave with a minimum high state voltage of 7 0V DC 12 volt encoder Maximum low state voltage is 0 4V DC Input Output Ratings Each PowerFlex Drive has normal and heavy duty torque capabilities The Heat Dissipation Derating Guidelines listings can be found in Tables 2 M through 2 W See Watts Loss on page 2 213 PowerFlex 70 amp 700 Altitude and Efficiency Frame Type Derate All Altitude 100 2 E X 90 3 E 2 Q 80 o 70 0 1 000 2 000 3 000 4 000 5 000 6 000 Altitude m Efficiency 100 typical vs Speed 95 amp 90 vs Load E 2 iu 85 3 80 75 T T T T T T T T T 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Speed Load 1 4 Derating Guidelines Frame PowerFlex 70 Ambient Temperature Load Frame Class Enclosure Frequency Derate A 400V Open NEMA 2 10 kHz None Type 1 IP20 Flange B 400V Open NEMA 2 10kHz None Type 1 IP20 Flange C 400V NEMA Type 2 8 kHz None 1 Flange 10 kHz 50 E 10khiz 5 E 49 E E 48 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 of
246. hat one or more selections conflict with each other one of the digital input configuration alarms will be asserted As long as the Digital Input Conflict exists the drive will not start These alarms will be automatically cleared by the drive as soon as the user changes the parameters so that there is an internally consistent digital input configuration Examples of configurations that cause an alarm are e User tries to configure both the Start input function and the Run Forward input function at the same time Start is only used in 3 wire start mode and Run Forward is only used in 2 wire run mode so they should never be configured at the same time e User tries to assign a toggle input function for instance Forward Reverse to more than one physical digital input simultaneously e These alarms called Type 2 Alarms are different from other alarms in that it will not be possible to start the drive while the alarm is active It should not be possible for any of these alarms to occur while drive is running because all configuration parameters are only changeable while drive is stopped Whenever one or more of these alarms is asserted the drive ready status will become not ready and the HIM will reflect a message signaling the conflict In addition the drive status light will be flashing yellow There are three different digital input configuration alarms They appear to the user in Drive Alarm
247. have a parameter called Maximum Speed Maximum Speed limits the drive speed reference such as from a communication network or analog input PowerFlex drives contain the following necessary rule Maximum Speed Overspeed Limit Maximum Freq Overspeed Limit allows the drive to operate above Maximum Speed for certain functions such as bus regulation current limit during regeneration PI control and slip compensation It is important that Overspeed Limit is set to allow enough headroom for the application For example let s assume we have an application where Speed Mode Slip Comp Slip compensation adds some frequency to the commanded speed in order to compensate for slip in a loaded motor In this case Overspeed Limit should not be set to 0 Otherwise if the drive is running with a commanded frequency of 60 Hz and the motor is loaded at all slip compensation will add some frequency and we would get a nuisance Overspeed fault Defaults are as follows e Maximum Speed 60 Hz e Overspeed Limit 10 Hz e Maximum Freq 130 Hz this is default so that users who want to go twice base speed don t have to change it To send out a speed reference to the drive from a controller over RIO you can perform the following calculation _ CommandFreq SpeedRef Maximum Freq x 32767 For example to send out a command frequency of 60 Hz on a PowerFlex 70 or 700 with default settings we would calculate the
248. he combination of the these two parameter settings and the mechanical system The drive output voltage will be zero when the hold time is finished The level and uniformity of the DC braking offered at zero speed may not be suitably smooth for many applications If this is an application requirement a vector control drive motion control drive or mechanical brake should be used The drive output voltage will be zero when the hold time is finished Stop Modes 2 203 5 Ramp To Hold is selected by setting Stop Select x The drive will ramp the frequency to zero based on the deceleration time programmed into Decel Time 1 2 Once the drive reaches zero hertz a DC Injection holding current is applied to the motor The level of current is set in DC Brake Level In this mode the braking is applied Continuously DC Hold Time has no effect in this mode Braking will continue until one of the following events occur The Enable Input is opened or A Start command is re issued Again caution must be exercised to not overheat the motor by applying excess voltage and or for excess time particularly if the motor is not rotating Output Voltage Output Voltage Output Current Motor Speed Output Current Output Voltage gt Y Time Stop Zero 7 N Re issuing a Command Command Start Command Speed 2 204 Test Points Test Points Thermal Regulator Torque Limits 234 Testpoint 1 Sel Defau
249. he drive is fixed for each voltage class of drive The bus voltage regulation set points are identical to the internal dynamic brake regulation set points VDB s Tek Stop Single Seq 100 S s cha Zoom 1 0X vert Q 5X Hore C1RMS I 677 8 V FA see I DB Bus Motor Speed Output Frequency Em 100 V M 1 005 Chis 682 V Ch3 2 00 V Cha 2 00 V To avoid over voltage faults a bus voltage regulator is incorporated as part of the acceleration deceleration control As the bus voltage begins to approach the bus voltage regulation point Vreg the bus voltage regulator increases the magnitude of the output frequency and voltage to reduce the bus voltage The bus voltage regulator function takes precedence over the other two functions See Figure 2 13 The bus voltage regulator is shown in the lower one third of Figure 2 13 The inputs to the bus voltage regulator are the bus voltage the bus voltage regulation set point Vreg proportional gain integral gain and derivative gain The gains are intended to be internal values and not parameters These will be test points that are not visible to the user Bus voltage regulation is selected by the user in the Bus Reg Mode parameter Operation Bus voltage regulation begins when the bus voltage exceeds the bus voltage regulation set point Vreg and the switches shown in Figure 2 13 move to the positions shown in Table 2 B Table 2
250. he process is normal and running from the analog input everything proceeds normally However if the wire for the analog input should be severed or the sensor malfunction so that the 4 20mA signal is lost the following sequence occurs 1 The drive will sense the signal loss 2 An active Type 1 Alarm is created and the last signal value is maintained as the speed reference 3 The alarm activates the digital output relay to light the alarm light for the operator 4 The operator uses the HIM to switch the drive to Manual Control see Auto Manual 5 The operator manually brings the process to a controlled stop until the signal loss is repaired Analog Inputs Analog Inputs 2 9 Alarm Queue PowerFlex 700 Only A queue of 8 parameters exists that capture the drive alarms as they occur A sequential record of the alarm occurrences allows the user to view the history of the eight most recent events 262 Alarm 1 Code Default Read Only 261 263 Alarm 2 Code 264 Alarm 3 Code re 265 Alarm 4 Code i 266 Alarm 5 Code 267 Alarm 6 Code 268 Alarm 7 Code 269 Alarm 8 Code A code that represents a drive alarm The codes will appear in the order they occur first 4 alarms in first 4 out alarm queue A time stamp is not available with alarms Alarms Possible Uses of Analog Inputs The analog inputs provide data that can be used for the following purposes e Provide a value to Spe
251. hen set to 0 When set to a 1 the drive motor is operated in speed mode The torque command changes as needed to maintain the desired speed A value of 2 selects torque mode In torque regulation mode the drive controls the desired motor torque The motor speed will be a result of the torque command and load present at the motor shaft Min and Max mode are selected by values 3 and 4 respectively These two modes offer a combination of speed and torque operation The algebraic minimum or maximum of speed torque will be the operating point for the Min and Max modes The drive will automatically switch from speed to torque mode or from torque to speed based on the dynamics of the motor load The Min mode is typically used with positive torque and forward speed operation the minimum of the two being closest to zero The Max mode is opposite typically used with reverse speed and negative torque the maximum being the least negative closest to zero Sum mode is selected when set to 5 This mode allows an external torque command to be added to the speed regulator output when desired Speed Regulation Mode Operating as a speed regulator is the most common and therefore simplest mode to setup Examples of speed regulated applications are blowers conveyors feeders pumps saws and tools In a speed regulated application the torque reference is generated by the speed regulator output Note that under steady sta
252. i tan TRATA Vg E Te ii E estres AAA NAAI werflex Er B Wu Allen Bradley 70 amp 700 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive 70 Firmware Versions Standard Control xxx x 2 001 Enhanced Control xxx x 2 Xxx 700 Firmware Versions Standard Control xxx x 3 001 Vector Control xxx x 3 001 Reference Manual Automation Important User Information Manual Conventions Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls Publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or www rockwellautomation com literature describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assum
253. ications require a manual mode where adjustments can be made and setup can be done by taking local control of the drive speed Typically these adjustments would be made via a local HIM mounted on the drive When all setup is complete control of the drive frequency command is turned over to automatic control from a remote source such as a PLC analog input etc The source of the speed reference is switched to one of two manual sources when the drive is put into manual mode 1 Local HIM 2 Analog Input to terminal block If the selection is the HIM then the digital or analog speed control on the HIM provides the reference If the switch to manual mode was made via a digital input parameters 361 366 set to 18 Auto Manual then the source for the reference is defined in TB Man Ref Sel parameter 96 This can be either of the 2 analog inputs or the digital MOP When the drive is returned to automatic mode the speed reference returns to the source selected by the binary logic Also see Auto Manual on page 2 27 2 172 Speed Reference DPI See the DPI on page 2 83 for a description of DPI One of the DPI ports can be selected as the source of the speed reference In the PowerFlex 70 700 and 700VC the speed reference from DPI is scaled so that Maximum Freq 32767 Maximum Freq is the largest output frequency that the drive will deliver to the motor Additionally the PowerFlex 70 and 700 drives
254. icular status condition in the drive The following drive conditions or status can be selected to cause the relay activation Condition Description Fault A drive Fault has occurred and stopped the drive Alarm A Drive Type 1 or Type 2 Alarm condition exists Ready The drive is powered Enabled and no Start Inhibits exist It is ready to run Run The drive is outputting Voltage and frequency to the motor indicates 3 wire control either direction Forward Run The drive is outputting Voltage and frequency to the motor indicates 2 wire control in Forward Reverse Run The drive is outputting Voltage and frequency to the motor indicates 2 wire control in Reverse Reset Run The drive is currently attempting the routine to clear a fault and restart the drive Powerup Run The drive is currently executing the Auto Restart or Run at Power Up function DC Braking The drive is currently executing either a DC Brake or a Ramp to Hold Stop command and the DC braking voltage is still being applied to the motor Current Limit The drive is currently limiting output current Economize The drive is currently reducing the output voltage to the motor to attempt to reduce energy costs during a lightly loaded situation Mtr Overload The drive output current has exceeded the programmed Motor NP FLA and the electronic motor overload function is accumulating towards an eventual trip Power Loss The drive has monitored DC bus vo
255. ignal less than 1V 2 fHold Input or 2mA The signal loss event ends and 3 Set Input Lo normal operation resumes when the 4 Set Input Hi input signal level is greater than or equal 5 Goto Preset1 to 1 5V or 3mA 6 Hold OutFreq The loss action is chosen as Hold Input meaning that the last received signal will be maintained as the speed reference 2 8 Alarms Finally a Digital Output relay is configured to annunciate an alarm by turning on a flashing yellow light mounted on the operator panel of the process control area 380 Digital Out1 Sel Default 1 Fault 381 384 Digital Out2 Sel 4 Run 385 388 Digital Out3 Sel 4 Run 382 Selects the drive status that will energize Options 1 Fault 1 386 a CRx output relay 2 Narm 383 3 Ready Contacts shown in User Manual are in 4 Run drive powered state with condition 5 Forward Run ELI ancl 6 Reverse Run present Refer to Fault and Alarm M information 7 Auto Restart E 8 Powerup Run 002 2E 2 Vector Control Option Only 9 At Speed 001 SE 10 At Freq 003 oi 11 At Current 004 p4 S 12 At Torque 218 E 2 13 At Temp 012 a 14 At Bus Volts 137 15 At Pl Error 157 16 DC Braking 147 17 Curr Limit 053 18 Economize 048 19 Motor Overld 184 20 Power Loss 21 Input 1 6 Link 26 27 Pl Enable 2 28 PI Hold 2 29 Pl Reset While t
256. imum 100 drive Trip A test point Heatsink temperature is available to read temperature directly in degrees C but cannot be related to the trip point since maximums are only given in The IGBT temperature shown in Figure 2 20 1s used only for internal development and is not provided to the user 2 90 Drive Ratings kW Amps Volts Drive Ratings kW Amps Volts Droop Low Speed Operation When operation is below 4 Hz the duty cycle is such that a given IGBT will carry more of the load for a while and more heat will build up in that device The thermal manager will increase the calculated IGBT temperature at low output frequencies and will cause corrective action to take place sooner When the drive is in current limit the output frequency is reduced to try to reduce the load This works fine for a variable torque load but for a constant torque load reducing the output frequency does not lower the current load Lowering current limit on a CT load will push the drive down to a region where the thermal issue becomes worse In this situation the thermal manager will increase the calculated losses in the power module to track the worst case IGBT For example if the thermal manager normally provides 150 for 3 seconds at high speeds it may only provide 150 for one second before generating a fault at low speeds If operating at 60Hz 120 lowering the current limit may cause a fault sooner than allowing the drive to con
257. ines an analog signal level as providing a command value rather than a frequency However when viewing a command value it is presented as a frequency based on the Minimum Speed and Maximum Freq settings The 0 10 volt input scaling can be adjusted using the following parameters e Analog In x Lo e Analog In x Hi Configuration 1 e Anlg In Config bit 0 0 Voltage e Speed Ref A Sel Analog In 1 e Speed Ref A Hi 60 Hz e Speed Ref A Lo Z0 Hz e Analog In 1 Hi 10V e Analog In 1 Lo 2 OV This is the default setting where minimum input 0 volts represents 0 Hz and maximum input 10 volts represents 60 Hz it provides 6 Hz change per input volt Analog Inputs 2 13 co o Input Volts A2 Output Hertz Analog Scaling Speed Reference A Sel Analog In 1 Analog In 1 Hi Speed Ref A Hi 10V 60 Hz Analog In 1 Lo Speed Ref A Lo ov 0 Hz Configuration 2 e Anlg In Config bit 0 0 Voltage e Speed Ref A Sel Analog In 1 e Speed Ref A Hi 30 Hz e Speed Ref A Lo Z0 Hz e Analog In 1 Hi 10V e Analog In 1 Lo OV This is an application that only requires 30 Hz as a maximum output frequency but is still configured for full 10 volt input The result is that the resolution of the input has been doubled providing only 3 Hz change per input volt Configuration 1 is 6 Hz Volt 12 TESS NT E PT a xdi E al I I I
258. ing error An example of this might be an HVAC system with thermostat control In Summer a rising thermostat reading commands an increase in drive output because cold air is being blown In Winter a falling thermostat commands an increase in drive output because warm air is being blown The PI has the option to change the sign of PI Error This is used when an increase in feedback should cause an increase in output The option to invert the sign of PI Error is selected in the PI Configuration parameter PI Config Invert PI Ref Sel XS y gt PI Error PI Config x Sart 1 PI Fdbk Sel MW PI Fbk PRA e Preload Integrator This feature allows the PI Output to be stepped to a preload value for better dynamic response when the PI Output is enabled Refer to diagram 2 below If PI is not enabled the PI Integrator may be initialized to the PI Pre load Value or the current value of the commanded speed The operation of Preload is selected in the PI Configuration parameter PI Config PI Status PreloadCmd Enabled Preload Value gt Y YH PI Integrator Spd Cmd gt II By default Pre load Command is off and the PI Load Value is zero causing a zero to be loaded into the integrator when the PI is disabled Process Pl Loop 2 142 As below shown on the left when the PI is enabled the PI output wi
259. input function deceleration rate selection ownership is handled in a similar fashion to acceleration rate selection ownership e Acc2 amp Dec2 In the second scheme the 1 rates are combined Acc and Dec and the 2 rates are combined A single input function is used to select between Accel Time 1 Decel Time 1 and Accel Time 2 Decel Time 2 This input function is called Acc 2 amp Dec 2 If function is open then drive will use Accel Time 1 as the acceleration rate and Decel Time 1 as the deceleration rate If function is closed then drive will use Accel Time 2 as the acceleration rate and Decel Time 2 as the deceleration rate The same ownership rules as above apply e MOP Increment MOP Decrement These inputs are used to increment and decrement the Motor Operated Potentiometer MOP value inside the drive The MOP is a reference setpoint called the MOP Value that can be incremented and decremented by external devices The MOP value will be retained through a power cycle While the MOP Increment input is closed MOP value will increase at rate contained in MOP Rate Units for rate are Hz per second 2 72 Digital Inputs While the MOP Decrement input is closed MOP value will decrease at rate contained in MOP Rate Units for rate are Hz per second If both the MOP Increment and MOP Decrement inputs are closed MOP value will stay the same The terminal block bit
260. ion 1 1 Control 1 2 Derating Guidelines 1 3 Electrical 1 2 Encoder 1 3 Environment 1 2 Heat Dissipation 1 3 Input Output Ratings 1 3 Protection 1 1 Speed Control 2 166 Regulation 2 166 Speed Feedback Filter 2 170 Speed Mode 2 166 Speed Ref A Sel 2 7 Speed Reference 2 64 2 68 2 171 Speed Reference Trim 2 18 2 174 Speed References Group 2 7 Speed Regulation Mode 2 177 Speed Units 2 180 Speed Torque Select 2 177 Start Inhibits 2 180 Start Mask 2 114 Start Owner 2 127 Start Permissives 2 180 Start Stop Repeated 2 121 Start Up 2 181 Stop Mode A B 2 201 Stop Modes 2 201 Stop Owner 2 127 Sum Mode 2 179 T Terminal Designations 2 18 Test Points 2 204 Testpoint 1 Sel 2 204 Testpoint x Data 2 204 Thermal Manager Protection 2 88 Thermal Regulator 2 204 Torque Performance Modes 2 205 Torque Ref x Sel 2 209 Torque Reference 2 208 Torque Regulation Mode 2 178 Torque Setpoint2 2 209 Trim 2 18 Trim Out Select 2 151 Troubleshooting 2 209 U User Display HIM 2 108 User Sets 2 210 V Vector Control 2 208 Vector Feedback 2 166 Vector Speed Feedback 2 166 Voltage class 2 211 Voltage Tolerance 2 212 Volts Hertz 2 205 W Watts Loss 2 213 Wiring Examples 2 18 www 1 1 Z Zero Torque Mode 2 179 www rockwellautomation com Corporate Headquarters Rockwell Automation 777 East Wisconsin Avenue Suite 1400 Milwaukee WI 53202 5302 USA Tel 1 414 212 5
261. ion Startup 1 Flux Vector Start Up Motor Control Select A Start Up 1 31 V Hz The Fan Pump A option selects a 1 0 11 B B Basic mode predefined VHZ curve Start Up Start Up The Custom Std 1 Motor Control 1 Motor Control Fregueno option allows This section Make a selection quency M you to define a selects the type p lt 1 SVC gt 1 18 i P V Hz curve or of Motor Control 2 V Hz v m select a default the drive will 3 Flux Vector 1417 Start Up di V Hz curve use 4 More info Start Up us Vin 1 Motor Control elect a V Hz More Use SVC control option c i EON d SVC Set Flux info for applications lt 1 V Hz Fan Pump gt USIOM DE 1 32 1 2 53 0 Vector requiring speed 2 V Hz Cust Std 1 23 2 B Sa 16 B regulation 3 More info Start Up Start Up Start U Start U Use V Hz control V Hz V Hz E p d Vento b e and pine Custom Yes Enter choice for Enter choice of NOTE An Encoder p ications Fan Pump Set 53 3 Nees vee sp Comp Speed Units is required for UR Flux Vector 1 19 No Tia id Hz the Flux Vector for applications y sable RPM Control option requiring Torque Start Up control or tight V Hz Standard Set 80 to speed regulation Enter choice f
262. ion applications Encoder feedback is required for applications with high bandwidth response tight speed regulation torque regulation of 2 or when the motor is required to operate at less than 1 120 its base speed Motor Fdbk Type selects the type of encoder e Quadrature dual channel e Quad Check dual channel and detects loss of encoder signal when using differential inputs e Single Chan pulse type single channel e Single Check pulse type single channel and detects loss of encoder signal when using differential inputs Encoder PPR sets the number of encoder pulses per revolution Enc Position Fdbk displays the raw encoder count For single channel encoders this count will increase per rev by the amount in Encoder PPR For quadrature encoders this count will increase by 4 times the amount defined in Encoder PPR 2 170 Speed Feedback Filter Speed Feedback Filter Encoderless Deadband Encoderless Deadband is recommended when more than a 120 1 speed range of operation is not required and the user will set the speed reference below 0 5Hz 15 RPM The deadband will help prevent cogging and unstable motor operation below a reference of 0 5Hz 15RPM by clamping the speed and torque regulators to zero Simulator The simulator mode allows the drive to be operated without a motor connected and is meant for demo purposes only If a motor is connected with this mode selected
263. ion can then be used as backup or can be transferred to another drive by downloading the memory Generally the transfer process manages all conflicts If a parameter from HIM memory does not exist in the target drive if the value stored is out of range for the drive or the parameter cannot be downloaded because the drive is running the download will stop and a text message will be issued The user than has the option of completely stopping the download or continuing after noting the discrepancy for the parameter that could not be downloaded These parameters can then be adjusted manually The LCD HIM will store a number of parameter sets memory dependant and each individual set can be named for clarity 2 56 Current Limit Current Limit Current Lmt Sel Current Lmt Val Current Lmt Gain There are 6 ways that the drive can protect itself from overcurrent or overload situations Instantaneous Overcurrent trip Software Instantaneous Trip Software Current Limit Overload Protection IT Heatsink temperature protection Thermal Manager Instantaneous Overcurrent This is a feature that instantaneously trips or faults the drive if the output current exceeds this value The value is fixed by hardware and is typically 250 of drive rated amps The Fault code for this feature is F12 HW Overcurrent This feature cannot be defeated or mitigated Software Instantaneous Trip There could be situations where peak currents do no
264. ions are determined to be undesirable or unsafe an auxiliary contact on the output contactor should be wired to a drive digital input that is programmed as Enable This will cause the drive to execute a coast to stop cease output whenever an output contactor is opened ATTENTION To guard against drive damage when using output Bypass Contactors can result in component damage or reduction in product life The most common causes are ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed bypass system e Wiring AC line to drive output or control terminals e mproper bypass or output circuits not approved by Allen Bradley e Output circuits which do not connect directly to the motor Contact Allen Bradley for assistance with application or wiring 2 122 Mounting Mounting Notch Filter Refer to the Chapter 1 of the correct drive User Manual for mounting instructions and limitations As a general rule drives should be mounted on a metallic flat surface in the vertical orientation If other orientations are being considered contact the factory for additional data The 700 Vector has a notch filter in the torque reference loop used to eliminate mechanical resonance created by a gear train Notch Filter Freq sets the center frequency for the 2 pole notch filter and Notch Filter K sets the gain Figure 2 23 Notch Filter Frequency Gain Notch Filter K 0 db ESG TG i Notch Filter Frequency Hz Due to the fact tha
265. ip band is inactive 400 Hz Skip Frequency 1 cae 60 Hz Max Frequency 0Hz Acceleration and deceleration are not affected by the skip frequencies Normal accel decel will proceed through the band once the commanded frequency is greater than the skip frequency See A amp B in Figure 2 30 This function affects only continuous operation within the band Sleep Mode Sleep Mode 2 163 Operation The basic operation of the Sleep Wake function is to Start wake the drive when an analog signal is greater than or equal to the user specified Wake Level and Stop sleep the drive when an analog signal is less than or equal to the user specified Sleep Level Setting Sleep Wake Mode to Direct enables the sleep wake function Requirements In addition to enabling the sleep function with Sleep Wake Mode at least one of the following assignments must be made to a digital input Enable Stop CF Run Run Fwd or Run Rev and the input must be closed All normal Start Permissives must also be satisfied Not Stop Enable Not Fault Not Alarm etc Conditions to Start Restart unexpected machine operation during the Wake mode Equipment damage and or personal injury can result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application Do Not use this function without considering the table below and applicable local national amp international codes standards regulations or industry guidelines ATTE
266. ire the load to be uncoupled from the motor The static and dynamic tests can be performed during the Start up routine on the LCD HIM The tests can also be run manually by setting the value of the Autotune parameter to 1 Static Tune or 2 Rotate Tune Alternate Methods to Determine IR Voltage Drop amp Flux Current Ref If it is not possible or desirable to run the Autotune tests there are three other methods for the drive to determine the IR Voltage Drop and Flux Current parameters e The first method is used when the motor nameplate parameters are left at default When the drive is initially powered up the Autotune parameter is defaulted to a value of 3 Calculate The values for IR Voltage Drop and Flux Current are calculated based on the default motor nameplate data This is the least preferred method e The second method calculates them from the user entered motor nameplate data parameters When Autotune is set to 3 Calculate any changes made by the user to motor nameplate HP Voltage or Frequency activates a new calculation This calculation is based on a typical motor with those nameplate values e Finally if the stator resistance and flux current of the motor are known the user can calculate the voltage drop across the stator resistance Then set Autotune to 0 Ready and directly enter these values into the Flux Current and IR Voltage Drop parameters Autotune Procedure for Flux Vec
267. is read as a 58 in Datalink Al Datalink Most Least Significant Word Data decimal Al LSW 9 58 A2 MSW 9 0 Regardless of the Datalink combination x1 will always contain the LSW and x2 will always contain the MSW In the following examples Parameter 242 Power Up Marker contains a value of 88 4541 hours Datalink Most Least Significant Word Parameter Data decimal Al LSW 242 32573 A2 Not Used 0 0 Datalink Most Least Significant Word Parameter Data decimal Al Not Used 0 0 A2 MSW 242 13 Even if non consecutive Datalinks are used in the next example Datalinks Al and B2 would not be used data is still returned in the same way Datalink Most Least Significant Word Data decimal A2 MSW 242 13 B1 LSW 242 32573 32 bit data is stored in binary as follows MSW 231 through 216 LSW 215 through 20 Example Parameter 242 Power Up Marker 88 4541 hours MSW 13decimal 1101binary 216 218 219 851968 LSW 32573 851968 32573 884541 2 60 DC Bus Voltage Memory DC Bus Voltage Memory Decel Time DC Bus Voltage is a measurement of the instantaneous value DC Bus Memory is a heavily filtered value or nominal bus voltage Just after the pre charge relay is closed during initial power up bus pre charge bus memory is set equal to bus voltage Thereafter it is updated by ramping at a very slow rate toward Vbus The filtered value ramps at approximately 2 4V
268. is restored the drive can ramp the motor to the correct speed without the need for reconnecting The drive determines a power loss has occurred if the bus voltage drops below Vtrigger If the drive is running the inertia ride through function is activated The load is decelerated at just the correct rate so that the energy absorbed from the mechanical load balances the losses and bus voltage is regulated to the value Vinertia The Power Loss alarm in Drive Alarm 1 is set and the power loss timer starts The Alarm bit in Drive Status 1 is set if the Power Loss bit in Alarm Config 1 is set The drive faults with a F003 Power Loss fault if the power loss timer exceeds Power Loss Time and the Power Loss bit in Fault Config 1 is set The drive faults with a F004 Under Voltage fault if the bus voltage falls below Vmin and the UnderVoltage bit in E238 Fault Config 1 is set 2 134 Power Loss Bus Voltage Fo 560V 500V Motor Speed NARRA Power Loss Output Enable Pre Charge Drive Fault The inverter output is disabled and the motor coasts if the output frequency drops to zero or if the bus voltage drops below Vopen or if any of the run permit inputs are de energized The pre charge relay opens if the bus voltage drops below Vopen The pre charge relay closes if the bus voltage rises above Vclose If the bus voltage rises above Vrecover for 20mS the drive determines the power loss is over The power loss
269. issipates the regenerated energy in the form of heat The PowerFlex Family of Drives can use either the internal dynamic brake resistor option or an externally mounted dynamic brake resistor wired to the drive Wiring Frames 0 4 Wire to the DB resistor should be no longer than 10 feet from the drive terminals Wire should be twisted to minimize inductance Frames 5 6 Wire to the DB resistor should be no longer than 100 feet from the drive terminals 1 4 Understanding How Dynamic Braking Works Notes Section 2 Determining Dynamic Brake Requirements How to Determine Dynamic Brake Requirements When a drive is consistently operating in the regenerative mode of operation serious consideration should be given to equipment that will transform the electrical energy back to the fixed frequency utility grid As a general rule Dynamic Braking can be used when the need to dissipate regenerative energy is on an occasional or periodic basis In general the motor power rating speed torque and details regarding the regenerative mode of operation will be needed in order to estimate what Dynamic Brake Resistor value is needed The Peak Regenerative Power and Average Regenerative Power required for the application must be calculated in order to determine the resistor needed for the application Once these values are determined the resistors can be chosen If an internal resistor is chosen the resistor must be capable of handling the rege
270. ive under power timer By comparing this value to the PowerUp Marker it is possible to determine when the fault occurred relative to the last drive power up The time stamp for each fault queue entry can be read via the corresponding parameter Time comparisons of one fault to the next and or with PowerUp Marker are only meaningful if they occur less than or equal to the rollover range Faults 2 95 Resetting or Clearing a Fault A latched fault condition can be cleared by the following 1 An off to on transition on a digital input configured for fault reset or stop reset Setting Fault Clear to 1 A DPI peripheral several ways Performing a reset to factory defaults via parameter write n Bb Q NB Cycling power to the drive such that the control board goes through a power up sequence Resetting faults will clear the faulted status indication If any fault condition still exists the fault will relatch and another entry made in the fault queue Clearing the Fault Queue Performing a fault reset does not clear the fault queue Clearing the fault queue is a separate action Fault Configuration The drive can be configured such that some fault conditions do not trip the drive Configurable faults include those that are user inputs Fault Config 1 is a bit mapped 16 bit word enabling or disabling certain fault conditions see below Disabling a fault removes the effect of the fault condition and makes the e
271. k to the drive creating the potential for a nuisance overvoltage trip When an AC motor regenerates energy from the load the drive DC bus voltage increases unless there is another means dynamic braking chopper resistor etc of dissipating the energy Motoring Regenerating Without bus regulation if the bus voltage exceeds the operating limit established by the power components of the drive the drive will fault shutting off the output devices to protect itself from excess voltage OV Fault Q Vp Ma Single Seq 500 S s A l Sp Drive Output Shut Off Chl 100mv Ch2 00mV M 1 00s Ch3 7 1 47 V Ch3 500mv With bus regulation enabled the drive can respond to the increasing voltage by advancing the output frequency until the regeneration is counteracted This keeps the bus voltage at a regulated level below the trip point Since the same integrator is used for bus regulation as for normal frequency ramp operation a smooth transition between normal frequency ramp operation and bus regulation is accomplished The regulator senses a rapid rise in the bus voltage and activates prior to actually reaching the internal bus voltage regulation set point Vreg This is important since it minimizes overshoot in the bus voltage when bus regulation begins thereby attempting to avoid an over voltage fault Bus Regulation 2 47 The bus voltage regulation set point Vreg in t
272. kW 400V HP Dual Motor 480V Input Element Time Non Time Circuit Circuit Drive Rating Ratings Output Amps Delay Fuse Delay Fuse Breaker 4 Protector9 140M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Range 8 Catalog 5 Am Number END HD ps kVA Cont 1 Min 3 Sec Min Max 9 Min Max Max Max Available Catalog Numbers 9 400 Volt AC Input 20AC1P3 A 0 37 025 1 6 11 13 14 19 3 3 B 5 15 140M C2E B16 20AC2P1 A 075 0 55 25 18 21 24 32 4 6 4 8 15 140M C2E B25 140M D8E B25 20AC3P5 A 15 1 1 43 3 135 45 l6 6 6 6 12 15 140M C2E B40 140M D8E B40 20AC5P0 B 22 15 65 45 5 55 75 10 10 10 20 20 15 140M C2E C10 140M D8E C10 140M F8E C10 20AC8P7 B 4 3 11 3 7 8 87 99 132 15 17 5 15 30 30 15 140M C2E C16 140M D8E C16 140M F8E C16 20AC011 C 55 4 t 176 115 13 174 15 25 15 45 40 15 140M C2E C16 140M D8E C16 140M F8E C16 20AC015 C 75 5 5 151 104 154 172 231 20 30 20 60 60 20 140M C2E C16 140M D8E C16 140M F8E C16 20AC022 D 11 7 5 219 152 22 242 33 30 45 30 80 80 30 140M C2E C25 140M D8E C25 140M F8E C25 140 CMN 2500 20AC030 D 15 11 303 21 30 33 45 40 60 40 120 120 50 140M F8E C32 140 CMN 4000 20AC037 D 185 15 35 243 37 45 60 45 80 45 125 125 50 140M F8E C45 20AC043 D 22 185 407 282 43 56 74 60 90 60 150 150 60 480 Volt AC Input 20AD1P1 A 05 033 13 11 11 12 1 6 3 8 B 4 15 3 140M C2E B16 20
273. l Outputs 2 81 An Output can be linked directly to an Digital Input so that the output tracks the input When the input is closed the Output will be energized and when the input is open the output will be de energized This tracking will occur if two conditions exist The Input is configured for any choice other than Unused The Output is configured for the appropriate Input x Link Note that the output will continue to track or be controlled by the state of the input even if the input has been assigned a function i e Start Jog Output Time Delay Each digital output has two user controlled timers associated with it One timer the ON timer defines the delay time between a FALSE to TRUE transition condition appears on the output condition and the corresponding change in state of the digital output The second timer the OFF timer defines the delay time between a TRUE to FALSE transition condition disappears on the output condition and the corresponding change in the state of the digital output 382 Dig Out OnTime Default 0 00 Secs 380 386 Dig Out2 OnTime 0 00 Secs 384 390 Dig Out3 OnTime Min Max 0 00 600 00 Secs 388 Sets the ON Delay time for the digital Units 0 01 Secs outputs This is the time between the occurrence of a condition and activation of the relay 383 Dig Out1 OffTime Default 0 00 Secs 380 387 Dig Out2 OffTime 0 00 Secs 384 391 Dig Out
274. l be evaluated first 2 12 Determining Dynamic Brake Requirements Notes Section 3 Evaluating the Internal Resistor Evaluating the Capability of the Internal Dynamic Brake Resistor To investigate the capabilities of the internal resistor package the values of AL Average Percent Load and PL Peak Percent Load are plotted onto a graph of the Dynamic Brake Resistor s constant temperature power curve and connected with a straight line If any portion of this line lies to the right of the constant temperature power curve the resistor element temperature will exceed the operating temperature limit Important The drive will protect the resistor and shut down the Chopper transistor The drive will then likely trip on an overvoltage fault 1 Record the values calculated in Section 2 AL PL tat Pave 2 A Compare the calculated average power to the continuous rating of the dynamic brake resistor in the frame drive you have selected See Table A A Record the resistor s continuous rating Roont B If Paye is greater than Roop you will need to extend the cycle time in seconds by the result of the following equation A x Decel seconds R cont 3 2 Evaluating the Internal Resistor 3 Find the correct constant temperature Power Curve for your drive type voltage and frame Power Curves for PowerFlex 70 Internal DB Resistors Driv
275. l control is then released the drive will use that latched reference for the drive until another DPI device arbitrates ownership and changes the reference to a different value If a terminal has Manual control and clears its DPI reference mask disallows reference ownership then Manual control will be released By extension if the drive is configured such that the HIM can not select the reference via reference mask setting then the drive will not allow the terminal to acquire Manual control If a terminal has Manual control and clears its DPI logic mask allowing disconnect of the terminal then Manual control will be released By extension if the drive is configured such that the HIM can be unplugged via logic mask setting then the drive will not allow the terminal to acquire Manual control The disconnect also applies to a DPI HIM that executes a soft Logout If a com loss fault occurs on a DPI that has Manual control then Manual control will be released as a consequence of the fault on that port which had Manual control 10 There will be no way to request and hence no support of the Auto Manual feature on old SCANport based HIMs 11 You can not acquire Manual control if you are already an assigned source for the DPI port requesting Manual 12 When a restore factory defaults is performed Manual control is aborted Auto Restart Reset Run Auto Restart Reset Run 2 29 The Auto Restart feature provi
276. l count in the opposite direction whenever the respective level is dissatisfied If the timer counts all the way to the user specified time it creates an edge to toggle the Sleep Wake function to the respective condition sleep or wake On power up timers are initialized to the state that does not permit a start condition When the analog signal satisfies the level requirement the timers start counting Interactive functions Separate start commands are also honored including a digital input start but only when the sleep timer is not satisfied Once the sleep timer times out the sleep function acts as a continuous stop There are two exceptions to this which will ignore the Sleep Wake function 1 When a device is commanding local control 2 When a jog command is being issued When a device is commanding local control the port that is commanding it has exclusive start control in addition to ref select essentially overriding the Sleep Wake function and allowing the drive to run in the presence of a sleep situation This holds true even for the case of Port 0 where a digital input start or run will be able to override a sleep situation Sleep Wake Levels Normal operation will require that Wake Level be set greater than or equal to Sleep Level However there are no limits that prevent the parameter settings from crossing but the drive will not start until such settings are corrected These levels are program
277. le input will cause the motor to coast to stop ignoring any programmed Stop modes 7 A Dig In ConflictB alarm will occur if a Start input is programmed without a Stop input Default Default Default Default Default Default Options The available functions are defined in Table 2 I Digital Inputs Stop CF CF Clear Fault Start Auto Manual Speed Sel 1 Speed Sel 2 Speed Sel 3 Not Used Enable 6 Clear Faults 1 Aux Fault Stop CF 2 Start 2 7 Fwd Reverse 2 Run 9 Run Forward 3 Run Reverse 3 Jog Jog Forward Jog Reverse Stop Mode B Bus Reg Md B Speed Sel 1 4 Speed Sel 2 4 Speed Sel 3 4 Auto Manual Local Acc2 amp Dec2 Accel 2 Decel 2 MOP Inc MOP Dec Excl Link PI Enable PI Hold Pl Reset 100 156 162 096 140 194 380 384 388 124 2 63 2 64 Digital Inputs Table 2 1 Digital Input Function List Input Function Name Purpose Stop CF Stop drive Clear Faults open to closed transition Run Forward Run in forward direction 2 wire start mode Run Reverse Run in reverse direction 2 wire start mode Run Run in current direction 2 wire start mode Start Start drive 3 wire start mode Forward Reverse Set drive direction 3 wire mode only Jog Jog drive Jog Forward Jog in forward direction
278. les parameter value Note 2 14 Start Up 2 Motr Dat Ramp Enter value for Motor Poles XX lt gt yy 1 Start Up 2 Motr Dat Ramp Enter Stop Mode 1 Coast 2 Ramp 3 Ramp to Hold 4 DC Brake Flux Vector Start Up Motor Dat Ramp Backup Enter A Yes 2 8 Y Stop Mode A 2 DC Brake or 4 2 Start Up Enter value for DC Brake Level 1 0 Amps 0 0 lt 30 0 Amps 2 Motr Dat Ramp Enter DC Brake 2 9 Yes y top Mode A Start Up Enter value for DC BrakeTime 1 0 Secs 0 0 90 0 Secs 2 Motr Dat Ramp For V Hz mode only states 2 0 thru 2 6 amp 2 14 are displayed For V Hz mode configure Stop Mode A as Coast to Stop Going from state 2 7 to 2 10 directly sets the DC Brake Level Time parameters to their default value 2 10 Start Up 2 Motr Dat Ramp Enter choice for DB Resistor type lt None gt Internal External Enter Start Up 2 Motr Dat Ramp Enter value for Accel Time 1 6 0 Secs 0 0 lt 60 0 secs Enter 2 12 Start Up 2 Motr Dat Ramp Enter value for Decel Time 1 6 0 Secs 0 0 lt 60 0 secs 2 13 Enter Start Up 2 Motr Dat Ramp Enter value for S Curve 0 0 100 Enter Tests Go to 0 1 3 Motor Note Depending on selection set parameter 161 Bus Reg Mode A None Bus Reg Mode A Adj Freq
279. ll start from zero and regulate to the required level When PI is enabled with PI Load Value is set to a non zero value the output begins with a step as shown below on the right This may result in the PI reaching steady state sooner however if the step is too large the drive may go into current limit which will extend the acceleration PI Enabled PI Pre load Value gt 0 PI Pre load Value 0 Pre load command may be used when the PI has exclusive control of the commanded speed With the integrator preset to the commanded speed there is no disturbance in commanded speed when PI is enabled After PI is enabled the PI output is regulated to the required level d Cmd t Spd Start a St PI Enabled PI Output to Command Speed load e n P When the PI is configured to have exclusive control of the commanded speed and the drive is in current limit or voltage limit the integrator is preset to the commanded speed so that it knows where to resume when no longer in limit e Ramp Ref The PI Ramp Reference feature is used to provide a smooth transition when the PI is enabled and the PI output is used as a speed trim not exclusive control Spd Ref Process PlLoop 2 143 When PI Ramp Reference is selected in the PI Configuration parameter and PI is disabled the value used for the PI reference will be the PI feedback This will cause PI error to be
280. llowable to have one Adapter command the drive to run in the forward direction while another Adapter is issuing a command to make the drive run in reverse Direction Control therefore is exclusive ownership Non Exclusive Multiple adapters can simultaneously issue the same command and multiple bits may be high 288 Stop Owner Read Only 276 Adapters presently issuing a valid stop command da A ADI Ne CEE LES Sv Q S Q SS 1 Issuing Command X X X X X X X X X x 0 0 0 0 0 1 Z plis 1413 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 8 2 1 0 eei Bit 289 Start Owner See Stop Owner 276 Adapters that are presently issuing a valid start thru command 285 290 Jog Owner See Stop Owner 276 Adapters that are presently issuing a thru valid jog command 285 291 Direction Owner See Stop Owner 276 Adapter that currently has exclusive Ek control of direction changes 85 i 292 Reference Owner See Stop Owner 276 SE Adapter that has the exclusive control of uni E E the command frequency source 285 2 gt selection 2E 293 Accel Owner See Stop Owner 140 3 s Adapter that has exclusive control of 276 o selecting Accel Time 1 2 thru 285 294 Decel Owner See Stop Owner 142 Adapter that has exclusive control of is lecting Decel Time 1 2 selecting Decel Time 1 2 285 295 Fault Clr Owner See Stop Owner 276 Adapter that is pr
281. lt 499 236 Testpoint 2 Sel Min Max 0 999 Selects the function whose value is Display 1 displayed value in Testpoint x Data These are internal values that are not accessible through parameters See Testpoint Codes and Functions on page 4 10 for a listing of available codes and functions Diagnostics 235 Testpoint 1 Data Default Read Only 237 Testpoint 2 Data Min Max 0 65535 ird The present value of the function Display 1 selected in Testpoint x Sel Table 2 AB Testpoint Codes and Functions Code Selected in Function Whose Value is Testpoint x Sel Displayed in Testpoint x Data 0 DPlErorStatus Heatsink Temperature Active Current Limit Active PWM Frequency Lifetime MegaWatt Hours Lifetime Run Time Lifetime Powered Up Time Lifetime Power Cycles 99 Reserved for Factory Use OD SI UT A IN o See Drive Overload on page 2 86 The bus regulator when enabled generates a regenerative power limit to prevent the DC bus voltage from rising The maximum value closest to zero of the bus regulator regen power limit and Regen Power Limit is converted into a positive and negative torque limit The positive limit is used when the motor is regenerating in the reverse direction The negative limit is used when the motor is motoring in the reverse direction Finally the drive s torque reference is limited by the minimum value closest to zero of th
282. ltage and sensed a loss of input AC power that caused the DC bus voltage to fall below the fixed monitoring value 82 of DC bus Memory 2 80 Digital Outputs 2 The relay changes state because a particular value in the drive has exceeded a preset limit The following drive values can be selected to cause the relay activation Condition Description At Speed The drive Output Frequency has equalled the commanded frequency The balance of these functions require that the user set a limit for the specified value The limit is set into one of two parameters Dig Outl Level and Dig Out2 Level depending on the output being used If the value for the specified function frequency current etc exceeds the user programmed limit the relay will activate If the value falls back below the limit the relay will deactivate 381 Dig Out1 Level 0 0 385 Dig Out2 Level 0 0 Dig Out3 Level 0 0 819 2 Sets the relay activation level for options Units 0 1 10 15 in Digital Outx Sel Units are assumed to match the above selection i e At Freq Hz At Torque Amps Notice that the Dig Outx Level parameters do not have units The drive assumes the units from the selection for the annunciated value For example if the chosen driver is current the drive assumes that the entered value for the limit Dig Outx Level is rated Amps If the chosen driver is Temperature the drive
283. ltage when bus regulation begins thereby attempting to avoid an over voltage fault The integral channel acts as the acceleration or deceleration rate and is fed to the frequency ramp integrator The proportional term is added directly to the output of the frequency ramp integrator to form the output frequency The output frequency is then limited to a maximum output frequency Bus Regulation 2 49 Bus voltage regulation is the highest priority of the three components of this controller because minimal drive current will result when limiting the bus voltage and therefore current limit will not occur function is extremely useful for preventing nuisance overvoltage faults resulting from aggressive decelerations overhauling loads and eccentric loads It forces the output frequency to be greater than commanded frequency while the drive s bus voltage is increasing towards levels that would otherwise cause a fault however it can also cause either of the following two conditions to occur 1 Fast positive changes in input voltage more than a 10 increase within 6 minutes can cause uncommanded positive speed changes however an OverSpeed Limit fault will occur if the speed reaches Max Speed Overspeed Limit If this condition is unacceptable action should be taken to 1 limit supply voltages within the specification of the drive and 2 limit fast positive input voltage changes to less than 10 Without taking such actions if this
284. ly drive power a language screen appears on the HIM Use the Up or Down Arrow to scroll through the available languages Press Enter to select the desired language To switch to an alternate language follow the steps below Example Displays 1 Press ALT and then the Up Arrow Lang The Language screen will appear Speak English Parlez Francais Spechen Duetsch 2 Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll E Plare Italiano through the languages Press Enter to select a language Using Passwords By default the password is set to 00000 password protection disabled Logging in to the Drive Example Displays 1 Press the Up or Down Arrow to enter your password Press Sel to move from digit to Login Enter Password RE digit Press Enter to log in Example Displays You are automatically logged out when the User Display appears If you want to log out before that select log out from the Main Menu To change a password Step Key s Example Displays 1 Use the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll to Operator Intrfc Press Enter e Operator Intrfc Change Password 2 Select Change Password and press Enter User Display e Parameters 3 Enter the old password If a password has not been set type 0 Press Enter O e Password Old Code 0 4 Enter a new password 1 65535 Press New Code 9999 Enter and verify the new passwo
285. mable while the drive is running If Sleep Level is made greater than Wake Level while the drive is running the drive will continue to run as long as the analog input remains at a level that doesn t trigger the sleep condition Once the drive goes to sleep in this situation it will not be allowed to restart until the level settings are corrected increase wake or decrease sleep If however the levels are corrected prior to the drive going to sleep normal Sleep Wake operation will continue 2 165 Sleep Mode Sleep Wake Sources All defined analog inputs for a product shall be considered as valid Sleep Wake sources The Sleep Wake function is completely independent of any other functions that are also using the assigned analog input Thus using the same analog input for both speed reference and wake control is permitted Also Analog In x Hi and Analog In x Lo parameters have no affect on the function However the factory calibrated result will be used In addition the absolute value of the calibrated result will be used thus making the function useful for bipolar direction applications The analog in loss function is unaffected and therefore operational with the Sleep Wake function but not tied to the sleep or wake levels Figure 2 31 Sleep Wake Function Sleep Wake Function Qo E aE Smet Nese oe hole ee s O r 9o SE SF dq ANA eee Se peso is 2o E ane eS Ste oe Ne inest A
286. me 5 lt 6 5 0 26 A gt 37 6 1 48 259 1 10 20 gt 15 0 0 59 pn lt D gt Detail C DR Ay O O q Ll Clo 000000000000000000000000000000 B e E E 840000000000000000000000000000 D cinco NIN 1 ra EE ll espa en 0 49 Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Approx Weight kg Ibs Drive amp Packaging 42 18 93 0 308 9 12 16 644 5 25 37 2754 10 84 225 0 8 86 24 61 37 19 82 0 1 Refer to Table 1 B for frame information 2 When using the supplied junction box 100 HP drives Only add an additional 45 1 mm 1 78 in to this dimension 8 Weights include HIM and Standard I O 1 16 PowerFlex 700 Dimensions Figure 1 10 PowerFlex 700 Frame 6 lt 8 5 0 33 a gt lt 18 0 0 71 49 6 1 95 360 6 14 20 Detail B etail 6 a t prl o o 4 El 6 o o 2 o FE PowerFiex o o 3 aC ONERE LL E o o o o in ys A A gt O q 126 3 8 5 0 33 O q Lifting Holes 4 97 4 Places 97 113 5 0 53 12 7 0 50 Dia Y Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Approx Weight kg Ibs Drive amp Packaging 9
287. mmanded direction When Direction Mode Bipolar and a Jog command with no direction is asserted the drive will jog using the Jog reference parameter which is always positive or forward To accommodate jogging with direction while in Bipolar mode such as from a terminal block the drive will allow Jog Fwd and Jog Rev to be configured as terminal block inputs When these inputs are asserted the drive will jog the requested direction This still implies that a HIM can only jog in the forward direction when in Bipolar mode since they only transmit a Jog command with no direction via DPI For PowerFlex 700 drives with Vector Control 2 independent Jog Speeds 1 and 2 are provided The jog reference is signed and limited between Minimum Speed or Reverse Speed Limit whichever is programmed and Maximum Speed In this control the jog reference controls both speed and direction of the jog operation If the programmed Jog Speed is negative the drive will jog in the reverse direction if the Jog Speed value is positive the drive will jog in the forward direction When a jog command is issued exclusive control of speed and direction is given to the Jog function If the master speed reference is bipolar and commanding reverse direction but the programmed Jog Speed is a positive value the drive will jog in the forward direction overriding the direction control of a bipolar speed reference Language Language 2 111 PowerFlex drives ar
288. ms Watts Seconds Number 154 913 16431 220 1 80 2700 24600 T80R2K7 154 610 16431 220 1A 80 2100 19100 T80R2K1 154 604 16431 225 1 80 1500 17500 T80R1K5 154 408 6416 225 1A 80 1200 13700 T80R1K2 154 242 6416 222 1 80 900 18500 T80R900W 154 182 6416 222 1A 80 600 10900 T80R600W 117 3000 20800 T117R3K0 307 000 8330 TOORSOUW 117 2700 14300 T117R2K7 77 9300 230000 T77R9K3 117 2100 18600 T117R2K1 77 9000 209000 T77R9KO 117 1500 15800 T117R1K5 77 5700 28700 T77R5K7 117 1200 12500 T117R1K2 77 4500 22400 T77R4K5 117 900 10600 T117R900W 77 4200 24200 T77R4K2 117 600 10100 1117R600W 77 3600 28100 T77R3K6 117 300 7950 T117R300W 77 3000 21300 T77R3K0 77 2700 23800 T77R2K7 UN CC 20 77 2100 19100 T77R2K1 LG SD 220 2A 77 1500 16400 T77R1K5 310 1 Z 18779 PE 77 1200 20800 T77R1K2 110 50 NO 229 2A 77 900 17900 T77R900W UNE eee 77 600 10600 T77R600W 00 Gel eens 77 300 8210 T77R300W B EN UNE RE 60 11000 448000 TSORTIKO IP 9600 22400 TG 60 6900 164000 T60R6K9 D 9000 A o RT 60 4500 28000 T60R4K5 ME BO CHO TRE 60 3600 22000 T60R3K6 97 2100 15400 T97R2K1 60 2700 18500 T60R2K7 A NU 60 1500 20800 T60RIKS 97 1200 16500 T97R1K2 amp 0 1200 16400 TGORIK 97 900 13800 T97R900W G0 900 13700 TEORS00W 97 600 13400 T97RE00W G0 600 13000 TEORG00W 97 300 10300 T97R300W G0 300 10300 TEOR300W 91 86 17000 AKR2091P500 50 23M 9976 3204 85 1654 57901 220 3 59 1577 64161 220 4A 85 1094 36384 225 3 59 1576 64161 225 4 85 1089 3
289. n is defined as moving away from zero deceleration is defined as moving toward zero The linear acc dec ramp is active when the S curve is set to zero The accel time and maximum frequency determine the ramp rate for speed increases while decel time and maximum frequency determine the ramp rate for speed decreases Separate times can be set for accel and decel In addition a second set of accel and decel times is available In this example Ta 1 0 sec Td 2 0 sec and Maximum Frequency is set to 60 0 Hz S Curve 2 155 80 0 60 0 40 0 20 0 0 0 20 0 40 0 60 0 80 0 Hz 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 Seconds S Curve Selection S curve is enabled by defining the time to extend the acceleration and deceleration The time is entered as a percentage of acceleration and deceleration time In this case acceleration time is 2 0 seconds The line on the left has s curve set to 0 The other lines show 25 50 and 100 S curve At 25 S curve acceleration time is extended by 0 5 seconds 2 0 25 Note that the linear portion of this line has the same slope as when S curve is set to zero 70 0 60 0 50 0 40 0 Hz 30 0 20 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 1 0 15 2 0 25 3 0 3 5 40 Seconds The acceleration and deceleration times are independent but the same S curve percentage is applied to both of them With S c
290. n measured power module temperature and operating conditions The drive may fold back current limit when either of these methods detects a problem Overall RMS Protection The overall RMS protection makes sure the current ratings of the drive are not exceeded The lower curve in Figure 2 18 shows the boundary of normal duty operation In normal duty the drive is rated to produce 110 of rated current for 60 seconds 150 of rated current for three seconds and 165 of rated current for 100 milliseconds The maximum value for current limit is 150 so the limit of 165 for 100 milliseconds should never be crossed If the load on the drive exceeds the level of current as shown on the upper curve current limit may fold back to 100 of the drive rating until the 10 90 or 5 95 duty cycle has been achieved For example 60 seconds at 110 will be followed by 9 minutes at 100 and 3 seconds at 150 will be followed by 57 seconds at 100 With the threshold for where to take action slightly above the rated level the drive will only fold back when drive ratings are exceeded If fold back of current limit is not enabled in Drive OL Mode the drive will generate a fault when operation exceeds the rated levels This fault can not be disabled If current limit fold back is enabled then a fault is generated when current limit is reduced Drive Overload 2 87 Figure 2 18 Normal Duty Boundary of Operation 1 80 1 70 1 60 1 50 1 40 1 30 1 20 1 10 1
291. nction is needed to create a DPI message to access information in an off board peripheral If an LCD HIM is attached to the PowerFlex 70 or 700 drive it will be able to directly request off board parameters using Peer to Peer messages i e no proxy support needed in the drive Because the PowerFlex 70 supports the LED HIM only 4 communication ports can be used PowerFlex 700 drives can use all 6 communication ports because Peer to Peer proxy operations are not needed All Peer to Peer operations occur without any intervention from the user regardless whether proxy or normal P P operation no setup is required No Peer to Peer proxy operations are required while the drive is in Flash mode All the timing requirements specified in the DPI and SCANport System Control and Messaging specifications are supported Peripheral devices will be scanned pinged at a 10ms rate Drive status messages will be produced at a 5ms rate while peripheral command messages will be accepted by the drive as they occur i e change of state Based on these timings the following worst case conditions can occur independent of the baud rate and protocol e Change of peripheral state e g Start Stop etc to change in the drive 10ms e Change in reference value to change in drive operation 10ms e Change in Datalink data value to change in the drive 10ms e Change of parameter value into drive 20ms times the number of attached peripheral
292. ne Step Key s Example LCD Displays 1 Press ALT and then Esc S M A R T The S M A R T start screen appears ALT Esc EE List 2 View and change parameter values as Stop Mode desired For HIM information see Appendix B 3 Press ALT and then Sel Exit to exit qu the S M A R T start Minimum Speed Basic Start Up The Basic Start Up routine leads the user through the necessary information in a simple question and answer format The user can make the choice to execute or skip any section of the routine Below is a complete flow chart of the routine 2 182 Start Up Figure 2 39 PowerFlex 70 amp 700 Standard Control Option Startup Basic Start Up Top Level HIM Main Menu lt Diagnostics gt 4 Parameter gt Device Select I Esc Abort Memory Storage StartUp Preferences Startup 0 2 PowerFlex 70 StartU The drive must Drive active Yes p be stopped to proceed Press Esc to cancel Any state Esc key No Stop 0 3 PowerFlex 70 pid StartUp Resume Startup Make a selection ome pe E der Exit i Backup PS Backup Resume StartUp Menu No 00 y PowerFlex 70 StartUp r This routine is to help setup a drive for basic applications Parameter access Backup through other menus may be Startup Menu necessary to setup advanced features 1 Input Voltage Enter 0 1 y 2 Motor PowerFlex 70
293. nerated power or the drive will trip If an external resistor is chosen in addition to the power capabilities the resistance must also be less than the application maximum and greater than the drive minimum or the drive will trip The power rating of the Dynamic Brake Resistor is estimated by applying what is known about the drive s motoring and regenerating modes of operation The Average Power Dissipation must be estimated and the power rating of the Dynamic Brake Resistor chosen to be greater than that average If the Dynamic Brake Resistor has a large thermodynamic heat capacity then the resistor element will be able to absorb a large amount of energy without the temperature of the resistor element exceeding the operational temperature rating Thermal time constants in the order of 50 seconds and higher satisfy the criteria of large heat capacities for these applications If a resistor has a small heat capacity defined as thermal time constants less than 5 seconds the temperature of the resistor element could exceed its maximum Peak Regenerative Power can be calculated as e Horsepower English units e Watts The International System of Units SI e Per Unit System pu which is relative to a value The final number must be in watts of power to estimate the resistance value of the Dynamic Brake Resistor The following calculations are demonstrated in SI units 2 2 Determining Dynamic Brake Requirements Gather the Following I
294. nformation e Power rating from motor nameplate in watts kilowatts or horsepower e Speed rating from motor nameplate in rpm or rps radians per second e Required decel time per Figure 2 1 tg ty This time is a process requirement and must be within the capabilities of the drive programming e Motor inertia and load inertia in kg m or WK in 1b ft e Gear ratio GR if a gear is present between the motor and load e Motor shaft speed torque and power profile of the drive application Figure 2 1 shows typical application profiles for speed torque and power The examples are for cyclical application that is periodic over t4 seconds The following variables are defined for Figure 2 1 w t Motor shaft speed in radians per second rps o m N Motor shaft speed in Revolutions Per Minute RPM T t Motor shaft torque in Newton meters 1 0 lb ft 1 355818 N m P t Motor shaft power in watts 1 0 HP 746 watts Rad Op Rated angular rotational speed E Og Angular rotational speed less than p can equal 0 E Pp Motor shaft peak regenerative power in watts Determining Dynamic Brake Requirements 2 3 Figure 2 1 Application Speed Torque and Power Profiles Speed olt t Y Y Pp Drive Rated Regen Power A Y 2 4 Determining Dynamic Brake Requirements Determine Values of Equation Variables Step 2 Total Inertia Jr dy GR x J Jr T
295. nt gt Stop Command 2 Dynamic Braking is explained in detail in the PowerFlex Dynamic Braking Selection Guide presented in Appendix A 3 DC Brake is selected by setting Stop Mode A to a value of 3 The user can also select the amount of time the braking will be applied and the magnitude of the current used for braking with DC Brake Time and DC Brake Level This mode of braking will generate up to 40 of rated motor torque for braking and is typically used for low inertia loads When in Brake to Stop the drive acknowledges the Stop command by immediately stopping the output and then applying a programmable DC voltage DC Brake Level to 1 phase of the motor The voltage is applied for the time programmed in DC Brake Time After this time has expired all output ceases If the load is not stopped it will continue to coast until all energy is depleted A on the diagram below If the time programmed exceeds the needed time to stop the drive will continue to apply the DC hold voltage to the non rotating motor B on the diagram below Excess motor current could cause motor damage The user is also cautioned that motor voltage can exist long after the Stop command is issued The right combination of Brake Level and Brake Time must be determined to provide the safest most efficient stop C on the diagram below Output Voltage Output Current Motor Speed A DC Hold Level M gt Time d B
296. oad of the Internal Dynamic Brake Resistor Skip this calculation if an external dynamic brake resistor will be used P AL 2 x 100 Pap AL Average load in percent of dynamic brake resistor Important The value of AL should not exceed 100 Pay Average dynamic brake resistor dissipation calculated in Step 4 watts Pap Steady state power dissipation capacity of dynamic brake resistors obtained from Table A A watts Calculate Percent Average Load of the dynamic brake resistor i AL x 100 Record Percent Average Load of the dynamic brake resistor AL The calculation of AL is the Dynamic Brake Resistor load expressed as a percent Pyp is the sum of the Dynamic Brake dissipation capacity and is obtained from Table A A This will give a data point for a line to be drawn on one the curves provided in Section 3 2 8 Determining Dynamic Brake Requirements Step 6 Percent Peak Load of the Internal Dynamic Brake Resistor Skip this calculation if an external dynamic brake resistor will be used Pp PL x 100 Pap PL Peak load in percent of dynamic brake resistor Pay Peak braking power calculated in Step 2 watts Py Steady state power dissipation capacity of dynamic brake resistors obtained from Table A A watts Calculate Percent Peak Load of the dynamic brake resistor PL ke 1 i jx 100 Record Percent Average Load of the dynamic brake resistor P
297. og 1 Cal Analog 2 sjnduy Bojeuy LET 2 12 Analog Inputs Analog Scaling Analog In Hi Analog In Lo A scaling operation is performed on the value read from an analog input in order to convert it to units usable for some particular purpose The user controls the scaling by setting parameters that associate a low and high point in the input range i e in volts or mA with a low and high point in the target range e g reference frequency Two sets of numbers may be used to specify the analog input scaling One set called the input scaling points defines low and high points in terms of the units read by the input hardware i e volts or mA The second set of numbers called the output scaling points used in the analog input scaling defines the same low and high points in units appropriate for the desired use of the input For instance if the input is to be used as a frequency reference this second set of numbers would be entered in terms of Hz For many features the second set of numbers is fixed The user sets the second set for speed and reference trim An analog input or output signal can represent a number of different commands Typically an analog input is used to control output frequency but it could control frequency trim current limit or act as a PI loop input An analog output typically is a frequency indication but it could represent output current voltage or power For this reason this document def
298. on Mode is Bipolar the drive uses the sign of the reference to determine drive direction when Direction Mode is Reverse Dis then the drive never permits the motor to run in the reverse direction In both of these cases the terminal block inputs cannot be used to set direction so this alarm is asserted if any digital input function that can set motor direction is configured Digital Inputs 2 77 The Bipolar Cflct alarm will be asserted if both of the following are true e One or more of the following digital input functions are configured Forward Reverse Run Forward Run Reverse Jog Forward Jog Reverse e Direction Mode is set to Bipolar or Reverse Dis Digital In Status This parameter represents the current state of the digital inputs It contains one bit for each input The bits are 1 when the input is closed and 0 when the input is open Digital In Examples PowerFlex 70 Figure 2 16 shows a typical digital input configuration that includes 3 wire start The digital input configuration parameters should be set as shown Figure 2 16 Typical digital input configuration with 3 wire start Internal Power Source External Power Source Digital Inf Stop o Digital Int Stop Digital In2 Start 0 O Digital In2 Start Digital In3 Forward Reverse Digital In3 Forward Reverse Digital In4 Jog 0 O Digital In4 Jog Digital In5 Speed S
299. on of load excellent motor torque can be generated Maximum Voltage Base Voltage Nameplate Ir Voltage Base Frequency Maximum Nameplate Frequency 2 208 Torque Reference Torque Reference Flux Vector Control The drive takes the speed reference that is specified by the Speed Reference Selection Block and compares it to the speed feedback The speed regulator uses Proportional and Integral gains to adjust the torque reference for the motor This torque reference attempts to operate the motor at the specified speed The torque reference is then converted to the torque producing component of the motor current This type of speed regulator produces a high bandwidth response to speed command and load changes In flux vector control the flux and torque producing currents are indepently controlled Therefore we can send a torque reference directly instead of a speed reference The independent flux control also allows us to reduce the flux in order to run above base motor speed Figure 2 41 Flux Vector High Bandwidth Current Regulator CURRENT FEEDBACK Flux V mag gt Reg E SPEED REF urrent Speed n Voltage Inverter Reg eg Control TORQUE REF Varg Adaptive Len Encoder Controller AUTOTUNE PARAMETERS SPEED FEEDBACK When the PowerFlex 700 Vector Control drive is operated in Torque mode an external signal is used for a Torque reference Refer to Figure 2 4
300. onditions by themselves do not cause the drive to trip or shut down but they may be an indication that if the condition persists it may lead to a drive fault e Type 2 Alarms are conditions that are caused by improper programming and they prevent the user from Starting the drive until the improper programming is corrected An example would be programming one digital input for a 2 wire type control Run Forward and another digital input for a 3 wire type control Start These are mutually exclusive operations since the drive could not determine how to properly issue a Run command Because the programming conflicts the drive will issue a type 2 alarm and prevent Starting until the conflict is resolved Alarm Status Indication Drive Alarm 1 Drive Alarm 2 Two 16 bit Drive Alarm parameters are available to indicate the status of any alarm conditions Both Type 1 and Type 2 alarms are indicated A 1 in the bit indicates the presence of the alarm and a 0 indicates no alarm is present Configuration In order for a drive alarm to be annunciated to the outside world it must first be configured or activated Configuration parameters contain a configuration bit for each Type 1 alarm Type 2 alarms are permanently configured to annunciate The configuration word is a mirror image of the 2 6 Alarms Drive Alarm word that is the same bits in both the Drive Alarm Word and the Alarm Configuration Word repre
301. operation is unacceptable the adjust freq portion of the bus regulator function must be disabled see parameters 161 and 162 2 Actual deceleration times can be longer than commanded deceleration times however a Decel Inhibit fault is generated if the drive stops decelerating altogether If this condition is unacceptable the adjust freq portion of the bus regulator must be disabled see parameters 161 and 162 In addition installing a properly sized dynamic brake resistor will provide equal or better performance in most cases Note These faults are not instantaneous and have shown test results that take between 2 and 12 seconds to occur ATTENTION The adjust freq portion of the bus regulator PowerFlex 70 700 The user selects the bus voltage regulator using the Bus Reg Mode parameters The available modes include e off e frequency regulation e dynamic braking e frequency regulation as the primary regulation means with dynamic braking as a secondary means e dynamic braking as the primary regulation means with frequency regulation as a secondary means The bus voltage regulation setpoint is determined off of bus memory a means to average DC bus over a period of time The following graph and tables describe the operation 2 50 Bus Regulation Table 2 C Voltage Class DC Bus Memory DB On Setpoint DB Off Setpoint 240 lt 342V DC 375V DC On 4V DC 342V DC Memory 33V DC
302. or separate cooling methods blower may be required 2 180 Speed Units Speed Units Start Inhibits Start Permissives Speed Units selects the units to be used for all speed related parameters The options for Speed Units are e HZ converts status parameters only to Hz e RPM converts status parameters only to RPM e Convert HZ converts all speed based parameters to Hz and changes the value proportionately i e 1800 RPM 60 Hz e Convert RPM converts all speed based parameters to RPM and changes the value proportionately The Start Inhibits parameter indicates the inverted state of all start permissive conditions If the bit is on HI or 1 the corresponding permissive requirement has not been met and the drive is inhibited from starting It will be updated continually not only when a start attempt is made See also Start Permissives on page 2 180 Start permissives are conditions required to permit the drive to start in any mode run jog auto tune etc When all permissive conditions are met the drive is considered ready to start The ready condition is available as the drive ready status Permissive Conditions 1 No faults can be active 2 No type2 alarms can be active 3 The TB Enable input if configured must be closed 4 The DC bus precharge logic must indicate it is a start permissive 5 All Stop inputs must be negated See special Digital Inputs Stops Configuration iss
303. or set params 54 selection made Slip Comp amp 69 72 to 1 24 1 3 17 B lt Enable gt default values E Start Up Sum Disable B y 1 20 Start Up SVC tart Up i V Hz Enter choice for EN vector Sar Up Enter value for Slip Comp nter value for Control selected Run Boost lt Enabie gt er FPR Disable is Standard V Hz 10V isable Set 480 0 XXX lt yy y 1 8 B 1 25 Enable 1 22 Disable Enable Start Up Set 80 1 Start Up Set 80 0 Set 80 1 Flux Vector oad V Hz a i Enter choice of V Hz Enter value for 14 y lc 15 B Speed Units Control selected Start Boost Start Up Start Up Hz is Fan Pump 10 0 V SVC SVC RPM no Slip Comp X XXXX lt y yyyy Control selected Control selected 1 9 is SVC with is SVC with 1 26 no Slip Comp Slip Comp Start Up Flux Vector Controlisoleciod Start Up Enter choice of q PUR dd V Hz Regulation with Si Cul Enter value for lt Speed gt vin SID Ome Break Voltage Torque Speed path 10 0 Hz Set 88 to 1 141 XX yy Torque path a B 1 27 Start Up Flux Vector Start Up Start Up Control selected V Hz Flux Vector is FOC Speed Enter value for Fee Torque Regulate Break Frequency egulate option 0 Hz 1 Torque Regul X XXXX lt Y YY YY 2 Min Torque Spd 1 16 3 Max Torque Spd 1 28 Absolute Start Up 4 T d Min Torque 5 Sur Nae Set 88 Flux Vector Start Up Speed Control selected V Hz Set 88 3 is Torque FOC Enter value for Absolute Max Voltage Sum Trq Speed 10 0V YET Max B br Set 88 5 XX yy art Up d egula
304. or should be coupled to the load to find an accurate value The inertia test can be performed during the Start up routine on the LCD HIM The inertia test can also be run manually by setting Inertia Autotune to 1 Inertia Tune and then starting the drive Troubleshooting the Autotune Procedure If any errors are encountered during the Autotune process drive parameters are not changed the appropriate fault code will be displayed in the fault queue and the Autotune parameter is reset to 0 If the Autotune procedure is aborted by the user the drive parameters are not changed and the Autotune parameter is reset to 0 The following conditions will generate a fault during an Autotune procedure e Incorrect stator resistance measurement e Incorrect motor flux current measurement Load too large Autotune aborted by user Incorrect leakage inductance measurement PowerFlex 700VC Block Diagrams swejbeig 19019 Speed Control Reference 2 0ms i 5 dare I Speed Control Regulator 1 0ms l ommanded Spee Trim In Select Qu
305. order lt A Dig Inputs gt B Dig Outputs C Anlg Outputs Enter PAD Done p B Dig Outputs pus AL Goto 624 Goto 0 1 7 Basic Start Up Start Stop l O D Done E Anlg Enter 6 2 OR m a Pu ie AC Goto 629 POE LX Enter choice for StartUp I Digital Int Sel A Dig Inputs T Make a selection T 6 gt Easy Configure Done Digtelnt 4 aL Custom Configure Wee i i A i Dig Inputs i Custom Configure a y Al 9 Enter choice for f rius Digitalln2 Digital In2 Sel Dig Inputs E Easy Configure Make a selection 6 20 f lt Digital Input 1 gt P i Backup Digital Input 2 Digitan StartUp Bigin 5 6 MOP Digital Input 3 a A Dig Inputs Inc Dec Digital Input 4 Enter choice for Digital Input 5 Digital In3 Sel I Backup Digi i i igital Input 6 1 6 21 i Yes No E Done i 6 3 Ac Sa 84 StartUp StartUp StartUp NA A Dig Inputs A Dig Inputs A Dig Inputs Enter choice for i Digital Inputs Digital Inputs Digital In4 Sel t lt 1 4 will be set 1 6 will be set 1 to defaults to defaults 6 22 Digital In6 N I StartUp Backup Enter Enter 6 5 M A Dig Inputs _ 1 Ente
306. orp Centre 18 Whitfield Road Causeway Bay Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Headquarters for Dodge and Reliance Electric Products Americas Rockwell Automation 6040 Ponders Court Greenville SC 29615 4617 USA Tel 1 864 297 4800 Fax 1 864 281 2433 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation Br hlstraBe 22 D 74834 Elztal Dallau Germany Tel 49 6261 9410 Fax 49 6261 17741 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation 55 Newton Road 11 01 02 Revenue House Singapore 307987 Tel 65 6356 9077 Fax 65 6356 9011 U S Allen Bradley Drives Technical Support Tel 1 262 512 8176 Fax 1 262 512 2222 Email support amp drives ra rockwell com Online www ab com support abdrives Publication PFLEX AT001G EN P May 2004 Supersedes June 2003 Copyright O 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA A Accel Mask 2 114 Accel Owner 2 127 Accel Time 2 1 Accel Time 1 2 2 1 Advanced Tuning 2 61 Agency Certification 1 1 Alarm Queue 2 9 Alarm x Code 2 9 Alarms 2 5 Altitude Derates 1 3 Ambient Temperature Derates 1 3 Analog I O 2 9 Analog I O Cable Selection 2 18 Analog In Lo 2 12 Analog In1 Value 2 18 Analog In2 Value 2 18 Analog Inputs 2 9 Analog Out Scale 2 25 Analog Out Sel 2 21 Analog Out2 Sel 2 21 Analog Outputs 2 21 Analog Scaling 2 12 Anlg In 1 2 Loss 2 17 Anlg In Config 2 6 2 9 Anlg In Loss 2 7 Anlg In Sqr Root 2 16 Anlg Out Setpt 2 26 Auto M
307. orque performance when required The shaping takes place by programming 5 distinct points on the curve Start Boost Used to create additional torque for breakaway from zero speed and acceleration of heavy loads at lower speeds Run Boost Used to create additional running torque at low speeds The value is typically less than the required acceleration torque The drive will lower the boost voltage to this level when running at low speeds not accelerating This reduces excess motor heating that could be caused if the higher start accel boost level were used Break Voltage Frequency Used to increase the slope of the lower portion of the Volts hertz curve providing additional torque Motor Nameplate Voltage Frequency sets the upper portion of the curve to match the motor design Marks the beginning of the constant horsepower region Maximum Voltage Frequency Slopes that portion of the curve used above base speed A Maximum Voltage 4 4 45 2 522 5555 Base Voltage 20 2 eb 02 gt Nameplate Voltage Break Voltage 1 gt gt Start Accel Boost Run Boost Break Base Frequency Maximum Frequency Nameplate Frequency Torque Performance Modes 2 207 Sensorless Vector Sensorless Vector technology consists of a basic V Hz core surrounded by excellent current resolution the ability to differentiate flux producing current from torque producing current
308. orque Ref A Hi 10V 200 Analog In 1 Lo Torque Ref A Lo ov 0 Square Root Anlg In Sqr Root For both analog inputs the user can enable a square root function for an analog input through the use of Analog In Sq Root The function should be set to enabled if the input signal varies with the square of the quantity i e drive speed being monitored If the mode of the input is bipolar voltage 10v to 10v then the square root function will return 0 for all negative voltages The square root function is scaled such that the input range is the same as the output range For example if the input is set up as a unipolar voltage input then the input and output ranges of the square root function will be 0 to 10 volts as shown in figure below 10 A Output Volts Dv 0 2 4 6 8 10 Input Volts Analog Inputs 2 17 Signal Loss Analog In 1 2 Loss Signal loss detection can be enabled for each analog input The Analog In x Loss parameters control whether signal loss detection is enabled for each input and defines what action the drive will take when loss of any analog input signal occurs One of the selections for reaction to signal loss is a drive fault which will stop the drive All other choices make it possible for the input signal to return to a usable level while the drive is still running e Hold input e Set input Lo e Set input Hi e Goto Preset 1 e Hold Output Frequency
309. otal inertia reflected to the motor shaft kg m or WK in Ib ft Im Motor inertia kg m or WK in Ib ft2 GR Gear ratio for any gear between motor and load dimensionless R Load Speed Motor Speed If the gear ratio is 2 1 then GR I 05 J Load inertia kg m or WK in Ib ft2 1 0 Ib ft 0 04214011 kg m Calculate Total Inertia J 1 x Record Total Inertia Wo Determining Dynamic Brake Requirements 2 5 Step 3 Peak Braking Power po e ep Pp Peak braking power watts 1 0 HP 746 watts Jr Total inertia reflected to the motor shaft kg m Op Rated angular rotational speed E Og Angular rotational speed less than rated speed down to zero E Np Rated motor speed RPM tg to Deceleration time from p to amp seconds Calculate Peak Braking Power pail xL ia Record Peak Braking Power Po Compare the peak braking power Pj to the drive rated regenerative power Py If the peak braking power is greater than the drive rated regenerative power the decel time will have to be increased so that the drive does not enter current limit Drive rated regenerative power Pi is determined by PY rg R Prg Drive rated regenerative power V DC bus regulation voltage from Table A A R Minimum brake resistance from Table A A 2 Es oe a Record Rated Regenerative Power Pg 2 6 Determining Dynamic Brake Re
310. ove 95 increase harmonic content and jeopardize control stability This output voltage limit is strictly a function of input line and resulting bus voltage PWM Type Sel Allows selection of the active PWM type A value of 0 is default and results in a change of PWM method at approximately 2 3 of rated motor frequency If this is unacceptable for harmonic or audible reasons a value of 1 disables the change Ki Flux Braking Proportional gain for the Flux Regulator Kp Flux Braking Integral gain for the Flux Regulator Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Advanced Tuning 500 0 10000 1 51 0 32767 1 93 0 32767 1 3250 0 32767 1 64 0 32767 1 64 0 32767 1 44 0 32767 1 1600 0 32767 1 95 0 85 0 100 0 0 1 0 1 100 0 32767 1 500 0 32767 1 Related 2 3 2 4 Advanced Tuning 513 514 515 516 517 518 526 530 531 532 533 534 535 539 Parameter Name amp Description Rec Delay Time TBD PWM DAC Enable Reserved Do Not Adjust DAC47 A DA
311. ower up In order for the terminal block to actually gain ownership the masks must be set up correctly see above and no other device can currently have reference ownership Once the terminal block gains reference ownership it will retain it until shutdown until the Reference Mask or Logic Mask bits for the terminal block are cleared or until none of the digital inputs are configured as Speed Select input functions The Speed Select input function configuration process involves assigning the functionality of the three possible Speed Select input functions to physical digital inputs The three Speed Select inputs functions are called Speed Select 1 Speed Select 2 and Speed Select 3 and they are assigned to physical inputs using the Digital Inx Sel parameters The table below describes the various reference sources that can be selected using all three of the Speed Select input functions Speed Select 3 Speed Select 2 Speed Select 1 Parameter that determines Reference Open Open Open Speed Ref A Sel Open Open Closed Speed Ref B Sel Open Closed Open Preset Speed 2 Open Closed Closed Preset Speed 3 Closed Open Open Preset Speed 4 Closed Open Closed Preset Speed 5 Closed Closed Open Preset Speed 6 Closed Closed Closed Preset Speed 7 If any of the three Reference Select input functions are not configured then the software will still follow the table but will tre
312. p applications The drive must be stopped to 4 proceed Press ESC to cancel Yes Drive active STOP Stops the Drive 0 5 04 XN PowerFlex 700 gt Start Up SMART startup satin 709 programs 11 key Yes Make a selection drive parameters lt 1 SMART gt for fast setup 2 Basic Basic startup 3 Detailed programs basic 4 More Info drive functions and options Detailed startup programs motor data reference Backup Basico SMART ramps limits amp Detailed analog digital Goto8 1 SMART O Basic Detailed oi gy EM 0 1 PowerFlex 700 PowerFlex 700 Start Up Start Up Motor Control Complete these Complete these Steps in order Steps in order Motor Dat Ramp 1 Motor Control 1 Motor Control 2 Motr Data Ramp 2 Motr Data Ramp Motor Tests 3 Motor Tests 3 Motor Tests Speed Limit 4 Speed Limits 4 Speed Limits peed Limits 5 Speed Trq Cntl 5 Speed TrqCntl 6 Start Stop 1 O 6 Start Stop O Speed Torque Control 7 Done Exit nao li Strt Stop 1 0 Appl Features Done Exit Flux Vector Start Up Top Level Eee Any state Esc key except 0 2 0 3 PowerFlex 700 Start Up Make a selection Resume Esc Go ipe Abort Backup B k Resume ackup Go to Backup Start Up Menu screen for previous Startup Menu Drive active Go to HIM Main Menu Figure 2 40 Start Up 2 191 PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Opt
313. p compensation also affects the dynamic speed accuracy ability to maintain speed during shock loading The effect of slip compensation during transient operation is illustrated in Figure 2 33 Initially the motor is operating at some speed and no load At some time later an impact load is applied to the motor and the rotor speed decreases as a function of load and inertia And finally the impact load is removed and the rotor speed increases momentarily until the slip compensation is reduced based on the applied load When slip compensation is enabled the dynamic speed accuracy is dependent on the filtering applied to the torque current The filtering delays the speed response of the motor drive to the impact load and reduces the dynamic speed accuracy Reducing the amount of filtering applied to the torque current can increase the dynamic speed accuracy of the system However minimizing the amount of filtering can result in an unstable motor drive The user can adjust the Slip Comp Gain parameter to decrease or increase the filtering applied to the torque current and improve the system performance Figure 2 33 Rotor Speed Response Due to Impact Load and Slip Com Gain Impact Load A Removed Increasing Sli Impact Load Y Comp QU d Applied zld AAA EEE EEEE ake sar ENEE EN as AAA AAA r AR RR na es STETE amp 72 Rotor Speed M Increasing Slip matarama 222222 K Comp Gain Reference 0 AN gt
314. power loss alarm is cleared and it then accelerates at the programmed rate to the set speed Otherwise if power recovers before power supply shutdown the power loss alarm is cleared If the drive is in a run permit state the reconnect algorithm is run to match the speed of the motor The drive then accelerates at the programmed rate to the set speed There are 7 Preset Frequency parameters that are used to store a discrete frequency value This value can be used for a speed reference or PI Reference When used as a speed reference they are accessed via manipulation of the digital inputs or the DPI reference command Preset frequencies have a range of plus minus Maximum Speed PI Config PI Control PI Reference Sel PI Setpoint PI Feedback Sel PI Integral Time PI Prop Gain PI Upper Lower Limit PI Preload PI Status PI Ref Meter PI Feedback Meter PI Error Meter PI Output Meter The internal PI function provides closed loop process control with proportional and integral control action The function is designed to be used in applications that require simple control of a process without external control devices The PI function allows the microprocessor to follow a single process control loop The PI function reads a process variable input to the drive and compares it to a desired setpoint stored in the drive The algorithm will then adjust the output of the PI regulator changing drive output f
315. ppendix A Rated Continuous Power Minimum Ohms 10 Internal Resistors Pag External Resistors Drive Normal Bee Voltaj PowerFlex 70 PowerFlex 700 PowerFlex Product Duty Rating Va Frame Watts Frame Watts 4 70 700 240V 0 5 HP A 48 I 0 50 304 358 240V 1 HP A 48 0 50 60 304 358 240V 2 HP B 28 1 50 60 304 358 240V 3 HP B 40 1 50 48 304 358 240V 5 HP C 40 1 50 32 274 295 240V 7 5 HP D 36 1 50 209 227 240V 10 HP D 36 2 50 209 21 240V 15 HP 395 112 240V 20 HP 9 240V 25 HP 9 240V 30 HP 7 240V 40 HP 46 240V 50 HP 46 240V 60 HP 24 240V 70 HP 24 yon end A 48 0 50 617 631 VA M A 48 0 50 121 617 6311 400V 1 5 KW me A 48 0 50 121 617 631 De B 28 0 50 9 617 631 HA B 2 0 50 97 617 631 400V 5 5 KW 480V 7 5 HP 790 for 400V C 40 0 50 66 9 63 1 and 480V ME Dries c 4 1 50 66 9 63 1 ay ee dp 3 1 50 39 9 43 3 rere dp 36 2 50 278 402 d nid D 2 50 246 282 400V 22 kW 480V 30 HP B PE ET 400V 30 KW 480V 40 HP 18 7 Does not include a resistor tolerance A 2 Drive Normal Duty Rating 400V 37 kW 480V 50 HP 400V 45 kW 480V 60 HP 400V 55 kW 480V 75 HP 400V 75 kW 480V 100 HP 400
316. quirements For the purposes of this document it is assumed that the motor used in the application is capable of producing the required regenerative torque and power Step 4 Minimum Power Requirements for the Dynamic Brake Resistors It is assumed that the application exhibits a periodic function of acceleration and deceleration If tz tp equals the time in seconds necessary for deceleration from rated speed to c speed and ty is the time in seconds before the process repeats itself then the average duty cycle is tz t5 t4 The power as a function of time is a linearly decreasing function from a value equal to the peak regenerative power to some lesser value after tz t seconds have elapsed The average power regenerated over the interval of t3 t seconds is P o 20 Dr 07 2 Op Pay Average dynamic brake resister dissipation watts t3 t2 Deceleration time from p to c seconds ty Total cycle time or period of process seconds Pp Peak braking power watts Op Rated angular rotational speed s Og Angular rotational speed R less than rated speed down to zero Reg The Average Power in watts regenerated over the period ty is NE GP IER rm ty 2 Mp Calculate Average Power in watts regenerated over the period ty EE EE E d 2 Record Average Power in watts regenerated over the period ty Pay ra Determining Dynamic Brake Requirements 2 7 Step 5 Percent Average L
317. r StartUp StartUp y 2 Motr Dat Ramp 2 Motr Dat Ramp StartUp Enter value for Enter value for 2 Motr Dat Ramp Motor NP RPM DC BrakeTime Enter value for 456 RPM 1 0 Secs S Curve Enter gt Go to 0 1 3 XXX lt gt yyy 0 0 lt 90 0 Secs 0 0 100 3 0 Figure 2 39 PowerFlex 70 amp 700 Standard Control Option Startup 3 Startup This section optimizes torque performance and tests for proper 3 Motor Tests Enter 3 1 Start Up 2 185 Basic Start Up Motor Tests ma Startup direction 3 Motor Tests Done Complete these Steps in order A Auto Tune PI B Directn Test A A C Done AN Auto Tune 3 2 Startup A AutoTune Rotate Tune only Fault Clear with no load and low friction Static Tune when load or friction pis are present Enter Backup Enter 3 3 y Startup A AutoTune Make a selectioon lt Rotate Tune gt Static Tune 3 4 Static Rotate Tune Tune Startup 3 8 3 9 B Directn Test K Ne 3 12 Press Jog or Start Startup Startup Enter to begin A Auto Tune A Auto Tune Startup Backup PA Static Tune will Rotate Tune will 3 Motor Tests energize motor energize motor Test aborted due with no shaft then cause shaft to user stop rotation Press rotation Press Clear fault to Start to begin Start to begin continue Start Start Start Stop or Esc ofl
318. r Set Up to 3 User Sets can be stored in the drives memory to be used for backup batch switching or other needs All parameter information is stored The user can then recall this data to the active drive operating memory as needed Each User Set can also be identified with a programmable name selected by the user for clarity Two operations are available to manage User Sets Save To User Set and Restore From User Set The user selects 1 2 or 3 as the area in which to store data After data is successfully transferred Save User Set returns to a value of 0 To copy a given area back into the active EEprom memory the user selects Set 1 2 or 3 for Restore User Set After data is successfully transferred Restore User Set returns to a value of 0 When shipped from the factory all user sets have the same factory default values Reset Defaults does not effect the contents of User Sets Important User Sets can only be transferred via the HIM No provisions exist for control via digital I O or communications module Figure 2 43 User Sets Poca Reset Defaults EEprom Drive Rating amp Motor Y Non Drive Rating amp Motor Factory Parameters Reset Parameters Default Data Active EE Flash Memory 400V Default Data User Set 1 Save 480V Y User set R Default Data Active EE 2 User Set 2 Y tah el exces Mos A Restore User
319. r by means of a diode rectifier bridge or controlled SCR bridge before it is inverted into variable frequency AC power Diode and SCR bridges are cost effective but can only handle power in the motoring direction Therefore if the motor is regenerating the bridge cannot conduct the necessary negative DC current the DC bus voltage will increase and cause an overvoltage fault at the drive More complex bridge configurations use SCRs or transistors that can transform DC regenerative electrical power into fixed frequency utility electrical energy This process is known as line regeneration A more cost effective solution can be provided by allowing the drive to feed the regenerated electrical power to a resistor which transforms it into thermal energy This process is referred to as dynamic braking 1 2 Understanding How Dynamic Braking Works Dynamic Brake Components A Dynamic Brake consists of a Chopper the chopper transistor and related control components are built into PowerFlex drives and a Dynamic Brake Resistor Figure 1 1 shows a simplified Dynamic Braking schematic Figure 1 1 Simplified Dynamic Brake Schematic DC Bus Voltage Divider 0 P Voltage Dynami Control Brake Resistor Signal Common To Chopper Voltage Dividers Transistor Chopper Transistor Voltage Control DC Bus Chopper The Chopper is the Dynamic Braking circuitry that senses rising DC bus voltage and shunts the ex
320. r choice for i StartUp _ Digital In5 Sel A Dig Inputs i z Is reverse 62 Reverse No ge No 3 required from Disable i digital inputs A StartUp lt Yes gt A Dig Inputs i No Enter choice for 1 Digital In6 Sel Yes Yes Yes i 6 6 br V adi Na BAe StartUp No StartUp p A Dig Inputs A Dig Inputs StartUp Enter choice for Enter choice for A Dig Inputs Control Method Control Method 3 wire Digital Input 3 lt 3 wire gt lt 3 wire gt will be set to Fwd 2 wire 2 wire Reverse B 2 wire ner 2 wire 3 wire 6 12 1 67 y 69 Ng EY StartUp StartUp StartUp StartUp A Dig Inputs A Dig Inputs A Dig Inputs A Dig Inputs Digital Input 1 Digital Input 1 Digital Input 1 Digital Input 1 will be set to will be set to will be set to will be set to Run Forward Stop Not Used Stop Enter Enter Enter Enter 613 y 6 16 y 68 y 6 10 y StartUp StartUp StartUp StartUp A Dig Inputs A Dig Inputs A Dig Inputs A Dig Inputs Digital Input 2 Digital Input 2 Digital Input 2 Digital Input 2 will be set to will be set to will be set to will be set to Run Reverse Start Run Stop Start Enter Enter Enter Enter Go to 6 1 B Go to 6 1 C Start Up 2 189 Figure 2 39 PowerFlex 70 amp 700 Standard Control Option Startup 7 Basic Start Up Start Stop l O 2 Done 6 24 StartUp B Dig Outputs Make a selection Digital Out 1 Digital Out 2 A Done I4 No
321. r is activated to adjust the output voltage to limit the current When the current limit condition ceases or the output voltage of the current regulator attempts to exceed the open loop voltage commands control is transferred to the primary current limit mode or normal ramp operation Current Limit 2 57 4 Overload Protection I T This is a software feature that monitors the output current over time and integrates per IT The base protection is 110 for 1 minute or the equivalent I T value i e 150 for 3 seconds etc If the IT integrates to maximum an F64 Drive Overload fault will occur The approximate integrated value can be monitored via the Drive OL Count parameter 5 Heatsink Temperature Protection The drive constantly monitors the heatsink temperature If the temperature exceeds the drive maximum a Heatsink OvrTemp fault will occur The value is fixed by hardware at a nominal value of 100 degrees C This fault is generally not used for overcurrent protection due to the thermal time constant of the heatsink It is an overload protection 6 Thermal manager see Drive Overload on page 2 86 2 58 Datalinks Datalinks A Datalink is one of the mechanisms used by PowerFlex drives to transfer data to and from a programmable controller Datalinks allow a parameter value to be changed without using an Explicit Message or Block Transfer Datalinks consist of a pair of parameters that can be used independently for
322. r name plate data and required ramp times for the following steps Basic Start Up Motor Data Ramp Enter 2 1 Y StartUp 2 Motr Dat Ramp Enter choice for Mtr NP Pwr Units Enter 22 Y 2 7 qid StartUp A Mot DatHamp 2 Motr Dat Ram Enter value for Enter dno for iy Backup Motor NP Power Stop Mode A 123 4 kW x XXX X lt gt YY y a Enter 23 Y StartUp 2 10 2 Motr Dat Ramp StartUp Enter value for Backup 2 MotrDat Ramp Motor NP FLA Stop Mode A Enter choice for 4456 78 Amps DC Brake or No DB Resistor Type XXX XX lt gt yyy yy Ramp to None None Bus Reg Mode A Adj Freq Hold Internal Intenal Bus Reg Mode A Both DB 1st External External Bus Reg Mode A Both DB 1st Enter 2 4 Y Yes 2 8 Y Enter StartUp 2 11 i 2 Motr Dat Ramp StartUp Enter value for Ent 2 Motr Dat Ramp StartUp Motor NP Volts ind Enter value for 2 Motr Dat Ramp 123 4 Volt DC Brake Level No Enter value for XXXX lt gt yyy y 1 0 Amps Accel Time 1 SE uc 0 0 30 0 Amps 6 0 Secs A T 0 0 lt 60 0 secs Enter 2 5 4 Enter Enter StartUp Enter 2 12 Y 2 Motr Dat Ramp Enter value for StartUp Motor NP Hertz Backup 2 Motr Dat Ramp 60 0 Hz Enter value for X X lt gt y y Decel Time 1 6 0 Secs 0 0 lt 60 0 secs Enter Yes 2 6 Y 2 9 Y 2413 Ente
323. r speed Options 0 Open Loop feedback Note that all selections are 1 Slip Comp available when using Process PI 2 Reserved Open Loop 0 no encoder is present 3 Encoder and slip compensation is not needed 4 Reserved Slip Comp 1 tight speed control is 5 Simulator needed and encoder is not present Encoder 3 an encoder is present Simulator 5 Simulates a motor for testing drive operation amp interface check Open Loop As the load on an induction motor increases the rotor speed or shaft speed of the motor decreases creating additional slip and therefore torque to drive the larger load This decrease in motor speed may have adverse effects on the process If the Speed Mode parameter is set to Open Loop no speed control will be exercised Motor speed will be dependent on load changes and the drive will make no attempt to correct for increasing or decreasing output frequency due to load Slip Compensation As the load on an induction motor increases the rotor speed or shaft speed of the motor decreases creating additional slip and therefore torque to drive the larger load This decrease in motor speed may have adverse effects on the process If speed control is required to maintain proper process control the slip compensation feature of the PowerFlex drives can be enabled by the user to more accurately regulate the speed of the motor without addi
324. rames A and B 600V Frames A amp B 1800 Peak Power 1200 1800 1200 Peak Power 1 2345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Decel Time Seconds Figure 3 9 PowerFlex 70 600 Volt Frame C 600V Frame C 1 2 3 4567 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 4 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Decel Ti me Seconds 3 8 Peak Power Peak Power Evaluating the Internal Resistor PowerFlex 700 Power Curves Figure 3 10 PowerFlex 700 240 Volt Frame 1 to 5 HP 3000 2800 240V Frame 1 to 5 HP 2600 2400 2200 2000 1800 1600 1400 1200 1000 800 600 400 200 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Decel Time Seconds Figure 3 11 PowerFlex 700 240 Volt Frame 1 7 5 HP 3000 20 2800 240V Frame 1 7 5 HP 2600 2400 2200 2000 1800 1600 1400 1200 1000 800 600 400 200
325. rd Press ea Verify 9999 Enter to save the new password 2 108 Input Devices Input Devices The User Display The User Display is shown when module keys have been inactive for a predetermined amount of time The display can be programmed to show pertinent information Setting the User Display Step Key s Example Displays 1 Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll to Operator Intrfc Press Enter TY QQ Operator Intrfc Change Password 2 Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll User Display to User Display Press Enter eo Parameters 3 Select the desired user display Press Enter Scroll to the parameter that the user display will be based on O 4 Press Enter Set a scale factor 5 Press Enter to save the scale factor and move to the last line 6 Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to change the text 7 Press Enter to save the new user display Setting the Properties of the User Display The following HIM parameters can be set as desired e User Display Enables or disables the user display e User Display 1 Selects which user display parameter appears on the top line of the user display e User Display 2 Selects which user display parameter appears on the bottom line of the user display e User Display Time Sets how many seconds will elapse after the last programming key is touched before the HIM displays the user display Contactors See Motor Start Stop Precautions
326. re 2 15 Current at 4 kHz PWM Frequency Tek Stop 25 0kS s 94 Acqs C4 RMS 11 46mv M2 00ms Chd 7 11 8mv Ch4 10 0mVvQ The benefits of increased carrier frequency include less motor heating and lower audible noise An increase in motor heating is considered negligible and motor failure at lower switching frequencies is very remote The higher switching frequency creates less vibration in the motor windings and laminations thus lower audible noise This may be desirable in some applications Some undesirable effects of higher switching frequencies include derating ambient temperature vs load characteristics of the drive higher cable charging currents and higher potential for common mode noise A very large majority of all drive applications will perform adequately at 2 4 kHz CE Conformity CE Conformity 2 53 EMC Instructions CE Conformity Conformity with the Low Voltage LV Directive and Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive has been demonstrated using harmonized European Norm EN standards published in the Official Journal of the European Communities PowerFlex Drives comply with the EN standards listed below when installed according to the User and Reference Manuals CE Declarations of Conformity are available online at http www ab com certification ce docs Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC e EN50178 Electronic equipment for use in power installa
327. red as providing derivative control There are two ways the PI Controller can be configured to modify the commanded speed e Process Trim The PI Output can be added to the master speed reference e Process Control PI can have exclusive control of the commanded speed The selection between these two modes of operation is done in the PI Configuration parameter Process Trim Process Trim takes the output of PI regulator and sums it with a master speed reference to control the process In the following example the master speed reference sets the wind unwind speed and the dancer pot signal is used as a PI Feedback to control the tension in the system An equilibrium point is programmed as PI Reference and as the tension increases or decreases during winding the master speed is trimmed to compensate and maintain tension near the equilibrium point Equilibrium Point PI Reference Sel Dancer Pot PI Feedback Sel gt lt 10 Volts Master Speed Reference GyJ When the PI is disabled the commanded speed is the ramped speed reference Slip Adder Process PI Loop 2 139 Slip Comp 1 Spd Ref Linear Ramp amp S Curve PI Ref PI Fok E Process PI Controller PI Disabled u Open Loop ME gt Process PI Spd Cmd
328. rent rated speed and rated temperature Motor NP FLA The motor nameplate defines the output amps when operating at rated voltage rated speed and rated temperature It is used in the motor thermal overload and in the calculation of slip Motor NP Hz The motor nameplate base frequency defines the output frequency when operating at rated voltage rated current rated speed and rated temperature Motor NP RPM The motor nameplate RPM defines the rated speed when operating at motor nameplate base frequency rated current base voltage and rated temperature This is used to calculate slip Motor NP Power The motor nameplate power is used together with the other nameplate values to calculate default values for motor parameters to and facilitate the commissioning process This may be entered in horsepower or in kilowatts as selected in the previous parameter or kW for certain catalog numbers and HP for others Motor NP Pwr Units Determines the units for Motor NP Power Possible setting are 0 Horsepower units are displayed in HP 1 kilowatts units are displayed in kW The following are only available with the PowerFlex 700 Vector option 2 Convert HP converts units to HP from kW by dividing Motor NP Power by 0 746 3 Covert kW converts units to kW from HP by multiplying Motor NP Power by 0 746 Motor Poles Defines the number of motor poles in the motor Motor Poles is calculate
329. requency to try and make the process variable equal the setpoint Proportional control P adjusts output based on size of the error larger error proportionally larger correction If the error is doubled then the output of the proportional control is doubled and conversely if the error is cut in half then the output of the proportional output will be cut in half With proportional control there is always an error so the feedback and the reference are never equal Integral control I adjusts the output based on the duration of the error The longer the error is present the harder it tries to correct The integral 2 138 Process Pl Loop control by itself is a ramp output correction This type of control gives a smoothing effect to the output and will continue to integrate until zero error is achieved By itself integral control is slower than many applications require and therefore is combined with proportional control PI Derivative Control D adjusts the output based on the rate of change of the error and by itself tends to be unstable The faster that the error is changing the larger change to the output Derivative control is generally not required and when it is used is almost always combined with proportional and integral control PID The PI function can perform a combination of proportional and integral control It does not perform derivative control however the accel decel control of the drive can be conside
330. rim Ref B Preset Speed 4 Preset 4 Auto E Anlg In Loss l l Anlg 11 1 1 Preset Speed 1 101 Preset Spd1 I i Preset Speed 5 Preset 5 Auto 5L Analog In 1 2 Loss mm l i I Preset Speed2 102 Preset Spd2 12 eim 9L MT oi i 4 Preset Speed 6 Preset 6 Auto From Internal Cer I 13 11 Selectable Ref s Preset Speed 3 103 Preset Spd3 IL 0 7 OR 1 I I Preset Speed 7 Preset 7 Auto Ea ault R Preset Speed 4 104 Preset Spd4 i l I 9 Speed Ref B Preseti I Hold Ref Preset Speed 5 Preset Spas 91 4 EE Selector 16 Preset Speed 6 Preset Spd6 hs l From Internal 1711 From Analog In1 Ref a DPI Command Drive Logic Rslt rm ii Analog In 1 Preset Speed 7 Preset Spd7 imi 1002 nalog In Jog l From Analog In2 Ref DPI Port 1 DPI Port 1 18 IP 9 Analog In 2 24 m 02 10D5 i i 19 From MOP Output Ref 911 811 0 l DPI Port 2 DPI Port 2 IL 8F3 MOP Level A TB Manual iP Le gt To Reference 1 DPI Port 3 DPI Porta 29 4 DPI Port 1 Port 1 Manual 2 e 100 oJ dog ret 1 442 Power Up l Preload 211 10 Jog Speed 1 1 DPI Port 4 DPI Port 4 1 DPI Port 2 Port 2 Manual 4 DPI Port 5 DPI Port 5 22 4 DPI Port 3 Port 3 Manual 11 iP TB Jog 2 I HIM Jog Speed 2 2311 Preload 12 DPI Port 6 DPI Port 6 I DPI Port 4 Port 4 Manual II 13 Save HIM Ref DPI Port5 Port 5 Manual I e At Powr Down l DPI Port 6 Port 6 Manual M i 0 Not Saved Command Ref I I NVS Saved i
331. ription Scale1 In Value Encoder Speed We are scaling Encoder Speed Encoder Speed Scale1 In Hi Analog Out1 Hi Link ncoder Spee Scale1 In Lo Analog Out1 Lo Example Configuration 3 In this configuration Analog In 2 is a 10V to 10V signal which corresponds to 800 to 800 motor torque from another drive We want to use the 200 to 200 range 2 5V to 2 5V of that motor torque and correspond it to 210046 to 100 of the PI Reference 2 g 3o os gt T gt 9A os i amp 100 80 60 40 20 0 20 40 60 80 100 PI Reference Parameter Settings Parameter Value Description Scale 1 In Hi 25V 2 5 V 200 torque from other drive Scale 1 In Lo 2 5V 2 5 V 200 torque from other drive PI Reference Sel 25 Scale Block1 Out The PI Reference becomes the output of the scale block PI Reference Hi 100 96 100 PI Reference corresponds to 200 torque from other drive PI Reference Lo 100 96 10096 PI Reference corresponds to 200 torque from other drive Parameter Links Destination Parameter Description Scale1 In Value Analog In2 Value We are scaling Analog In 2 value Carr Scale In Hi PI Reference Hi Analog In2 Value C2 gt 476 Scale1 In Value Epirus Pl Reference Link 478 Scale1 In Lo PI Reference Lo 2 160 Shear Pin Fault Shear Pin Fault This feature allows the user to select programming that will fault the dri
332. rom Internal Anlg In Config 322 TB Man Ref Hi Selectable Source s Abs In Lo Out Lo D A ma V O TB1 6 320 00 Ce Trim Hi Hi Lo Hi Lo 12bit Scale 7 l 181 7 Analog Int Value Scale gt To Analog In 1 Select ma V A D m SURE In Lo Out Lo 7 Output Ref ear o Scale 12bit a Hi Lo Hi Lo H 882 344 a M Enable Scal KX 211 3 4 O curent Selector Analog Outi Sel rang 19 Jumper Gao Drive Alarm 1 g Anlg In Sqr Root Analog In 1 Loss 323 Ce gt Speed Ref A Lo Analog Int Lo Speed Ref B Lo TB Man Ref Lo Trim Lo Anlg Out Absolut Analog Out2 Hi Anlg Out Config Speed Ref A Hi 341 01 346 340 01 A Speed Ref B Hi Analog In2 Hi p From Internal Anlg In Config 346 TB Man Ref Hi Selectable Source s 2 Abs In Lo Out Lo D A ma V O TB1 8 119 i i i i 320 01 Qo Trim Hi Hi Lo Hi Lo 12bit Scale o 1B1 9 Analog In2 Value Scale T To Analog In 2 Select ma V AID In Lo Out Lo Output Ref gecer i 17 SqRt AN Scale 12bit Hi Lo Hi Lo F J 382 O 347 Ci t e Seale 211 s Analog Out2 Lo uren Selector F Analog Out2 Sel O Jumper 321 01 Drive Alarm 1 Anlg In Sqr Root Analog In 2 Loss 347 92 Speed Ref A Lo Analog In2 Lo Speed Ref B Lo TB Man Ref Lo Trim Lo 0000 01 swebeig 49018 DAOOL Xel41eM0d OL 7 enBi4 swesbeiq 190 8 Terminal Block Configuration Settings 9Dx DPI Port 1 HIM DPI Port 2 DPI Port 3 DPI Port 4 DPI Port 5 Logic Mask 276
333. run without a fault or is otherwise stopped or reset the auto reset run is considered successful The entire process is reset to the beginning and will repeat on the next fault Beginning an Auto Reset Run Cycle The following conditions must be met when a fault occurs for the drive to begin an auto reset run cycle e The fault must be defined as an auto resettable fault e Auto Rstrt Tries setting must be greater than zero e The drive must have been running not jogging not autotuning and not stopping when the fault occurred Note that a DC Hold state is part of a stop sequence and therefore is considered stopping Aborting an Auto Reset Run Cycle During an auto reset run cycle the following actions conditions will abort the reset run attempt process e Issuing a stop command from any source Note Removal of a 2 wire run fwd or run rev command is considered a stop assertion e Issuing a fault reset command from any source e Removal of the enable input signal e Setting Auto Rstrt Tries to zero e The occurrence of a fault which is not auto resettable e Removing power from the drive e Exhausting an Auto Reset Run Cycle After all Auto Rstrt Tries have been made and the drive has not successfully restarted and remained running for five minutes or more the auto reset run cycle will be considered exhausted and therefore unsuccessful In this case the auto reset run cycle will terminate and an additional fault
334. s The maximum time to detect the loss of communication from a peripheral device is 500ms DPI 2 85 Table 2 L Timing specifications contained in DPI and SCANport DPI Host status messages only go out to peripherals once they log in and at least every 125ms to all attached peripherals Peripherals time out if gt 250ms Actual time dependent on number of peripherals attached Minimum time goal of 5ms may have to be dependent on Port Baud Rate DPI allows minimum 5ms status at 125k and 1ms status at 500k SCANport Host status messages only go out to peripherals once they log in Peripherals time out if gt 500ms If Peripheral receives incorrect status message type Peripheral generates an error Actual time dependent on number of peripherals attached SCANport allows minimum rate of 5ms DPI Host determines MUT based on number of attached peripherals Range of values from 2 to 125ms Minimum goal time of 5ms DPI allows 2ms min at 500k and 5ms min at 125k SCANport No MUT DPI Peripheral command messages including Datalinks generated on change of state but not faster than Host MUT and at least every 250ms Host will time out if gt 500ms SCANport Command messages produced as a result of Host status message If no command response to Host status within 3 status scan times Host will time out on that peripheral DPI Peer messages requests cannot be sent any faster than 2x of MUT SCANport
335. s More info 2 wire 9 wire Digital Input 3 More info will be set to Fwd T Reverse 6 9 2 wire 3 wire 6 11 534 2 wire B PG Sa B Y B 6 17 Start Up Start Up Start Up A Dig Inputs A Dig Inputs A Dig Inputs Hohen em um a Dig Inputs Digital In1 set Digital In1 set Digital In1 set Digital Inf set to Not Used to Stop to Run Forward to Stop Digital In2 set Digital In2 set Digital In2 set Digital In set to Run Stop to Start to Run Reverse gi to Start 6 10 i B Y B 612 6 15 i B B 1 6 18 Start Up Start Up Start Up Start Up A Dig Inputs A Dig Inputs A Dig Inputs A Dig Inputs Digital Inputs Digital Inputs Digital Inputs Digital Inputs configured for configured for configured for configured for 2 wire control 3 wire control 2 wire control 3 wire control no reversing no reversing with reversing with reversing Note For V Hz mode states 6 3 6 5 amp 6 11 6 16 are not displayed Go to 6 1 B Dig Outputs Figure 2 40 PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Option Startup 7 6 27 Start Up B Dig Outputs Make a selection PI lt Digital Out1 gt Digital Out 3 s Y 632 Go to 6 1 C Anlg a Digital Out 2 6 28 Digital Out 1 Digital Out 3 Start Up uate T B Dig Outputs igi Enter choice for 6 30 Bional Aut Digital Out 1 Sel
336. s and inches Weight Frame A B C D E kg lbs IP20 NEMA Type 1 A 1224 4 82 225 7 8 89 179 8 7 08 194 2 3 71 211 6 8 33 12 71 6 0 B 171 7 6 76 234 6 9 24 1179 8 7 08 122 7 4 83 220 2 8 67 13 60 7 9 C 185 0 7 28 1300 0 11 81 179 8 7 08 1137 6 5 42 1285 6 11 25 16 89 15 2 D 219 9 8 66 1350 0 13 78 179 8 7 08 1169 0 6 65 1335 6 13 21 19 25 20 4 IP66 NEMA Type 4X 12 B 171 7 6 76 1239 8 9 44 1203 3 8 00 1122 7 4 83 1220 2 8 67 13 61 8 0 D 219 9 8 66 1350 0 13 78 210 7 8 29 1169 0 6 65 1335 6 13 21 19 13 20 1 Flange Mount A 156 0 6 14 1225 8 8 89 178 6 7 03 J 2 71 6 0 B 205 2 8 08 1234 6 9 24 178 6 7 03 3 60 7 9 C 219 0 8 62 1300 0 11 81 178 6 7 03 6 89 15 2 D 248 4 9 78 1350 0 13 78 178 6 7 03 9 25 20 4 1 Weights include HIM and Standard I O 1 8 PowerFlex 70 Dimensions Figure 1 2 PowerFlex 70 IP20 NEMA Type 1 Bottom View Dimensions Frame A Dimensions in millimeters and inches 34 5 1 36 23 9 0 94 lt 86 4 3 40 gt 22 2 0 87 Dia 4 Places 55 4 2 18 yl lt 79 3 3 12 lt 85 1 3 35 gt 55 6 2 19 lt x 75 5 2 97 Bk vu lt 85 7 3 37 gt lt 113 5 4 47 lt 123 8 4 87
337. s been configured to the same input function and this kind of multiple configuration isn t allowed for that function Multiple configuration is allowed for some input functions and not allowed for others The input functions for which multiple configuration is not allowed are Forward Reverse Run Forward Stop Mode B Speed Select 1 Run Reverse Bus Regulation Mode B Speed Select 2 Jog Forward Accel2 amp Decel2 Speed Select 3 Jog Reverse Accel 2 Run Decel 2 There is one additional alarm that is related to digital inputs the Bipolar Cflct alarm occurs when there is a conflict between determining motor direction using digital inputs on the terminal block and determining it by the polarity of an analog speed reference signal Note that the drive will assert an alarm when the user sets up a illegal configuration rather than refusing the first parameter value that results in such a configuration This is necessary because the user may have to change several parameters one at a time in order to get to a new desired configuration and some of the intermediate configurations may actually be illegal Using this scheme the user or a network device can send parameter updates in any order when setting up the digital input configuration The Bipolar Cflct alarm occurs when there is a conflict between determining motor direction using digital inputs on the terminal block and determining it by some other means When Directi
338. sent the same alarm Drive Alarm 1 1 1 Alarm Config Y Y Y 0 0 XIX Active Inactive Inactive Alarm Alarm Alarm The configuration bits act as a mask to block or pass through the alarm condition to the active condition An active alarm will be indicated on the LCD HIM and will cause the drive alarm status bit to go high 1 in the Drive Status word Bit 6 parameter 209 This bit can then be linked to a digital output for external annunciation As default all configuration bits are high 1 Note that setting a configuration bit to 0 to mask an alarm does not affect the status bit in the Drive Alarm parameter only its ability to annunciate the condition Application A process is being controlled by a PowerFlex drive The speed reference to the drive is a 4 20 mA analog signal from a sensor wired to Analog Input 1 The input is configured for mA by setting the corresponding bit in Anlg In Config to 1 320 Anlg In Config 322 9 Selects the mode for the analog inputs 325 323 NA 26 326 Qe VS Ws XEXIX XIXIXIX X x x x x x x 0 0 bartels pits 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Reserved Bit Factory Default Bit Values Analog In Config 0 1 The input is scaled for 4 20 mA by setting Analog In 1 Lo to 4 mA and Analog In 1 Hi to 20
339. set UN 3 User Set 3 a RestoreUserSet Load Application Flash Memory Set Application Set Voltage Class Voltage Class 2 211 PowerFlex drives are sometimes referred to by voltage class This class identifies the general input voltage to the drive This general voltage includes a range of actual voltages For example a 400 Volt Class drive will have an input voltage range of 380 480VAC While the hardware remains the same for each class other variables such as factory defaults catalog number and power unit ratings will change In most cases all drives within a voltage class can be reprogrammed to another drive in the class by resetting the defaults to something other than factory settings The Voltage Class parameter can be used to reset a drive to a different setup within the voltage class As an example consider a 480 volt drive This drive comes with factory default values for 480V 60 Hz with motor data defaulted for U S motors AP rated 1750 RPM etc By setting the Voltage Class parameter to low Voltage this represents 400V in this case the defaults are changed to 400V 50 Hz settings with motor data for European motors kW rated 1500 RPM etc Refer to Figure 2 43 2 212 Voltage Tolerance Voltage Tolerance Drive Rating Nominal Line Nominal Motor Drive Full Power Drive Operating Voltage Voltage
340. t Total Inertia is set by the inertia test Total Inertia represents the time in seconds for the motor coupled to a load to accelerate from zero to base speed at rated motor torque During this test the motor is accelerated to about 2 3 of base motor speed This test is performed during the Start up mode but can be manually performed by setting Inertia Autotune to Inertia Tune The Total Inertia and Speed Desired BW automatically determine the Ki Speed Loop and Kp Speed Loop gains for the speed regulator Autotune Procedure for Sensorless Vector and Economizer The purpose of Autotune is to identify the motor flux current and stator resistance for use in Sensorless Vector Control and Economizer modes The user must enter motor nameplate data into the following parameters for the Autotune procedure to obtain accurate results e Motor NP Volts e Motor NP Hertz e Motor NP Power 2 32 Autotune Next the Dynamic or Static Autotune should be performed e Dynamic the motor shaft will rotate during this test The dynamic autotune procedure determines both the stator resistance and motor flux current The test to identify the motor flux current requires the load to be uncoupled from the motor to find an accurate value If this is not possible then the static test can be performed e Static the motor shaft will not rotate during this test The static test determines only IR Voltage Drop This test does not requ
341. t tart U Start Jog Start Jog C herta Test stops drive 3 17 y 910 y Enter value for 4 Start Up Speed Desired BW Start Up B Auto Tune 60 0 RPM p A Directn Test Executing test XXX X lt gt yyy y Power down and Go to State 3 4 Please wait swap encoder 3 23 leads Rotate Static Tune T Stop or ESC Start Up tonsd 3 24 complete C Inertia Test stops drive stops drive Test complete Start Up Press lt ENTER gt B Auto Tune Fault Rotate Tune i Go to State 3 18 4 done Press lg Yes Mid Stop or Esc stops drive ENTER to con Ups stops drive tinue with Inertia Test No 3 11 Start Up 3 Motor Tests Start Up Test aborted S E end Clear the fault g gt heck motor dat Press ENTER 3 12 Ried Very d Start Up load is removed 3 Motor Tests Note Test aborted due g The Motor Tests are NOT executed while in V Hz mode D UM continue Y 2 194 Start Up Figure 2 40 PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Option Startup 4 4 0 Start Up 4 Speed Limits This section defines min max speeds and direction method M uq Start Up 4 Speed Limits Enter value for Maximum Speed 460 00 Hz XXX XX lt gt yyy yy 42 Start Up 4 Speed Limits Enter value for Minimum Speed 5 78 Hz XXX XX lt gt yyy yy FOC Mode No Got01 6 4 Speed Limits 0 to 0 1 5 lt Enter value for Speed Control Rev Speed Lim Flux Vector Start Up Speed Limits Yes 2
342. t 0 0 voltage e Speed Ref A Sel Analog In 1 e Analog Inl Hi 10V e Analog Inl Lo 2 0V e Speed Ref A Hi 60 Hz e Speed Ref A Lo Z0 Hz e Maximum Speed 45 Hz e Minimum Speed 15 Hz This operation is similar to the 0 10 volts creating a 0 60 Hz signal until the minimum and maximum speeds are added Minimum Speed and Maximum Speed limits will create a command frequency deadband Analog In1 Hi Minimum Speed Maximum Speed 10V Y 4 A Motor Operating Range r Frequency Deadband gt Frequency Deadband gt 0 2 5 Volts 7 5 10 Volts a Command Frequency Analog Int Lo ov T T T T 0Hz 15Hz 45 Hz 60 Hz Speed Ref A Lo Slope defined by Analog Volts Command Frequency Speed Ref A Hi This deadband as it relates to the analog input can be calculated as follows 1 The ratio of analog input volts to frequency Volts Hz needs to be calculated The voltage span on the analog input is 10 volts The frequency span is 60 Hz 10 Volts 60 Hz 0 16667 Volts Hz 2 Determine the frequency span between the Minimum and Maximum Speed limits and Speed Ref A Hi and Lo Speed Ref A Hi Maximum Speed 60 45 15 Hz and Minimum Speed Speed Ref A Lo 15 0 15 Hz 3 Multiply by the Volts Hertz ratio 15 Hz x 0 16667 Volts Hz 2 5 Volts Therefore the command frequency from 0 to 2 5 volts on the analog input will be 15
343. t Stop inputs are energized 2 wire mode it is not faulted and if all Enable Not Stop and Run inputs are energized Power Loss Actions The drive is designed to operate at a nominal bus voltage When Vbus falls below this nominal value by a significant amount action can be taken to preserve the bus energy and keep the drive logic alive as long as possible The drive will have three methods of dealing with low bus voltages e Coast Disable the transistors and allow the motor to coast e Decel Decelerate the motor at just the correct rate so that the energy absorbed from the mechanical load balances the losses e Continue Allow the drive to power the motor down to half bus voltage 184 Power Loss Mode Default Coast 013 Sets the reaction to a loss of input power Options Coast i 0 0 Power loss is recognized when 1 Decel DC bus voltage is 73 of DC Bus 2 Continue Memory and Power Loss Mode is 3 Coast Input set to Coast 4 Decel Input e DC bus voltage is lt 82 of DC Bus Memory and Power Loss Mode is set to Decel Power Loss Coast This is the default mode of operation The drive determines a power loss has occurred if the bus voltage drops below Vtrigger If the drive is running the inverter output is disabled and the motor coasts The power loss alarm in Drive Alarm 1 is set and the power loss timer starts The Alarm bi
344. t in Drive Status 1 is set if the Power Loss bit in Alarm Config 1 is set The drive faults with a F003 Power Loss Fault if the power loss timer exceeds Power Loss Time and the Power Loss bit in Fault Config 1 is set The drive faults with a F004 UnderVoltage fault if the bus voltage falls below Vmin and the UnderVoltage bit in Fault Config 1 is set The pre charge relay opens if the bus voltage drops below Vopen and closes if the bus voltage rises above Vclose Power Loss 2 133 If the bus voltage rises above Vrecover for 20mS the drive determines the power loss is over The power loss alarm is cleared If the drive is in a run permit state the reconnect algorithm is run to match the speed of the motor The drive then accelerates at the programmed rate to the set speed Bus Voltage bM 560V 500V 407V 305V Motor Speed illu a EN Powrlos LL Output Enable Pre Charge LLP Drive Fault TITT 1 gt gt amp d 480V example shown see Table 2 2 for further information Decel This mode of operation is useful if the mechanical load is high inertia and low friction By recapturing the mechanical energy converting it to electrical energy and returning it to the drive the bus voltage is maintained As long as there is mechanical energy the ride through time is extended and the motor remains fully fluxed up If AC input power
345. t most mechanical frequencies are described in Hertz Notch Filter Freq and Notch Filter K are in Hertz as well The following is an example of a notch filter A mechanical gear train consists of two masses the motor and the load and spring mechanical coupling between the two loads See Figure 2 24 Figure 2 24 Mechanical Gear Train VG Bm BL Kspring The resonant frequency is defined by the following equation Jm Jload resonance kspring Toad m x Jloa Jm is the motor inertia seconds Jload is the load inertia seconds Kspring is the coupling spring constant rad sec Figure 2 25 shows a two mass system with a resonant frequency of 62 radians second 9 87 Hz One Hertz is equal to 267 radians second Notch Filter 2 123 Figure 2 25 Resonance rad oscillation no comp 16 14 12 08 06 04 The insert shows the resonant frequency in detail Figure 2 26 shows the same mechanical gear train as Figure 2 25 Notch Filter Freq is set to 10 Figure 2 26 10 Hz Notch Notch 10Hz 62rad oscillation T T T T T T Motor Torque Motor PU Roll PU 1 6 T T T 1 4 1 2 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 2 124 Output Current Output Current Output Devices Output Current This parameter displays the total output current of the drive The current value displayed here is the vector sum of both torque producing and flu
346. t reach the F12 HW Overcurrent value and are sustained long enough and high enough to damage certain drive components If this situation occurs the drives protection scheme will cause an F36 SW Overcurrent fault The point at which this fault occurs is fixed and stored in drive memory Software Current Limit This is a software feature that selectively faults the drive or attempts to reduce current by folding back output voltage and frequency if the output current exceeds this value The Current Lmt Val parameter is programmable between approximately 25 and 150 of drive rating The reaction to exceeding this value is programmable with Shear Pin Fault Enabling this parameter creates an F63 Shear Pin Fault Disabling this parameter causes the drive to use Volts Hz fold back to try and reduce load The frequency adjust or fold back operation consists of two modes In the primary mode of current limit operation motor phase current is sampled and compared to the Current Limit setting in the Current Lmt Val If a current error exists error is scaled by an integral gain and fed to the integrator The output of this integrator is summed with the proportional term and the active speed mode component to adjust the output frequency and the commanded voltage The second mode of current limit operation is invoked when a frequency limit has been reached and current limit continues to be active At this point a current regulato
347. te Flux Vector Ty Speed 4 Seti88 1 15 1 30 Control selected 2 i Y 1 29 y oe eka Start Up Start Up Min Torque Speed ux E 1 13 1 14 Control selected V Hz V Hz is Torque FOC Control selected Control selected Start Up Start Up Sum Torque Speed is V Hz Custom is V Hz Custom Flux Vector Flux Vector no Slip Comp with Slip Comp Control selected Control selected is Torque FOC is Torque FOC Max Torque Speed Torque Regulate v Go to 2 Motr Dat Ramp Start Up 2 0 B Start Up 2 Motr Dat Ramp Use motor name plate data and required ramp times for the following steps Enter 2 1 Y B Start Up 2 Motr Dat Ramp Enter choice for Power Units lt HP gt Killowatt Enter 2 2 B Start Up 2 Motr Dat Ramp Enter value for Motor NP Power 123 4 kW XXX X lt gt yyy y Enter 2 3 4 B Start Up 2 Motr Dat Ramp Enter value for Motor NP FLA 456 78 Amps XXX XX lt gt yyy yy Enter 2 4 i B Start Up 2 Motr Dat Ramp Enter value for Motor NP Volts 123 4 Volt XXX X lt gt yyy y Enter 2 5 Y B Start Up 2 Motr Dat Ramp Enter value for Motor NP Hertz 60 0 Hz XX lt gt yy Enter 2 6 y B Start Up 2 Motr Dat Ramp Enter value for Motor NP RPM 456 RPM XXX lt gt yyy Figure 2 40 PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Option Startup 2 B Basic mode Use formula Poles 120 NP Hz NP RPM as Motor Po
348. te conditions the speed feedback is steady while the torque reference is a constantly adjusting signal This is required to maintain the desired speed At transient state the torque reference will change dramatically to compensate for a speed change A short duration change in speed is the result of increasing or decreasing the load very rapidly 2 178 Speed Torque Select Torque Regulation Mode A torque regulated application can be described as any process that requires some tension control An example of this is a winder or unwind where material is being drawn or pulled with a specific tension required The process requires another element setting the speed Configuring the drive for torque regulation requires Speed Torque Mod to be set to 2 In addition a reference signal must be selected Torque Ref A or Torque Ref B If an analog signal is used for the reference select that from the Torque Ref A or Torque Ref B selections When operating in a torque mode the motor current will be adjusted to achieve the desired torque If the material being wound unwound breaks the load will decrease dramatically and the motor can potentially go into a runaway condition Figure 2 37 Torque Ref A Sel Scale 428 Ref A Hi Ref A Lo Torq Ref A Div Scale Ref B Hi Ref B Lo Torq Ref B Mult 434 Torque Reference Torque Ref A Sel parameter 427 is scaled by Torque Ref A Hi and Torque Ref A Lo Then divi
349. ted Input Volts o 8 PI Reference 100 0 100 5 2 9 PI Feedback 100 0 100 ra E 10 PI Error 100 0 100 11 Pl Output 100 0 100 12 Motor OL 0 0 100 13 Drive OL 0 0 100 14 CommandedTra 800 Rated 0 800 Rated 15 MtrTrqCurRef 200 Rated 0 200 Rated 16 Speed Ref Maximum Speed 0 Hz RPM Maximum Speed 17 Speed Fdbk Maximum Speed 0 Hz RPM Maximum Speed 18 Pulse In Ref 25200 0 RPM 0 Hz RPM Maximum Speed 19 Torque Est 80096 096 800 2023 Scale Block1 4 1 377 24 Param Ont 1 378 Vector Control Option Only Vector firmware 3 001 amp later 1 Refer to Option Definitions in User Manual Configuration The PowerFlex 70 standard I O analog output is permanently configured as a 0 10 volt output The output has 10 bits of resolution yielding 1024 steps The analog output circuit has a maximum 1 3 gain error and a maximum 7 mV offset error For a step from minimum to maximum value the output will be within 0 2 of its final value after 12ms The PowerFlex 700 standard I O analog output is permanently configured as a 0 10 volt output The output has 10 bits of resolution yielding 1024 steps The analog output circuit has a maximum 1 3 gain error and a maximum 100 mV offset error For a step from minimum to maximum value the output will be within 0 2 of its final value after 12ms Absolute d
350. ted as level sensitive Both the MOP inc and dec will use the same rate i e they can not be separately configured The MOP rate is the rate of change of the MOP reference The selected active MOP reference still feeds the ramp function to arrive at the present commanded speed frequency eg is still based on the accel decel rates Asserting both MOP inc and dec inputs simultaneously will result in no change to the MOP reference Save MOP Ref is a packed boolean parameter with two bits used as follows Bit 0 0 Don t save MOP reference on power down default 1 Save MOP reference on power down 2 116 Motor Control Motor Control If the value is SAVE MOP Ref when the drive power returns the MOP reference is reloaded with the value from the non volatile memory When the bit is set to 0 the MOP reference defaults to zero when power is restored The MOP save reference parameter and the MOP rate parameter can be changed while the drive is running Bit 1 0 Reset MOP reference when STOP edge is asserted 1 Don t reset MOP reference when STOP is asserted default Important The MOP reset only occurs on the stop edge and is not continuously cleared because the stop is asserted this is always processed when a stop edge is seen even if the drive is stopped The reset only applies to the stop edge and not when a fault is detected In order to change the MOP reference increment or decrement a given DPI port must hav
351. ter Stop Owner o M o o PP o gt o w gt nm o 0 0 1 X 1 0 The operator then checks the Stop Owner Notice that bit 0 is a value of 1 indicating that the Stop device wired to the Digital Input terminal block is open issuing a Stop command to the drive Adapter Until this device is reclosed a permanent Start Inhibit condition exists and the drive will not restart Also refer to Start Inhibits and Start Permissives Parameter Access Level PET Parameter Access Level 2 129 The PowerFlex 70 allows the user to restrict the number of parameters that are viewable on the LCD or LED HIM By limiting the parameter view to the most commonly adjusted set additional features that may make the drive seem more complicated are hidden If you are trying to gain access to a particular parameter and the HIM skips over it you must change the parameter view from Basic to Advanced This can be accomplished in two different ways e Press Alt and then View from the HIM and change the view or e Reprogram Parameter 196 Param Access Lvl to Advanced Pulse Elimination Technique See Reflected Wave on page 2 152 2 130 Power Loss Power Loss Some processes or applications cannot tolerate drive output interruptions caused by momentary power outages When AC input line power is interrupted to the drive user programming can determine the drive
352. ter than or equal to the skip center frequency and less than or equal to the high value of the band skip plus 1 2 band the drive will set the output frequency to the high value of the band See A in Figure 2 30 If the commanded frequency is less than the skip center frequency and greater than or equal to the low value of the band skip minus 1 2 band the drive will set the output frequency to the low value of the band See C in Figure 2 30 2 162 Skip Frequency Skip Frequency Examples The skip frequency will have hysteresis so the output does not toggle between high and low ge Skip Band 1 Max Frequency values Three distinct bands can skip Frequency 1 be programmed If none ofthe skip bands touch or overlap each band has its own high low limit 49 7 l Skip Band 2 Skip Frequency 2 0 Hz If skip bands overlap or touch the center frequency is recalculated based on the highest and lowest 400 Hz band values Adjusted Skip Frequency 1 Skip Band Skip Frequency 2 w Recalculated Skip Frequency 0 Hz If a skip band s extend beyond j the max frequency limits the highest band value will be clamped at the max frequency limit The center frequency is recalculated based on the highest and lowest band values Max Frequency Skip w Recalculated Adjusted Skip Band Skip Frequency OHz If the band is outside the limits the sk
353. ternal 23 gt Commanded Freq Hz 272 gt Drive Ref Rslt 32767 Convert S Curve S Curve LE Hz Rpm to L Internal To Speed Cntrl Ref Convert 5A4 Speed Units p swebeig 49019 DA00Z X9 419mog pz e1n6i4 swesbeiq 190 8 LET from Speed Cntrl Ref 4H4 Speed Feedback kf Speed Reference gt gt ks PC 25 Fdbk Filter Sel s 0 Lead Lag FeedFwd Kf Speed Loop W H Fiter 2 208407 kp 279 Order LPass P Gain Kp Speed Loop Ki Speed Loop Slip RPM FLA Ga 621 gt Testpoint 621 Speed Control Regulator 1 0 ms Limit s 0 s 0 To Torque Control Ref Lead Lag 6A1 Fdbk Filter Sel Droop Droop RPM GFLA CD te 620 gt Testpoint 620 s swebeig 190 89 DA00Z Xa 419MOJ G 7 aunbi4 BET swesbeig 190 8 From Speed Regulator 5H4 Process PI Config Gay 08 Spd Torq ModeSel p Notch Filt Freq l oi IIR Y
354. tinue to operate In this case the user may want to disable current limit fold back Refer to Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 2 100 Droop is used to shed load and is usually used when a soft coupling of two motors is present in an application The master drive speed regulates and the follower uses droop so it does not fight the master The input to the droop block is the commanded motor torque The output of the droop block reduces the speed reference Droop RPM FLA sets the amount of speed in RPM that the speed reference is reduced when at full load torque For example when Droop RPM FLA is set to 50 RPM and the drive is running at 100 rated motor torque the droop block would subtract 50 RPM from the speed reference Economizer Auto Economizer Efficiency Economizer Auto Economizer 2 91 Refer to Torque Performance Modes on page 2 205 Economizer mode consists of the sensorless vector control with an additional energy savings function When steady state speed is achieved the economizer becomes active and automatically adjusts the drive output voltage based on applied load By matching output voltage to applied load the motor efficiency is optimized Reduced load commands a reduction in motor flux current The flux current is reduced as long as the total drive output current does not exceed 75 of motor rated current as programmed in Motor NP FLA parameter 42 The flux current is not allowed to be
355. tion is open then the terminal block does not request manual control of the reference If no control device including the terminal block is currently requesting manual control of the reference then the drive will use the normal reference selection mechanisms This is called Automatic Reference Selection mode The drive arbitrates among manual reference requests from different control devices including the terminal block Accel 2 Decel 2 The Acceleration Deceleration Rate Control input functions Acc Dec input functions for short allow the rate of acceleration and deceleration for the drive to be selected from the terminal block The rates themselves are contained in Accel Time 1 Decel Time 1 Accel Time 2 and Decel Time 2 The Acc Dec input functions are used to determine which of these acceleration and deceleration rates are in effect at a particular time The terminal block bit must be set in the Accel Mask and Logic Mask parameters in order for the acceleration rate selection to be controlled from the terminal block The terminal block bit must be set in the Decel Mask and Logic Mask parameters in order for the deceleration rate selection to be controlled from the terminal block There are two different schemes for using the Acc Dec input functions Each one will be described in its own section Digital Inputs 2 71 e Accel 2 Decel 2 In the first scheme one input function called Accel 2 selects betw
356. tional speed transducers Speed Control Mode Regulation amp Vector Speed Feedback 2 167 When the slip compensation mode is selected the drive calculates an amount to increase the output frequency to maintain a consistent motor speed independent of load The amount of slip compensation to provide is selected in Slip RPM FLA During drive commissioning this parameter is set to the RPM that the motor will slip when operating with Full Load Amps The user may adjust this parameter to provide more or less slip As mentioned above induction motors exhibit slip which is the difference between the stator electrical frequency or output frequency of the drive and the induced rotor frequency The slip frequency translates into a slip speed resulting in a reduction in rotor speed as the load increases on the motor This can be easily seen by examining Figure 2 32 Figure 2 32 Rotor Speed with without Slip Compensation A Slip Compensation Slip Compensation Slip Compensation Inactive Active 1 5 p u Load Active Load Load Applied Applied 1 0 p u Load V Y No Load Y 0 5 p u Load o m Rm Ss 3 0 5 p u Load 1 0 p u Load gt rn 1 5 p u Load q Slip FLA 0 0 NS Time Without slip compensation active as the load increases from no load to 15096 of the motor rating the rotor speed decreases approximately proportional to the load With slip comp
357. tions EMC Directive 89 336 EEC e EN61800 3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods General Notes e Ifthe adhesive label is removed from the top of the drive the drive must be installed in an enclosure with side openings less than 12 5 mm 0 5 in and top openings less than 1 0 mm 0 04 in to maintain compliance with the LV Directive e The motor cable should be kept as short as possible in order to avoid electromagnetic emission as well as capacitive currents e Use of line filters in ungrounded systems is not recommended e PowerFlex drives may cause radio frequency interference if used in a residential or domestic environment The user is required to take measures to prevent interference in addition to the essential requirements for CE compliance listed below if necessary e Conformity of the drive with CE EMC requirements does not guarantee an entire machine or installation complies with CE EMC requirements Many factors can influence total machine installation compliance e PowerFlex drives can generate conducted low frequency disturbances harmonic emissions on the AC supply system Essential Requirements for CE Compliance Conditions 1 6 listed below must be satisfied for PowerFlex drives to meet the requirements of EN61800 3 1 Standard PowerFlex CE compatible Drive 2 Review important precautions attention statements throughout the User Manual
358. to increase responsiveness Increasing the value in Flying StartGain increases the responsiveness of the Flaying Start Feature 170 Flying StartGain Default 4000 Sets the response of the flying start Min Max 20 32767 function Display 1 o eo o o G s Y Q tc Flying Start 2 99 Application Example In some applications such as large fans wind or drafts may rotate the fan in the reverse direction when the drive is stopped If the drive were started in the normal manner its output would begin at zero Hz acting as a brake to bring the reverse rotating fan to a stop and then accelerating it in the correct direction This operation can be very hard on the mechanics of the system including fans belts and other coupling devices Cooling Tower Fans Draft wind blows idle fans in reverse direction Restart at zero damages fans breaks belts Flying start alleviates the problem 2 100 Fuses and Circuit Breakers Fuses and Circuit Breakers Tables 2 M through 2 W provide drive ratings including continuous 1 minute and 3 second and recommended AC line input fuse and circuit breaker information Both types of short circuit protection are acceptable for UL and IEC requirements Sizes listed are the recommended sizes based on 40 degree C and the U S N E C Other country state or local codes may require different ratings Fusing If fuses are chosen as the desired protection method refer to the re
359. tor For FVC vector control an accurate model of the motor must be used For this reason the motor data must be entered and the autotune tests should be performed with the connected motor Motor nameplate data must be entered into the following parameters for the Autotune procedure to obtain accurate results e Motor NP Volts e Motor NP Hertz Motor NP RPM Motor NP Power Motor Poles Autotune 2 33 Next the Dynamic or Static Autotune should be performed e Dynamic the motor shaft will rotate during this test The dynamic autotune procedure determines the stator resistance motor flux current and leakage inductance The test to identify the motor flux current requires the load to be uncoupled from the motor to find an accurate value If this is not possible then the static test can be performed e Static the motor shaft will not rotate during this test The static test determines only IR Voltage Drop and Ixo Voltage Drop This test does not require the load to be uncoupled from the motor The static and dynamic tests can be performed during the Start up routine on the LCD HIM The tests can also be run manually by setting the value of Autotune to 1 Static Tune or 2 Rotate Tune respectively and then starting the drive After the Static or Dynamic Autotune the Inertia test should be performed The motor shaft will rotate during the inertia test During the inertia test the mot
360. ues below 6 No configuration changes parameters being modified can be in progress If all permissive conditions are met a valid start run or jog command will start the drive The status of all inhibit conditions except for item 6 above are reflected in the output parameter Start Inhibits The configuration change condition is a transient short term condition and not directly user controlled It is therefore not reflected in the Start Inhibits parameter Note that the Start Inhibits conditions do not include any of the functionality imposed by the DPI logic such as owners masks local control etc Start Up Start Up 2 181 Start Up Routines PowerFlex drives offer a variety of Start Up routines to help the user commission the drive in the easiest manner and the quickest possible time PowerFlex 70 Drives have the S M A R T Start routine and a Basic assisted routine for more complex setups PowerFlex 700 drives have both of the above plus an advanced startup routine S M A R T Start During a Start Up the majority of applications require changes to only a few parameters The LCD HIM on a PowerFlex 70 drive offers S M A R T start which displays the most commonly changed parameters With these parameters you can set the following functions S Start Mode and Stop Mode M Minimum and Maximum Speed A Accel Time 1 and Decel Time 1 R Reference Source T Thermal Motor Overload To run a S M A R T start routi
361. ulator is enabled The Bus Voltage Regulator setpoint follows Bus Reg Curve 1 below a DC Bus Memory of 650V DC and follows the DB Turn On above a DC Bus Memory of 650V DC Table 2 D For example with a DC Bus Memory at 684V DC the adjust frequency setpoint is 750V DC Cable Control Cable Motor Lengths Cable Power Cable Trays and Conduit Cable Control 2 51 If Bus Reg Mode A parameter 161 is set to Both DB 1st Both regulators are enabled and the operating point of the Dynamic Brake Regulator is lower than that of the Bus Voltage Regulator The Bus Voltage Regulator setpoint follows the DB Turn On curve Table 2 C The Dynamic Brake Regulator follows the DB Turn On and turn off curves Table 2 C For example with a DC Bus Memory at 684V DC the Bus Voltage Regulator setpoint is 750V DC and the Dynamic Brake Regulator will turn on at 750V DC and back off at 742V DC Table 2 D Voltage Class DC Bus Memory Bus Reg Curve 1 Bus Reg Curve 2 240 lt 325V DC Memory 50V DC Curve 1 4V DC 325V DC lt DC Bus Memory lt 342V DC 375V DC 342V DC Memory 33V DC 480 650V DC Memory 100V DC Curve 1 8V DC 650V DC lt DC Bus Memory lt 685V DC 750V DC 685V DC Memory 65V DC 600 813V DC Memory 125V DC Curve 1 10V DC 813V DC lt DC Bus Memory lt 856V DC 937V DC 856V DC Memory 81V DC 600 690V 933V DC Memory 143V DC Curve 1 11V D
362. ur Maximum Speed Enter 4 6 StartUp 4 Speed Limits Rejecting this change will prevent starting Accept Reject OS Limit MaxFreq MaxSpd MaxFreq MaxSpd 4 OS Limit MaxFreq 400Hz il Accept MaxSpd OS Lmt gt 400Hz Yes Start Up 2 187 Figure 2 39 PowerFlex 70 amp 700 Standard Control Option Startup 5 5 0 Basic Start Up Speed Control StartUp 5 Speed Control This section Enter 5 13 defines a source from which to control 5 1 a Control speed StartUp Enter choice for 5 Speed Control Analog Input Input Signal Enter choice for Analog Input 1 Speed Control Analog Input 2 Adapter oa ae MOP Analog Analog Local HIM Port 1 5 14 518 gp Input 5 25 Remote HIM Local HIM Preset Speeds Port 1 StartUp StartUp StartUp MOP 5 Speed Control 5 Speed Control 5 Speed Control 5 2 Digital Inputs Enter choice for Enter choice for 5 amp 6 will be Signal Type Signal Type StartUp set to MOP Inc amp Voltage Voltage 5 SpeedContro MOP Dec Current Current Enter choice for Comm Adapter Go to 0 1 6 Enter Enter Enter Port 5 internal 5 15 Y 5 19 Y 5 26 Y
363. urve set to 50 acceleration time is extended by 0 5 seconds 1 0 50 and deceleration time is extended by 1 0 seconds 2 0 50 70 0 60 0 50 0 40 0 Hz 30 0 20 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 Seconds 2 156 S Curve Time to Max Speed Note that S curve time is defined for accelerating from 0 to maximum speed With maximum speed 60 Hz Ta 2 0 sec and S curve 25 acceleration time is extended by 0 5 seconds 2 0 25 When accelerating to only 30 Hz the acceleration time is still extended by the same amount of time 70 0 60 0 50 0 40 0 Hz 30 0 20 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 1 0 15 2 0 2 5 3 0 Seconds Crossing Zero Speed When the commanded frequency passes through zero the frequency will S curve to zero and then S curve to the commanded frequency 80 0 60 0 4 40 0 20 0 0 0 20 0 40 0 60 0 80 0 Hz 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 Seconds The following graph shows an acceleration time of 1 0 second After 0 75 seconds the acceleration time is changed to 6 0 seconds When the acceleration rate is changed the commanded rate is reduced to match the requested rate based on the initial S curve calculation After reaching the new acceleration rate the S curve is then changed to be a function of the new acceleration rate 70 0
364. use the drive to jog using these input functions Important Direction control is an Exclusive Ownership function see Owners This means that only one control device terminal block DPI device HIM etc at a time 1s allowed to control direction at a time The terminal block must become direction owner before it can be used to control direction If another device is currently the direction owner as indicated by Direction Owner it will not be possible to jog the drive or change direction by using the terminal block digital inputs programmed for both Run and Direction control i e Run Fwd If another device is not currently the direction owner as indicated by Direction Owner and the terminal block bit is set in the Direction Mask and Logic Mask parameters the terminal block becomes direction owner as soon as one or both of the Jog Forward or Jog Reverse input functions is closed e Speed select 1 2 and 3 One two or three digital input functions can be used to select the speed reference used by the drive and they are called the Speed Select input functions The current open closed state of all Speed Select input functions combine to select which source is the current speed reference There are 8 possible combinations of open closed states for the three input functions and thus 8 possible parameters can be selected The 8 parameters are Speed Ref A Sel Speed Ref B Sel and Preset Speed 2 through
365. ut line to line voltage was measured at the motor terminals in 100 feet increments No Correction vs Correction Method at 4 kHz and 8 kHz Carrier Frequencies Vbus 650 fe 60 Hz 2 6 No Correction 4 kHz Carrier 2 5 Corrected 4 kHz Carrier 0 24 No Correction 8 kHz Carrier Corrected 8 kHz Carrier 2 23 2 3 22 o z 21 EA 2 2 kz E er jg P 1 8 17 1 6 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 Cable Length Feet Without the correction the overvoltage increases to unsafe levels with increasing cable length for both carrier frequencies The patented modulation correction code reduces the overvoltage for both carrier frequencies and maintains a relatively flat overvoltage level for increasing cable lengths beyond 300 feet To determine the maximum recommended motor cable lengths for a particular drive refer to Cable Motor Lengths on page 2 51 Refer to www ab com drives techpapers menu for detailed technical papers 2 154 Regen Power Limit Regen Power Limit Reset Meters Reset Run RFI Filter Grounding S Curve The Regen Power Lim is programmed as a percentage of the rated power The mechanical energy that is transformed into electrical power during a deceleration or overhauling load condition is clamped at this level Without the proper limit a bus overvoltage may occur When using the bus regulator Regen Power Lim
366. ut value from a communication device Example Set Data In B1 to 379 The first three bits of this value will determine the setting of Digital Outx Sel which should be set to 24 Param Cntl INPUTS amp OUTPUTS Digital Outputs SNF NYESTE xixixixixixixixixixixixix 0 0 0 1 Output Energized 0 Output De energized prits 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 413 2 1 0 Reserved Bit Example Digital Output 2 controlled by Data In B1 Setup e Data In B1 parameter 302 379 Dig Out Setpt as the Data In target e Digital Out2 Sel parameter 384 30 Param Cntl When Bit 1 of Data In B1 1 Digital Out 2 will be energized Direction control of the drive is an exclusive ownership function Thus only one device can be commanding controlling direction at a time and that device can only command one direction or the other not both Direction is defined as the forward or reverse control of the drive output frequency not motor rotation Motor wiring and phasing determines its CW or CCW rotation Direction of the drive is controlled in one of four ways 1 2 Wire digital input selection such as Run Forward or Run Reverse Figure 2 17 on page 2 77 2 3 Wire digital input selection such as Forward Reverse Forward or Reverse Figure 2 16 on page 2 77 3 Control Word bit manipulation from a DPI device such as a communications interface Bits 4
367. utput Current Note that analog output value never goes outside the range defined by Analog Out1 Lo and Analog Out1 Hi This is true in all cases including all the following examples Example 2 Unsigned Output Quantity Negative Slope e Analog Outl Sel Output Current e Analog Outl Lo 9 volts e Analog Outl Hi 1 volts 10V Analog Out Lo A 4 Output Current vs Analog Analog Output Voltage Output Voltage MarkerLines Analog Out Hi ans ov 0 200 Output Current Analog Outputs 2 23 This example shows that you can have Analog Outl Lo greater than Analog Out1 Hi The result is a negative slope on the scaling from original quantity to analog output voltage Negative slope could also be applied to any of the other examples in this section Example 3 Signed Output Quantity Absolute Value Enabled e Analog Outl Sel Output Torque Current e Analog Outl Lo 1 volt e Analog Outl Hi 9 volts Anlg Out Absolut set so that absolute value is enabled for output 1 Analog Out1 Hi Output Torque Current vs Analog Analog Output Voltage Output Voltage Marker Lines Analog Out Lo 200 0 200 Output Torque Current Example 4 Signed Output Quantity Absolute Value Disabled e Analog Outl Sel Output Torque Current e Analog Outl Lo 1 volt e Analog Outl Hi set to 9 volts Analog Out1 Lo
368. ve error that could cause loop instability The integrator will be automatically controlled without the need for PI Reset or PI Hold inputs e Torque Trim When Torque Trim is set to 1 the output of the process PI loop will be added to Torque Reference A and B instead of being added to the speed reference 2 PI Control is a set of bits to dynamically enable and disable the operation of the process PI controller When this parameter is interactively written to from a network it must be done through a data link so the values are not written to EEprom e PIEnable The PI loop can be enabled disabled The Enabled status of the PI loop determines when the PI regulator output is part or all of the commanded speed The logic evaluated for the PI Enabled status is shown in the following ladder diagram The drive must be in run before the PI Enabled status can turn on The PI will remain disabled when the drive is jogged The PI is disabled when the drive begins a ramp to stop except in the PowerFlex 700 when it is in Trim mode and the Stop mode bit in PI Configuration is on When a digital input is configured as PI Enable the PI Enable bit of PI Control must be turned on for the PI loop to become enabled If a digital input is not configured as PI Enable and the PI Enable bit in PI Control is turned on then the PI loop may become enabled If the PI Enable bit of PI Control is left continuously then the PI Process
369. ve if the drive output current exceeds the programmed current limit As a default exceeding the set current limit is not a fault condition However if the user wants to stop the process in the event of excess current the Shear Pin feature can be activated By programming the drive current limit value and enabling the electronic shear pin current to the motor is limited and if excess current is demanded by the motor the drive will fault Configuration The Shear Pin Fault is activated by setting Bit 4 of Fault Config 1 to 1 238 Fault Config 1 Enables disables annunciation of the listed faults 1 Enabled 0 Disabled x x x 0 0 x pus 14 131211 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x Reserved Bit Vector firmware 3 001 amp later Factory Default Bit Values The programmable current limit Current Lmt Sel should also set to identify the source of the current limit value If Cur Lim Val is selected then Current Lmt Val should be set to the required limit value Cur Lim Val 146 149 147 Current Lmt Sel Default 0 O Selects the source for the adjustment of Options 0 Cur Lim Val current limit i e parameter analog input 1 Analog In 1 etc 2 Analog In 2 A separate fault Shear Pin Fault F63 dedicated to the Shear Pin feature will be generated if the function is activated Application Example In some
370. vent unknown to the user If the bit is on the fault is enabled If the bit is off the fault is not enabled S xIxix o 0 xj0 Helene pus 14 13 1211 9 76543210 x Reserved Bit Vector firmware 3 001 amp later Factory Default Bit Values Power Up Marker Copy of factory drive under power timer at the last power up of the drive Used to provide relevance of Fault n Time values with respect to the last power up of the drive This value will rollover to 0 after the drive has been powered on for more than the hours shown in the Range field approximately 47 667 years 2 96 Flux Braking Flux Braking You can use flux braking to stop the drive or to shorten the deceleration time to a lower speed Other methods of deceleration or stopping may perform better depending on the motor and the load To enable flux braking 1 Bus Reg Mode A B must be set to 1 Adjust Freq to enable the bus regulator 2 Flux Braking must be set to 1 Enabled When enabled flux braking automatically increases the motor flux resulting in an increase of motor losses The flux current is only increased when the bus voltage regulator is active When the bus voltage regulator is not active the flux current is returned to normal The maximum flux current is equal to rated motor current but may be further reduced depending on the load level IT protection or current limits In general
371. when operating at base speed At low frequencies the limiting factor may be the Drive Thermal Overload Changing Overload Hz 120 100 80 OLHz 10 60 OLHz 25 40 OLHz 50 20 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 of Base Speed 2 120 Motor Overload Duty Cycle for the Motor Thermal Overload When the motor is cold motor thermal overload will allow 3 minutes at 150 When the motor is hot motor thermal overload will allow 1 minute at 150 A continuous load of 102 will not trip The duty cycle of the motor thermal overload is defined as follows If operating continuous at 100 FLA and the load increases to 150 FLA for 59 seconds and then returns to 100 FLA the load must remain at 100 FLA for 20 minutes to reach steady state 1 Minute 1 Minute 150 100 20 Minutes gt The ratio of 1 20 is the same for all durations of 150 When operating continuous at 100 if the load increases to 150 for 1 second the load must then return to 100 for 20 seconds before another step to 150 Cold Trip Hot Trip Cold Trip Hot Trip Cold Trip Hot Trip FLA Time Time FLA Time Time FLA Time Time 105 6320 5995 155 160 50 205 66 14 110 1794 1500 160 142 42 210 62 12 115 934 667 165 128 36 215 58 11 120 619 375 170 115 31 220 54 10 125 456 240 175 105 27 225 51 10 130 357 167 180 96 23 230 48 9 135 291 122 185 88 21 235 46 8 140 244 94 19
372. will always be the oldest As a new fault is logged each existing entry will be shifted up by one i e previous entry 1 will move to entry 2 previous entry 2 will move to entry 3 etc If the queue is full when a fault occurs the oldest entry will be discarded The fault queue will be saved in nonvolatile storage at power loss thus retaining its contents through a power off on cycle Fault Code Text Fault Code 1 x The fault code for each entry can be read in its respective read only parameter When viewed with a HIM only the fault code is displayed If viewed via a DPI peripheral communications network the queue is not accessed through parameters and a text string of up to 16 characters is also available Fault Time Fault 1 8 Time PowerFlex drives have an internal drive under power timer The user has no control over the value of this timer which will increment in value over the life of the drive and saved in nonvolatile storage Each time the drive is powered down and then repowered the value of this timer is written to Power Up Marker parameter 242 The time is presented in xxx yyyy hours 4 decimal places Each increment of 1 represents approximately 0 36 seconds Internally it will be accumulated in a 32 bit unsigned integer with a resolution of 0 35 seconds resulting in a rollover to zero every 47 66 years The time stamp value recorded in the fault queue at the time of a fault is the value of internal dr
373. x producing current components Drive Output Contactor contactors the following information must be read and understood One or more output contactors may be installed between the drive and motor s for the purpose of disconnecting or isolating certain motors loads If a contactor is opened while the drive is operating power will be removed from the respective motor but the drive will continue to produce voltage at the output terminals In addition reconnecting a motor to an active drive by closing the contactor could produce excessive current that may cause the drive to fault If any of these conditions are determined to be undesirable or unsafe an auxiliary contact on the output contactor should be wired to a drive digital input that is programmed as Enable This will cause the drive to execute a coast to stop cease output whenever an output contactor is opened ATTENTION To guard against drive damage when using output Also see Input Devices on page 2 108 Cable Termination Voltage doubling at motor terminals known as reflected wave phenomenon standing wave or transmission line effect can occur when using drives with long motor cables Inverter duty motors with phase to phase insulation ratings of 1200 volts or higher should be used to minimize effects of reflected wave on motor insu lation life Applications with non inverter duty motors or any motor with exceptionally long leads may require an output filt
374. ynamically If the physical input is closed then the drive will take its power loss level from Power Loss Level If the physical input is open de energized then the drive will use a power loss level designated by internal drive memory typically 82 of nominal If the input function is not configured then the drive always uses the internal power loss level This input function is used in PowerFlex 700 drives only In PowerFlex 70 drives the power loss level is always internal and not selectable Precharge Enable PowerFlex 700 only This input function is used to manage disconnection from a common DC bus If the physical input is closed this indicates that the drive is connected to common DC bus and normal precharge handling can occur and that the drive can run start permissive If the physical input is open this indicates that the drive is disconnected from the common DC bus and thus the drive should enter the precharge state precharge relay open and initiate a coast stop immediately in order to prepare for reconnection to the bus If this input function is not configured then the drive assumes that it is always connected to the DC bus and no special precharge handling will be done This input function is used in PowerFlex 700 drive only In Digital Inputs 2 75 PowerFlex 70 drives the drive assumes it is always connected to the DC bus Digital Input Conflict Alarms If the user configures the digital inputs so t
375. yyyy XXX lt YY YY Go to 7 1 Auto Restart Goto 7 1 Done Yes ac Auto Restart tries 0 T y Start Up T Appl Features Enter value for Auto Rstrt Delay 1 0 Secs XXX lt yy Start Up 2 199 Figure 2 40 PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Option Startup 9 8 0 Start Up SMART 8 1 Enter value for Digital In 2 Sel 5 Start 8 2 Start Up 2 Motr Dat Ramp Enter choice for Stop Mode A Coast lt Ramp gt Ramp to Hold DC Brake 8 3 84 8 5 8 6 Enter value for Decel Time 1 10 0 Secs 8 7 Start Up SMART Enter value for 8 8 8 9 Enter value for Motor OL Hertz Enter value for Motor OL Factor Flux Vector Start Up S M A R T 2 200 X Start Up Figure 2 40 PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Option Startup 10 1 0 1 1 Flux Vector Start Up Motor Control Select Start Up Start Up 1 Motor Control 1 Motor Control This section Enter choice of selects the type H Control of Motor Control lt Speed gt the drive will Torque use More info Torque Speed 1 2 1 11 Start Up Start Up Torque Speed Is an encoder Is an encod

Reference Manual 70 & 700 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Reference Manual 70 &amp; 700 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Reference Manual 70 & 700 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive